A283/A284 Supplemental Service Manual

A283/A284
SUPPLEMENTAL SERVICE MANUAL

(To be used in conjunction with A232 Service Manual)
000958MIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

SERVICE MANUAL
A283/A284
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

A283/A284
SERVICE MANUAL
000958MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this
document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh
Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,
used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their
respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for
the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web
site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY

GESTETNER RICOH SAVIN
A283 3235e Aficio 350e 9935DPE
A284 3245e Aficio 450e 9945DPE
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 3/2000 Original Printing
A283/A284
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OVERALL INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 PAPER EXIT TRAY SELECTION............................................................. 1-4
1.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION .................................................................. 1-5
1.3.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ............................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE ...................................................... 1-7
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT................................................... 1-8
1.5 PAPER PATH ........................................................................................... 1-9
1.6 DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................... 1-9
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS...................................... 1-10
1.8 BOARD STRUCTURE ............................................................................ 1-14
1.8.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM ......................................................................... 1-14
1.8.2 DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................................ 1-15
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 2-1
2.1 SCANNING............................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................. 2-2
2.2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 SBU ................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.3 IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................... 2-4
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................... 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS.............................................. 3-2
3.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS.............................................................. 3-3
3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART................................................................ 3-4
3.3 COPIER INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ..................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE........................................................ 3-6
3.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3-11
3.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-11
3.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................................... 3-12
SM i A283/A284
3.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ........................................................ 3-16
3.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-16
3.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION .............................................................. 3-22
3.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-22
3.7 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION .................... 3-25
3.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-25
3.8 LCT INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 3-28
3.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-28
3.9 1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION.............................................. 3-31
3.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................... 3-31
3.10 3,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION............................................ 3-35
3.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................. 3-35
3.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 3-36
3.11 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 3-39
3.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................. 3-39
3.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 3-40
3.12 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION........................................................ 3-43
3.13 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION ......................................................... 3-44
3.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ........................................................ 3-46
3.15 TRAY HEATER..................................................................................... 3-48
3.16 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT) .............................. 3-49
SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES .................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP2-902)......................................... 4-42
4.1.2 INPUT CHECK............................................................................... 4-43
4.1.3 OUTPUT CHECK........................................................................... 4-47
4.1.4 SYSTEM PARAMETER AND DATA LISTS (SMC LISTS)............. 4-48
4.1.5 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT (SP1-109) ............................... 4-49
4.1.6 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801) ................................................. 4-50
4.1.7 SOFTWARE RESET...................................................................... 4-51
4.1.8 SYSTEM SETTING AND COPY SETTING (UP MODE) RESET... 4-51
4.1.9 NVRAM DATA DOWNLOAD ......................................................... 4-52
4.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ....................................................................... 4-54
4.3 USER PROGRAM MODE....................................................................... 4-58
4.3.1 HOW TO ENTER AND EXIT UP MODE ........................................ 4-58
4.3.2 UP MODE TABLE.......................................................................... 4-58
4.4 TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS ................................................... 4-60
4.4.1 DIP SWITCHES ............................................................................. 4-60
4.4.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................... 4-60
4.4.3 LEDS ............................................................................................. 4-61
A283/A284 ii SM
Rev. 08/2003
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ....................................................4-61

4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ...........................................................................4-61
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS .................................................................................4-61
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 5-1
5.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................5-1
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 6-1
6.1 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................6-1
6.1.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR/OPERATION PANEL ..................................6-2
6.1.3 LENS BLOCK/SBU ASSEMBLY ......................................................6-3
6.1.4 SCANNER MOTOR..........................................................................6-4
6.1.5 SIB/LAMP STABILIZER....................................................................6-5
6.2 LASER UNIT .............................................................................................6-6
6.2.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .......................................................6-6
6.2.2 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................6-7
6.2.3 LASER BEAM PITCH ADJUSTMENT ..............................................6-8
6.3 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ......................................6-9
6.3.1 PRINTING ........................................................................................6-9
6.3.2 SCANNING.....................................................................................6-12
6.3.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT...........................................................6-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 7-1
7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................7-1
7.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................7-2
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................7-24
7.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................7-24
7.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................7-25
7.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................7-26
SCANNER KIT B359

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION......................................... 8-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................8-1
1.1.1 SCANNER CONTROL BOARD ........................................................8-1
1.1.2 DRAM SIMM.....................................................................................8-2
1.2 SOFTWARE ..............................................................................................8-3
SM iii A283/A284
Rev. 11/2002
1.2.1 SCANNER DRIVERS .......................................................................8-3

1.2.2 SCANNER UTILITIES ......................................................................8-3
1.2.3 SCANNER UTILITY (OPTION).........................................................8-3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 8-4

2.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .........................................................................8-4
2.2 SCANNER FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................8-6
2.2.1 SELF DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................8-6
2.2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING IN THE SCANNER CONTROLLER.............8-6
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 8-7
4. SERVICE TABLE ....................................................................... 8-11

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................8-11
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM ACCESS PROCEDURE .............................8-11
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..........................................8-11
4.2 DOWNLOADING NEW SOFTWARE ......................................................8-13
4.2.1 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURE .....................................8-13
4.2.2 ERROR MESSAGES DURING THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD ...8-14
5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...................................... 8-15

5.1 PRECAUTION .........................................................................................8-15
5.2 NOTE FOR REPLACING THE SCANNER CONTROLLER BOARD.......8-15
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................... 8-16

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITION..................................................................8-16
6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................8-16
6.2 LEDS .......................................................................................................8-17
6.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY ............................................................................8-18
6.3.1 B359 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY ...............................8-18
A283/A284 iv SM
FAX UNIT A874
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 FEATURES............................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 FEATURES LIST ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ............................... 1-5
1.3 OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL ............................................................. 1-6
1.3.1 SYSTEM CONTROL........................................................................ 1-6
1.3.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL ...................................... 1-7
1.3.3 MEMORY BACK-UP ........................................................................ 1-7
1.4 VIDEO DATA PATH.................................................................................. 1-8
1.4.1 TRANSMISSION.............................................................................. 1-8
1.4.2 RECEPTION .................................................................................. 1-10
1.4.3 PC FAX COMMUNICATION .......................................................... 1-11
1.4.4 SCANNING AND PRINTING ......................................................... 1-13
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS....................................... 2-1

2.1 AUTOMATIC SERVICE CALLS................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS........................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 PERIODIC SERVICE CALL ............................................................. 2-3
2.1.3 PM CALL.......................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 EFFECTIVE TERM OF SERVICE CALLS ....................................... 2-3
2.2 SCANNING FEATURES........................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 CREATE MARGIN TRANSMISSION ............................................... 2-4
2.3 PRINTING FEATURES............................................................................. 2-5
2.3.1 REDUCTION FOR JOURNAL PRINTING ....................................... 2-5
2.3.2 JOURNAL LINE TYPE SORT PRINTING ........................................ 2-5
2.3.3 PRINTING LISTS & REPORTS ON A5/HLT SIZE PAPER.............. 2-6
2.3.4 REDUCTION OF THE SAMPLE IMAGE ON REPORTS ................. 2-7
2.4 LINE TYPE CHANGE ............................................................................... 2-8
2.5 PCBS ...................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.1 FCU................................................................................................ 2-10
2.5.2 NCU (US)....................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.3 EXFUNC BOARD .......................................................................... 2-13
3. INSTALLATION........................................................................... 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 FAX UNIT......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 ISDN UNIT ....................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.3 FAX FUNCTION .............................................................................. 3-8
3.1.4 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 450E ................................................. 3-10
3.1.5 STAMP UNIT ................................................................................. 3-13
3.1.6 HANDSET...................................................................................... 3-16
SM v A283/A284
4. SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS ................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 HOW TO ENTER AND EXIT THE FAX SERVICE MODE ............... 4-1
4.1.2 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 01)............................. 4-1
4.1.3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LISTS (FUNCTION 02) ............................. 4-2
4.1.4 FCU ROM VERSION DISPLAY (FUNCTION 02) ............................ 4-4
4.1.5 MODEM PROGRAM VERSION DISPLAY (FUNCTION 02)............ 4-4
4.1.6 ERROR CODE DISPLAY (FUNCTION 03)...................................... 4-4
4.1.7 SERVICE MONITOR REPORT (FUNCTION 04)............................. 4-4
4.1.8 G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST (FUNCTION 05) ................................ 4-5
4.1.9 G4 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST (FUNCTION 05) ................................ 4-5
4.1.10 PC PROTOCOL DUMPLIST (FUNCTION 05) ............................... 4-6
4.1.11 RAM DISPLAY AND REWRITE (FUNCTION 06) .......................... 4-6
4.1.12 NCU PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 06)........................................... 4-7
4.1.13 RAM DUMP (FUNCTION 06)......................................................... 4-7
4.1.14 RAM CLEAR (FUNCTION 07) ....................................................... 4-8
4.1.15 FCU REBOOT ............................................................................... 4-8
4.1.16 SERVICE STATION FAX NUMBER (FUNCTION 09).................... 4-8
4.1.17 SERIAL NUMBER (FUNCTION 10) ............................................... 4-9
4.1.18 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 11) .................................................... 4-9
4.1.19 V.34 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 11) .......................................... 4-10
4.1.20 DTMF TEST (FUNCTION 11) ...................................................... 4-10
4.1.21 RINGER TEST (FUNCTION 11) .................................................. 4-11
4.1.22 MEMORY TEST (FUNCTION 11)................................................ 4-11
4.1.23 DIU TEST (FUNCTION 11).......................................................... 4-12
4.1.24 FILE PRINTOUT (FUNCTION 13) ............................................... 4-12
4.1.25 JOURNAL PRINTOUT (FUNCTION 14) ...................................... 4-13
4.1.26 USAGE LOG PRINTOUT (FUNCTION 15).................................. 4-13
4.1.27 DATA TRANSFER (FUNCTION 16) ............................................ 4-13
4.2 BIT SWITCHES ...................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES .................................................................... 4-14
4.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES.................................................................. 4-28
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ................................................................... 4-33
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES .................................................... 4-39
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES .............................................................................. 4-49
4.3 NCU PARAMETERS .............................................................................. 4-57
4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ..................................... 4-68
4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ................................................... 4-68
4.4.2 PARAMETERS .............................................................................. 4-69
4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ................................................................ 4-73
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 5-1

5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ..................................................... 5-1
5.2 PM TABLE ................................................................................................ 5-1
A283/A284 vi SM
Rev. 09/2000
6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 6-1

6.1 PRECAUTION ...........................................................................................6-1
6.2 NCU AND SPEAKER ................................................................................6-1
6.3 FCU ...........................................................................................................6-2
6.3.1 REMOVAL ........................................................................................6-2
6.3.2 SRAM DATA RESTORE FROM FCU...............................................6-2
6.3.3 SRAM DATA RESTORE FROM FLASH CARD BACKUP................6-4
6.4 ROM UPDATE...........................................................................................6-7
6.4.1 FCU ROM DOWNLOAD...................................................................6-7
6.4.2 FCU ROM UPLOAD .........................................................................6-9
6.4.3 SRAM BACKUP TO A FLASH MEMORY CARD............................6-11
6.5 DATA ADDRESS RANGES ON THE CARD ...........................................6-13
6.5.1 FCU AND BICU ROM DATA ..........................................................6-13
6.5.2 MODEM ROM AND SRAM DATA ..................................................6-13
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1

7.1 ERROR CODES........................................................................................7-1
7.2 FAX SC CODES......................................................................................7-10
7.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................7-10
7.2.2 SC1201...........................................................................................7-10
7.2.3 SC1207...........................................................................................7-10
7.2.4 FAX SC CODE TABLE ...................................................................7-11
7.3.1 A874 FIRMWARE HISTORY ..........................................................7-12
SM vii A283/A284
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by
accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops
or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.
WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
OVERALL INFORMATION A283/A284
POSITION 1
TAB
OVERALL INFORMATION A874
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS A283/A284
POSITION 2
TAB
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS A874
INSTALLATION A283/A284
POSITION 3
TAB
INSTALLATION A874
SERVICE TABLES A283/A284
POSITION 4
TAB
SERVICE TABLES A874
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE A283/A284
POSITION 5
TAB
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE A874
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT A283/A284

POSITION 6
TAB
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT A874
TROUBLESHOOTING A283/A284
POSITION 7
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING A874
SCANNER KIT B359

POSITION 8
TAB
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Information
Overall
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
The “*” mark indicates differences between these machines and the
A230/A231/A232 machines.
A283 (35 cpm) A284 (45 cpm) Note

Configuration: Desktop
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Original: Sheet/Book
Original Size Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Copy Paper Maximum:
Size: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum:
A5/5.5" x 8.5" lengthwise (Paper tray / Duplex)
A6/5.5" x 8.5" lengthwise (By-pass)
Copy Paper Paper Tray/Duplex:
Weight: 64 - 105 g/m2, 20 – 28 lb
By-pass:
52 - 157 g/m2, 16 – 42 lb
Reproduction 7R5E 7R5E
Ratios: Metric version (%): Metric version (%):
400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 400, 200, 141, 122, 115,
100, 93, 87, 82, 71, 65, 100, 93, 87, 82, 71, 65,
50, 25 50, 35
Inch version (%): Inch version (%):
400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 400, 200, 155, 129, 121,
100, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 100, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65,
50, 25 50, 32
Zoom: Both versions: Metric version:
25% to 400% in 1% 35% to 400% in 1%
steps steps
Inch version:
32% to 400% in 1%
steps
Copying Speed 35 cpm 45 cpm Full size
(A4/11" x 8.5" sideways) (A4/11" x 8.5" sideways) Repeat copy
19 cpm 22 cpm mode
(A3/11" x 17") (A3/11" x 17")
Resolution*: Scanning and Printing: 600 dpi
Gradation: Scanning and Printing: 256 levels
Warm-up Time: Less than 85 s Less than 100 s 23°C, 73°F
First Copy Time Less than 3.9 s Less than 3.2 s A4/11" x 8.5"
(1st Tray): sideways (1st
paper tray)
Copy Number Ten-key pad, 1 to 999 Count up or
Input: count down
SM 1-1 A283/A284
SPECIFICATIONS
A283 (35 cpm) A284 (45 cpm) Note

Manual Image 5 steps
Density
Selection:
Automatic 60 s is the standard setting; it can be changed with the
Reset: UP mode.
Auto Shut Off: 60 min. is the standard setting; it can be changed with
the UP mode.
Copy Paper Paper Tray:
Capacity: 500 sheets (stack thickness up to 56 mm, 2.2") x 2
By-pass Feed:
50 sheets (stack thickness up to 5.5 mm, 0.2")
Copy Tray A4/11" x 8.5": 500 sheets Standard
Capacity: A3/B4/8.5" x 14"/11" x 17": 250 sheets copy tray
Toner Cartridge exchange (700 g/cartridge)
Replenishment:
Toner Yield: 27k copies
(A4 sideways, 6% full black, 1 to 1 copying, ADS
mode)
Power Source: North America
120V/60Hz, More than 12 A
Dimensions 670 x 640 x 720 mm (26.4" x 25.2" x 28.3") Without
(W x D x H) options
Weight: 75 kg (166 lb)
Power Consumption:
Mainframe only
A283 A284 Note
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW Less than 1.44 kW
Copying Less than 1.05 kW Less than 1.05 kW
Warm-up Less than 1.00 kW Less than 1.05 kW
Stand-by Less than 200 Wh Less than 220 Wh
System
A283 A284 Note
Maximum Less than 1.44 kW Less than 1.44 kW Without the optional
Copying Less than 1.15 kW Less than 1.15 kW heaters, fax unit,
Warm-up Less than 1.00 kW Less than 1.05 kW and printer
Stand-by Less than 200 Wh Less than 230 Wh controller.
A283/A284 1-2 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Noise Emission:
Information
Overall
Mainframe Only Full System
Copying
A283 52 dB(A) or less 60 dB(A) or less
Stand-by
NOTE: 1) The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.
2) Full system measurements do not include the optional fax unit and the
printer controller.
3) In the above stand-by condition, the polygon motor is not rotating.
SM 1-3 A283/A284
PAPER EXIT TRAY SELECTION
1.2 PAPER EXIT TRAY SELECTION
[A] A4, LT [B] A3, LT
[C] Longer than A3, DLT
A284V508.WMF
The machine allows selection between the paper tray exit trays: Int. Tray [A]
(standard output tray), Int. Tray 2 [B] (optional one-bin tray), and Ext. Tray [C]
(finisher or optional external output tray). If the sub-scan length is more than 330
mm, the exit tray is as shown below, if the relevant options have been installed.
Installed options Exit tray for paper longer than 330 mm

Bridge unit & Finisher (1,000-sheet) Int. Tray [A]
Bridge unit & Finisher (3,000-sheet) Ext. Tray [C]: The finisher upper tray
Bridge unit & optional ext. output tray Ext. Tray [C]: Ext. output tray
A283/A284 1-4 SM
MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Information
Overall
1.3.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2
11 1
9 10
3
8
5
7
4
6
A284V502.WMF
SM 1-5 A283/A284
Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products

Version Item Machine Code No. Note
Copier (A283) A283 5
Copier (A284) A284 5
ARDF (Option) A680 2 C
Platen Cover (Option) A381 1 C
Paper Tray Unit (Option) A682 6 C
LCT (Option) A683 4 C
1-bin Tray (Option) A684 3 C
Copy Bridge Unit (Option) A688 10 C
1000-sheet Finisher (Option) A681 8 C
3000-sheet Finisher
A697 7 C
(Option – A284 only)
Punch Unit A812-17 (3 holes)
--- C
(Option for 3000-sheet Finisher) A812-27 (2 holes)
External Output Tray (Option) A825 9 C
Key Counter Bracket (Option) A674 11 C
Expansion Box (Option) A872 --- U
Fax Unit (Option) A874 --- U
ISDN Unit (Option) A816 --- C
RAM SIMM (Option) --- ---
Fax 400-dpi High Resolution (Option) A892 --- D
PC-Fax Expander B368 --- U
Handset (Option) A646 --- C
Stamp Unit (Option) A813 --- C
Printer Controller B358 --- U
PostScript Kit A854 --- C
Hard Disk A853 --- C
Printer Network Interface Board A855 --- C
Mailbox G909 --- C
Mailbox Bridge Unit G912 --- C
RAM SIMM --- ---
Scanner Kit B359 --- U
Scanner
RAM SIMM --- ---
Symbol: U: Unique options C: Option also used with A230/A231/A232
D: Option also used with A265/A267
A283/A284 1-6 SM
1.3.2 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE
Information
Overall
Copier options
| = Available, ∆ = Requires another option, X = Not available
Option A283 A284 Note
ARDF | |
Platen Cover | |
Paper Tray Unit | |
LCT ∆ ∆ Requires the paper tray unit.
1-bin Tray | |
Bridge Unit | |
1,000-sheet Finisher Requires the paper tray unit
∆ ∆
and bridge unit.
3,000-sheet Finisher Requires the paper tray unit
X ∆
and bridge unit.
Punch Unit Requires the 3000-sheet
X ∆
finisher.
External Output Tray ∆ ∆ Requires the bridge unit.
Key Counter Bracket | |
Expansion Box It is required only when the
| | fax option and/or printer
option is installed.
Printer options
| = Available, ∆ = Requires another option
Option A283 A284 Note
PostScript Kit | |
Hard Disk | |
Network Interface
Board
| |
Mailbox ∆ ∆ Requires the paper tray unit.
Mailbox Bridge Unit ∆ ∆ Requires the mailbox.
RAM SIMM | |
Fax options and scanner kits
All options for the fax unit are available when the fax unit has been installed.
Relationship between main machine, mailbox, and finisher

| = Available, X = Not available
Model Mailbox 1000-sheet Finisher 3000-sheet Finisher
A283 Installed X X
Not Installed | X
A284 Installed X |
Not Installed | |
SM 1-7 A283/A284
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
42
12
41 13
14
40 15
16
39
17
38 18
19
37 20
21
36
23 22
24
25
26
27
29 28
35 34 33 32 31 30
A284V503.WMF
A283/A284 1-8 SM
PAPER PATH
Information
Overall
1. Exposure Glass 22. By-pass Tray
2. 2nd Mirror 23. Pick-up Roller
3. Original Width Sensors 24. Paper End Sensor
4. 1st Mirror 25. Paper Feed Roller
5. Exposure Lamp 26. Separation Roller
6. Original Length Sensors 27. Upper Relay Roller
7. Lens 28. Feed Roller
8. SBU 29. Separation Roller
9. Scanner Motor 30. Pick-up Roller
10. Hot Roller 31. Bottom Plate
11. Entrance Sensor 32. Development Unit
12. Inverter Gate 33. Charge Roller
13. Inverter Roller 34. Fθ Mirror
14. Pressure Roller 35. Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
15. Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 36. Polygonal Mirror Motor
16. Upper Transport Roller 37. Laser Unit
17. Transfer Belt 38. Toner Supply Bottle Holder
18. OPC Drum 39. Exit Junction Gate
19. Registration Roller 40. Exit Roller
20. Lower Transport Roller 41. Paper Exit Sensor
21. Exit Sensor 42. 3rd Mirror
1.5 PAPER PATH

The paper path is the same as for A230/A231/A232 machines.
1.6 DRIVE LAYOUT

The drive layout is the same as for A230/A231/A232 machines.
SM 1-9 A283/A284
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout and the point-to-point diagram on the
waterproof paper in the pocket for the locations of these components.
Index
Symbol Description Note
No.
Printed Circuit Boards
BICU (Base Engine & Controls all copier functions both directly and
PCB1 58
Image Control Unit) through other control boards.
PSU Provides dc power to the system and ac
PCB2 55 (Power Supply Unit) power to the fusing lamp and optional
heaters.
IOB Controls the mechanical parts of the printer
PCB3 61 (Input/Output Board) (excluding the paper feed section), and the
fusing lamp power.
Paper Feed Control Controls the mechanical parts of all paper
PCB4 62
(PFB) feed sections.
High Voltage Supply Supplies high voltage to the drum charge
PCB5 63
roller, development roller, and transfer belt.
SBU Contains the CCD, and outputs a video
PCB6 9
(Sensor Board Unit) signal to the BICU board.
SIB Controls the scanner carriages and passes
PCB7 7 (Scanner Interface signals from the scanner unit to the BICU
Board) board.
Operation Panel Controls the LCD and LED matrix and
PCB8 11
monitors the key matrix.
PCB9 4 Lamp Stabilizer Provides dc power to the exposure lamp.
LDDR Controls the laser diode.
PCB10 19
(Laser Diode Driver)
SIFB (Scanner Passes signals between the SBU and BICU
PCB11 54
Interface Board) boards.
Main (Duplex) Controls the duplex unit and communicates
PCB12 65
with the copier.
Motors
M1 35 Main Drives the main body components.
M2 8 Scanner Drive Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners.
M3 45 Tray Lift Raises the bottom plate in the paper tray.
M4 22 Polygonal Mirror Turns the polygonal mirror.
LD Positioning Rotates the LD unit to adjust the LD beam
M5 20
pitch when a different resolution is selected.
M6 36 Cooling Fan Removes heat from the main PCBs.
M7 37 Exhaust Fan Removes heat from around the fusing unit.
Toner Supply Rotates the toner bottle to supply toner to the
M8 34
development unit.
M9 56 PSU Cooling Fan Removes heat from the PSU.
M10 64 Inverter (Duplex) Drives the duplex inverter roller.
Transport (Duplex) Drives the duplex upper and lower transport
M11 66
rollers.
A283/A284 1-10 SM
Index
Information
No.
Overall
Sensors
Scanner Home Informs the CPU when the 1st and 2nd
S1 2
Position scanners are at the home position.
Platen Cover Informs the CPU whether the platen cover is
S2 3 up or down (related to APS/ARE functions).
ARE: Auto Reduce and Enlarge
Original Width Detects the width of the original. This is one
S3 12
of the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors.
Original Length-1 Detects the length of the original. This is one
S4 5
Original Length-2 Detects the length of the original. This is one
S5 6
LD Unit Home Informs the CPU when the LD unit is at the
S6 21
Position home positon.
Toner Density (TD) Detects the amount of toner inside the
S7 17
development unit.
S8 24 Paper Exit Detects misfeeds.
Registration Detects the leading edge of the copy paper
S9 27 to determine the stop timing of the paper
feed clutch, and detects misfeeds.
Image Density (ID) Detects the density of various patterns and
S10 26 the reflectivity of the drum for process
control.
Upper Paper Height Detects when the paper in the upper paper
S11 28
tray is at the feed height.
Lower Paper Height Detects when the paper in the lower paper
S12 30
tray is at the feed height.
Upper Paper End Informs the CPU when the upper paper tray
S13 29
runs out of paper.
Lower Paper End Informs the CPU when the lower paper tray
S14 31
runs out of paper.
S15 33 Upper Relay Detects misfeeds.
S16 32 Lower Relay Detects misfeeds.
Upper Tray Informs the CPU whether the upper paper
S17 48
tray is set into the machine or not.
Lower Tray Informs the CPU whether the lower paper
S18 46
tray is set into the machine or not.
Transfer Belt Position Informs the CPU of the current position of the
S19 38
transfer belt unit.
Toner Overflow Detects toner overflow in the toner collection
S20 18
tank.
Duplex Entrance Detects the trailing edge of the copy paper to
turn on the inverter gate solenoid and turn on
S21 61
the inverter motor in reverse. Checks for
misfeeds.
S22 67 Exit (Duplex) Checks for misfeeds.
Cover Guide (Duplex) Detects whether the cover guide is opened
S23 68
or not.
SM 1-11 A283/A284
Index
No.
Paper End Informs the copier when the by-pass tray
S24 69
(By-pass) runs out of paper.
Paper Size Sensor Detects the paper width for the by-pass tray
S25 72 Board unit.
(By-pass)
Switches
Right Lower Cover Detects whether the right lower cover is open
SW1 43
or closed.
Right Upper Cover Cut the +5VLD and +24V dc power line and
SW2 49
detects when the right upper cover is open.
Main Power Switch Supplies power to the copier. If this is off,
SW3 51
there is no power supplied to the copier.
Front Cover Safety Cuts the +5VLD and +24V dc power line and
SW4 52
detects when the front cover is open.
Operation Switch Provides power for machine operation. The
SW5 10
machine still has power if this switch is off.
Duplex Unit Detects whether the duplex unit is opened or
SW6 62
not.
Magnetic Clutches
Transfer Belt Controls the touch and release movement of
CL1 39
the transfer belt unit.
CL2 40 Registration Drives the registration rollers.
CL3 44 Relay Drives the relay rollers.
CL4 41 Upper Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the upper paper tray.
CL5 42 Lower Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the lower paper tray.
Paper Feed Starts paper feed from the by-pass tray unit.
CL6 71
(By-pass)
Solenoids
Inverter Gate Controls the duplex inverter gate.
SOL1 63
(Duplex)
Pick-up Moves the pick-up roller for the by-pass feed
SOL2 70
(By-pass) tray to contact the paper.
Exit Junction Gate Controls the exit junction gate.
SOL3 73
(Interchange unit)
Duplex Junction Gate Controls the duplex junction gate.
SOL4 74
(Interchange unit)
Lamps
Exposure Applies high intensity light to the original for
L1 13
exposure.
L2 16 Fusing Provides heat to the hot roller.
Quenching Neutralizes any charge remaining on the
L3 25
drum surface after cleaning.
Heaters
A283/A284 1-12 SM
Index
Information
No.
Overall
Optics Anti- Turns on when the main power switch is off
H1 1 condensation to prevent moisture from forming on the
(option) optics.
Tray Turns on when the main power switch is off
H2 47
(option) to keep paper dry in the paper tray.
Thermistors
Fusing Monitors the temperature at the central area
TH1 14
of the hot roller.
Thermofuses
Fusing Provides back up overheat protection in the
TF1 15
fusing unit.
Counters
Total Keeps track of the total number of prints
CO1 50
made.
Key Used for control of authorized use. If this
(option) feature is enabled for copying, copying will
CO2 N/A be impossible until it is installed. It can also
be enabled for fax and printer modes
separately.
Others
Laser Detects the laser beam at the start of the
LSD 23 Synchronization main scan.
Detector
SM 1-13 A283/A284
BOARD STRUCTURE
1.8 BOARD STRUCTURE

1.8.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Image data SIFB HDD
SBU
LD
LSD
Signal data Driver
Exposure Lamp Polygon

Lamp Stabilizer Motor
Scanner
Motor BICU
SIB Fax Controller
APS Mother
Printer Controller
Sensors Board
Scanner Controller
Op.
Panel
PSU
ARDF
High LD
Main LD H.P
Voltage Position
1-bin Tray Bridge Unit Motor Sensor
Supply Motor
IOB
Paper Feed Sensors

Duplex
Finisher Counter Fans Sensors Clutches Controller
Unit
(PFB) Clutches
Paper
: Standard : Option LCT
Tray Unit
A284V501.WMF
A283/A284 1-14 SM
BOARD STRUCTURE
1.8.2 DESCRIPTIONS
Information
Overall
1. BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit)
This is the main board. It controls the following functions.
• Engine sequence
• Timing control for peripherals
• Image processing, video control
• Operation control
• Application boards (fax, printer, scanner)
2. IOB (Input/Output Board)

The IOB handles the following functions.
• Drive control for the sensors, motors, and solenoids in the printer engine
• PWM control for the high voltage supply board
• Serial interface with peripherals
• Fusing control
3. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

The SBU receives analog signals from the CCD and converts them into digital
signals.
4. SIB (Scanner Interface Board)

This board controls the scanner motor and passes signals between the BICU
board and the component parts of the scanner unit.
5. SIFB (Scanner Interface Board)

This board interfaces the SBU with the BICU.
6. Mother Board (Option)

This board interfaces the BICU with the fax controller, printer controller and/or
the scanner kit. The mother board is part of the expansion box option.
SM 1-15 A283/A284
SCANNING
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 SCANNING
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
For A230/A231/A232 For A283/A284
A284D501.WMF A284D502.WMF
The mechanical components of the scanner unit are the same as for the
A230/A231/A232. However, the following items have been changed because this
machine scans at 600 dpi.
• The lens is larger
• Because the lens size has been changed, the drive layout has been changed as
shown in the above illustration. Note the position of the scanner drive motor.
• Image processing is slightly different
• To reduce the electrical noise generated by the high frequency image data
signal, a shield plate has been added to the lens block unit.
SM 2-1 A283/A284
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING

2.2.1 OVERVIEW
CCD
SBU
SIFB
LD Memory
LD Control MSU
Driver Controller HDD
IC
Drum (GAVD)
IPU Fax Controller
FCI
LD Printer Controller
Driver Scanner Controller
LDDR BICU
A284D531.WMF
The image data flows similarly to the A230/A231/A232 machines. The differences
are the following.
• The video data go to the IPU chip through only the SIFB.
• The MSU circuit is on the BICU board.
• The image processing is changed.
A283/A284 2-2 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.2.2 SBU
SBU SIFB BICU

E
Descriptions
Analog
CCD
A/D Driver Driver IPU
Detailed
O Processing IC
A/D
D/A P/H
GA SIB
A283D500.WMF
The CCD has two output lines, one each for odd and even pixels, to the analog
processing IC. The analog processing IC performs the zero clamp and signal
amplification. The analog signals are then converted to 8-bit signals by the A/D
converter. The digital signals go to the driver, where they are converted to serial
data. Then, these go to the SIFB. In the SIFB, the data is converted to parallel
signals (8-bit x 2) by the driver, and these go to the IPU chip.
The SIB controls the circuits on the SBU (such as those for shading).
SM 2-3 A283/A284
IMAGE PROCESSING
2.2.3 IMAGE PROCESSING

Overview
The differences in the image processing from the A230/A231/A232 are as follows.
• 600 dpi scanning and printing
• Only grayscale processing mode is available.
• The copy quality for the low contrast image is improved (the filters and the γ table
have been modified).
• To consist with gradation and resolution in the text mode, using the error
diffusion processing.
Image Processing Path
Scanning Image Processing Printing
Input Background ID
Copy Mode Magnification Filtering Gradation
Correction Erase Control
Background/
Auto MTF γ Corre- Error
Letter Magnification Independent
Shading Dot Erase
(Strong) ction Diffusion
Auto MTF γ Corre- Error

Letter/Photo Magnification
Shading (Weak) ction Diffusion
Auto γ Corre-
Photo Magnification Smoothing Dithering
Shading ction
Background/ MTF/
Auto γ Corre- Error
Generation Magnification Independent Line width
Shading Dot Erase
ction Diffusion
correction
Low Density Auto MTF γ Corre- Error

Magnification
Original Shading (Strong) ction Diffusion
A284D533.WMF
Photo mode: MTF can be used instead of smoothing (SP4-904-3).
A283/A284 2-4 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
SP modes for each image processing mode
Copy Background
Filtering Magnification Gradation
mode erase
Letter SP4903-34 SP4903-11~14, SP2909-1
Background erase 41~44 Main scan mag.
level MTF filter
Descriptions
SP4903-28 coefficient
Detailed
Independent dot SP4903-20~23,
erase level 50~53
MTF filter strength
Letter/ SP4903-35 SP4903-17, 47 SP2909-1
Photo Background erase MTF filter Main scan mag.
level coefficient
SP4903-30 SP4903-25, 55
Independent dot MTF filter strength
erase level
Photo SP4903-36 SP4904-3 SP2909-1 SP4904-2
Background erase Filter type Main scan mag. Dither matrix type
level (smoothing or
MTF)
SP4903-16
Smoothing filter
coefficient
SP4903-15, 48
MTF filter
coefficient
SP4903-24, 54
MTF filter strength
Copied SP4903-37 SP4903-19, 46 SP2909-1 SP4904-6
Original Background erase MTF filter Main scan mag. Line width
level coefficient correction type
SP4903-32 SP4903-27, 57
Independent dot MTF filter strength
erase level
Low SP4903-31 SP4903-18, 45 SP2909-1
Density Independent dot MTF filter Main scan mag.
Original erase level coefficient
SP4903-26, 56
MTF filter strength
SM 2-5 A283/A284
IMAGE PROCESSING
Filtering
There are two software filters: MTF and smoothing, as in the A230/A231/A232.
There are four MTF filter types: filter strength for main scan direction, filter strength
for sub scan direction, filter coefficient for main scan direction, and filter coefficient
for sub scan direction. These filters can be adjusted with SP mode.
When the filter is stronger in the main scan direction, lines parallel to the feed
direction are emphasized. When the filter is stronger in the sub scan direction, lines
at right angles to the feed direction are emphasized.
The relationship between the filter coefficient and the filter strength is as follows.
MTF filter coefficient
(Weak) (Strong)
0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 10 → 11 → 12 → 13 → 14 → 15
MTF filter strength

(Weak) 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 (Strong)
Smoothing filter coefficient

(Weak) 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 (Strong)
It is difficult to explain how to use the filter coefficient and filter strengths to control
MTF and smoothing. Refer to the following charts to determine how to make the
filters weaker or stronger. The values in the bold columns are the default settings.
Text mode: 25 ~ 64 %
MTF strength Strong Weak
← ← Normal → →
(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
Filter coefficient 9 15 14 12 10 9 9
(SP4903-11)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-41)
Main scan:
Filter Strength 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
(SP4903-20)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-50)
A283/A284 2-6 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text mode: 65 ~ 154 %

(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-12)
Descriptions
Detailed
Sub scan:
(SP4903-42)
Main scan:
(SP4903-21)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-51)
Text mode: 155 ~ 400 %

(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-13)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-43)
Main scan:
(SP4903-22)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-52)
Text mode: Notch 1 (lightest image density setting), 65 ~ 154 %

(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-14)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-44)
Main scan:
(SP4903-23)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-53)
SM 2-7 A283/A284
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo mode: (when MTF filtering is selected with SP4903-3)

(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-15)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-48)
Main scan:
(SP4903-24)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-54)
Text/Photo mode
(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-17)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-47)
Main scan:
(SP4903-25)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-55)
A283/A284 2-8 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Low density mode

(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-18)
Descriptions
Detailed
Sub scan:
(SP4903-45)
Main scan:
(SP4903-26)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-56)
Copied original mode

(Sharp) (Soft)
Main scan:
(SP4903-19)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-46)
Main scan:
(SP4903-27)
Sub scan:
(SP4903-57)
SM 2-9 A283/A284
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct
sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 30
m3/hr/person
Installation
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10 -6 oz/yd3)
6. Avoid an area which is exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes:
1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to corrosive
gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea
level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be
no more than 5 mm.)
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
3.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: With in 5 mm (0.2") of level
SM 3-1 A283/A284
3.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
A: In Front: Over 75 cm (29.6")

B: Left: Over 10 cm (4")
C: To Rear: Over 10 cm (4")
D: Right: Over 10 cm (4")
B D
560 mm (22")
A
A284I501.WMF
985 mm (38.8") 180 mm

865 mm (34.1") (7")
600 mm (23.6")
760 mm (26.4")
A284I502.WMF
540 mm 360 mm
(21.3") (14.2")
530 mm
(20.9")
610 mm (24")
A284I504.WMF
A284I503.WMF
NOTE: The 75 cm recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the
paper tray only. If an operator stands at the front of the copier, more space
is required.
A283/A284 3-2 SM
3.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible.
Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2. Avoid multi-wiring.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
Installation
SM 3-3 A283/A284
INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.
Unpack the copier
Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit, LCT, or Finisher?
Yes No
Place the copier on the paper tray unit

Install the paper tray unit
Install the copier
Install the bridge unit (if required)
If the user requires the one-bin tray:
Remove the scanner unit

Install the one-bin tray
Replace the scanner unit
Install the remaining options in any order
A284I515.WMF
Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers and the external output tray
Paper Tray Unit: Needed for the LCT and finishers
Other requirements: See Overall Machine Information – Installation Option Table
A283/A284 3-4 SM
COPIER INSTALLATION
3.3 COPIER INSTALLATION

3.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Operation Panel Decal .......................................................... 1
2. Paper Size Decal .................................................................. 1
3. Model Name Decal (-10 machines)....................................... 1
Installation
4. Operation Panel Brand Sticker (-10 machines)..................... 1
5. NECR – English (-17 machine) ............................................. 1
6. Cushion................................................................................. 1
7. Operation Instructions – System Setting ............................... 1
8. Operation Instructions – Copy Reference ............................. 1
9. Operation Instructions – Quick Reference ............................ 1
SM 3-5 A283/A284
COPIER INSTALLATION
3.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[B]
[A]
A284I505.WMF
[C]
[D]
A284I507.WMF
A284I506.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
If the optional paper tray unit is going to be installed now, put the copier on the
paper tray unit first, then install the paper tray unit, then install the copier.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Remove the tapes on the exterior of the copier.
2. Open the duplex unit and open the upper right cover [A].
3. Remove the pin [B].
4. Pull out the paper trays and remove the bottom plate stoppers [C].
5. Install the middle front cover [D] which is in the second paper tray.
NOTE: If the optional paper tray unit is installed, this step is done while
installing the paper tray unit.
A283/A284 3-6 SM
COPIER INSTALLATION
[B]
[A]
[E]
Installation
[C]
A284I508.WMF
[D]
A284I500.WMF
[F]
A284I516.WMF
6. Open the front cover.

7. Push down the lever (1). Then pull the PCU [A] out a small distance (2), and
move the development unit [B] to the left (3) so that the development unit is
away from the drum, then slide out the PCU completely.
8. Remove three clamps [C].
9. Loosen the screw [D] and rotate the bracket [E] as shown.
10. Slide out the development unit [F].
SM 3-7 A283/A284
COPIER INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[B]
A284I509.WMF
A284I510.WMF
[D]
A284I511.WMF
11. Remove the entrance seal plate [A] (2 clamps).

12. Remove two screws [B] and take out the development roller unit [C].
13. Pour all developer [D] into the development unit uniformly.
A283/A284 3-8 SM
COPIER INSTALLATION
[A]
[A]
Installation
A284I512.WMF
[F]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A284I513.WMF
14. Reassemble the development unit.

NOTE: Make sure that the development side seals [A] are set inside the
development unit case.
15. Reassemble the machine.
NOTE: When reinstalling the PCU, make sure it is installed properly.
Otherwise, black copies may be printed.
16. Push lever [B] to the side, raise the toner bottle holder lever [C], and pull the
toner bottle holder [D] out.
17. Shake the toner bottle well.
NOTE: Do not remove the toner bottle cap [E] until after shaking.
18. Unscrew the bottle cap and insert the bottle into the holder.
NOTE: Do not touch the inner bottle cap [F].
19. Reposition the holder and press down the holder lever to secure the bottle.
SM 3-9 A283/A284
COPIER INSTALLATION
[C]
[C]
[A]
A284I517.WMF
[B]
A284I514.WMF
20. Turn on the main power switch.

21. After the fusing warm-up period, enter the SP mode.
1) Press the “Clear Mode” key.
2) Enter “107” using the numeric keys.
3) Hold down the “Clear/Stop” key for more than 3 seconds.
4) Select “1” (copier).
NOTE: Do not enter SP mode during the fusing warm-up period (the LED of
the start key is red during this period)
22. Perform the TD sensor initial setting as follows:
1) Enter “2-801” and press the “Enter” key.
2) Press “1” to start the TD sensor initial setting.
NOTE: The machine will automatically stop when TD sensor initial setting is
completed, and the TD sensor output voltage will appear on the LCD.
23. Perform the process control initial setting using SP2-805.
24. When loading paper bigger than A4 (11" x 8.5") in the 1st paper tray, attach the
cushion [A] to the paper tray as shown.
NOTE: 1) This procedure is required only for the 1st paper tray.
2) Make sure that the pad is not attached over the ribs [B].
25. Change the side fences and end fence to match the paper size that will be
used. Then pull the paper tray out and load paper into it.
26. Enter the proper paper size for each paper tray using UP mode.
27. Attach the appropriate paper size decal [C] to the paper tray.
NOTE: Paper size decals are also used for the optional paper tray unit. Keep
any remaining decals for use with the paper tray unit.
28. Check the copy quality and machine operation (refer to the “Replacement and
Adjustment - Copy Adjustment” section of the service manual).
A283/A284 3-10 SM
PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
3.4 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Joint Bracket ......................................................................... 1
2. Front Stand ........................................................................... 1
3. Rear Stand............................................................................ 1
Installation
4. Stand Bracket ....................................................................... 1
5. Knob Screw – M3.................................................................. 1
6. Knob Screw – M4x10 ............................................................ 1
7. NECR – Multi-language (-17, -27 machines) ........................ 1
8. Installation Procedure ........................................................... 1
SM 3-11 A283/A284
A682I557.WMF
[A]
A682I504.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following
procedure.
1. Unpack the paper tray unit. Then remove the tapes.

2. Remove the paper trays [A] from the base copier.
A283/A284 3-12 SM
[D]
[B]
[C]
Installation
[A]
[B]
A682I505.WMF
[F]
[H]
[E] [G]
A682I514.WMF
3. Place the main machine on the paper tray unit [A] with the pegs [B] fitting into
main machine’s peg holes.
NOTE: 1) The machine must be held is as shown in the above illustration.
2) Do not hold the scanner unit.
4. Attach the spring washer [C] to the short knob screw [D]. Then, secure the
paper tray unit.
5. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [E].
6. Secure the joint bracket [F] (1 long knob screw).
7. Remove the connector cover [G] of the main machine.
8. Connect the paper tray unit harness [H] to the main machine and reinstall the
connector cover.
SM 3-13 A283/A284
[B]
[A]
A682I516.WMF
A682I509.WMF
[B]
[C]
A682I511.WMF
9. Install the middle front cover [A] which in the 2nd paper tray.
10. Install the front and rear stands [B] as shown above.
11. Install the stand bracket [C].
A283/A284 3-14 SM
[A]
Installation
[A]
A682I500.WMF
12. Load paper into the paper tray and install the paper trays.
NOTE: The side and rear fences should be properly positioned using the green
screw driver tool.
13. Attach the appropriate tray decals [A] which are included in the accessory box
for the main machine.
14. Turn on the ac switch.
15. Enter the paper size for each paper tray using a UP mode.
16. Check the machine’s operation and copy quality.
SM 3-15 A283/A284
1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION
3.5 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Grounding Bracket ................................................................ 1
2. Connector Cover ................................................................... 1
3. Base Cover ........................................................................... 1
4. Copy Tray ............................................................................. 1
5. Copy Tray Bracket ................................................................ 1
6. Snap Ring ............................................................................. 1
7. Mylar Strip............................................................................. 2
8. Stepped Screw – M3x8 ......................................................... 5
9. Screw – M3x8 ....................................................................... 1
10. Tapping Screw – M3x6 ......................................................... 2
11. Tapping Screw – M3x14 ....................................................... 1
12. Tapping Screw – M3x8 ......................................................... 1
13. NECR.................................................................................... 1
A283/A284 3-16 SM
[A]
[B]
Installation
[E]
[C]
[D]
A684I001.WMF
NOTE: The Interchange Unit (A690) must be installed before installing the 1-bin
tray unit.
CAUTION
procedure.
1. Remove the scanner unit.

NOTE: If the ARDF is installed, remove the ARDF before removing the
scanner unit.
1) Remove the stand rear cover [A] (2 screws).
2) Disconnect the scanner I/F board [B] and the power connector [C].
3) Disconnect the harness [D].
4) Disconnect the scanner I/F harness [E].
SM 3-17 A283/A284
[A]
[C]
[C]
[B] [D]
A684I302.WMF
[E]
A684I504.WMF
A684I505.WMF
5) Remove the scanner unit [A] (2 knob screws).

NOTE: 1) Hold the scanner unit as shown in the above illustration. Otherwise,
scanner unit may be damaged.
2) Make sure the harnesses are not damaged by the edges of the
opening [B].
3) After removing the scanner, keep it in a flat level place.
6) Remove four plates [C] (1 screw each).
7) Remove the scanner unit plate [D] (1 screw).
2. Unpack the 1-bin tray unit and remove the tapes.
3. Remove the paper exit cover [E] (4 screws).
A283/A284 3-18 SM
[C]
[B]
Installation
[D]
A684I491.WMF
[A] [H]
[G]
[F] [E]
A684I492.WMF
4. Cut away two covers [A] from the base cover [B].
NOTE: Trim off any remaining unevenness from the edges.
5. Install the base cover (3 stepped screws).
6. Place the 1-bin tray unit [C] on the base cover.
NOTE: Make sure to hold the 1-bin tray unit at the both sides but never hold
the unit at the center.
7. Secure the 1-bin tray unit (1 screw [D] - M3x10).
8. Remove the cover [E].
9. Install the grounding bracket [F] (2 screws - M3x6).
10. Connect the harness [G].
11. Install the connector cover [H] (1 screw - M3x8).
SM 3-19 A283/A284
[B]
[C]
[A]
A684I493.WMF [E]
[D] [F]
A684I494.WMF
12. Install the copy tray.

- When the Bridge Unit (A688) is not installed -
1) Attach the decal [A], as shown.
2) Install two stepped screws [B], then attach the copy tray [C].
- When the Bridge Unit (A688) is installed -
1) Open the right cover of the bridge unit.
2) Install the copy tray bracket [D] (1 screw).
3) Install the copy tray [E] (1 snap ring).
4) Attach the decal [F], as shown.
A283/A284 3-20 SM
[C]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[D]
[B]
Installation
A684I303.WMF
[E]
[G]
[G]
[A]
A684I515.WMF
[F]
A684I495.WMF
13. Attach two mylar strips [A] to the scanner stand [B], as shown.
14. Change the height of the scanner stand.
1) Remove the stand cover [C] (1 screw).
2) Remove two screws [D] which are securing the scanner stand [B].
3) Raise the scanner stand position.
4) Secure the stand.
5) Reinstall the stand cover.
15. Reinstall the scanner unit plate [E] (1 screw).
NOTE: The scanner unit plate should be positioned at the rear, as shown [F].
16. Reinstall four plates [G] (1 screw each).
17. Reinstall the scanner unit (2 knob screws).
18. Turn on the ac switch and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
SM 3-21 A283/A284
BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION
3.6 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Stepped Screw...................................................................... 2
2. Connector Cover ................................................................... 1
3. Entrance Mylar ...................................................................... 2
4. Exit Mylar .............................................................................. 2
5. NECR.................................................................................... 1
A283/A284 3-22 SM
[A] [D]
A688I401.WMF
Installation
[E]
[B]
A688I407.WMF
[C]
A688I500.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
1. Unpack the bridge unit. Then remove the tapes.

2. Remove the inner tray [A].
3. Remove three covers [B].
If the optional external output tray (A825) will be installed instead of a
finisher, do step 4.
4. Remove the two covers [C].
5. Remove the cover [D] (1 screw).
6. Remove the cap [E].
SM 3-23 A283/A284
[A]
[B]
A688I406.WMF
[F]
[C]
[E]
A688I402.WMF
[D]
A688I404.WMF
7. Attach two mylars [A] to the paper entrance area of the bridge unit as shown.
8. If the optional finisher is installed:
Attach two mylars [B] to the bridge unit as shown.
9. Remove the cover [C].
10. Install the bridge unit (2 screws) [D].
11. Connect the bridge unit I/F harnesses [E].
12. Install the connector cover [F].
13. Turn on the ac switch and check the bridge unit operation.
A283/A284 3-24 SM
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER INSTALLATION
3.7 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

INSTALLATION
list:
Description Q’ty
1. Stepped Screw...................................................................... 2
2. Knob Screw........................................................................... 2
Installation
3. Original Tray ......................................................................... 1
4. Screw – M4x17 ..................................................................... 2
5. NECR.................................................................................... 1
SM 3-25 A283/A284
A680I500.WMF [B]
[C]
[A]
[A]
A680I501.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
1. Unpack the ARDF. Then remove the tapes on the exterior of the ARDF.
2. Tighten the two stud screws [A].
3. Mount the ARDF by aligning the screw holes [B] in the ARDF over the stud
screws, and slide the ARDF to front as shown.
NOTE: When mounting the ARDF, hold it by hand as shown in the illustration.
Holding it in another way may damage the ARDF.
4. Secure the ARDF (2 knob screws [C]).
A283/A284 3-26 SM
[C] [D]
[B]
Installation
[A]
A680I502.WMF
5. Remove the two seals [A].

6. Install the original tray [B] (2 screws).
7. Attach the original direction decal [C] to the DF table as shown.
8. Connect the I/F harness [D] to the main machine.
9. Turn on the ac switch.
10. Check the ARDF operation and copy quality.
SM 3-27 A283/A284
LCT INSTALLATION
3.8 LCT INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Joint Pin ................................................................................ 2
2. Stepped Screw M3x18 .......................................................... 4
3. Magnet Cover ....................................................................... 1
4. NECR (-17, -27 machines).................................................... 1
A283/A284 3-28 SM
LCT INSTALLATION
Installation
A683I501.WMF
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A683I500.WMF [D] [A] A683I502.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: The Paper Tray Unit (A682) must be installed before installing the LCT.
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.
2. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit [A].
3. Open the lower right cover [B] and cut the holding band [C].
NOTE: When cutting the holding band, the upper part of the band should be
cut as shown. Otherwise, paper jams may occur.
4. Remove the lower right cover.
5. Remove two caps [D] and a cover [E].
SM 3-29 A283/A284
LCT INSTALLATION
[A]
[F] [E]
[B] [D]
[C]
A683I503.WMF
6. Install the joint pins [A].

7. Push the release lever [B] and slide the LCT to the right (front view).
8. Hang the LCT [C] on the joint pins, then secure the brackets [D] (4 screws).
9. Return the LCT to the previous position and connect the LCT cable [F].
10. Open the LCT cover and load the paper.
11. Turn on the ac switch and check the LCT operation.
A283/A284 3-30 SM
1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION
3.9 1,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Front Stand ........................................................................... 1
2. Rear Stand............................................................................ 1
3. Knob Screw........................................................................... 1
Installation
4. Screw – M4x12 ..................................................................... 6
5. NECR (-17 machine)............................................................. 1
SM 3-31 A283/A284
A681I503.WMF
A681I504.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: The bridge unit (A688) and paper tray unit (A682) must be installed before
installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
A283/A284 3-32 SM
[A]
[C]
Installation
A681I505.WMF
[B]
[D]
A681I506.WMF
[E]
1. Install two screws [A] loosely.
2. Hang the front stand [B] and rear stand [C] on the screws which were installed
in step 2.
3. Secure the front and rear stands (6 screws, including the two screws [A]).
4. Pull out the stapler unit [D].
5. Draw out the locking lever [E] (1 screw).
6. Align the finisher on the stands, and lock it in place by pushing the locking
lever.
7. Secure the locking lever (1 screw) and push the stapler unit into the finisher.
SM 3-33 A283/A284
[E]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D] [A] A681I500.WMF
8. Secure the finisher (1 screw).

9. Adjust the securing knobs [A] under the front and rear stand until the finisher is
perpendicular to the floor.
10. Install the shift tray [B] (1 snap ring).
NOTE: Make sure that the three pegs [C] fit into the slots [D] properly.
11. Connect the finisher cable [E] to the main machine.
12. Attach the staple position decal [F] to the ARDF as shown.
13. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
A283/A284 3-34 SM
3.10 3,000-SHEET FINISHER INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Front Joint Bracket ................................................................ 1
2. Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................ 1
3. Entrance Guide Plate ............................................................ 1
Installation
4. Shift Tray............................................................................... 1
5. Exit Guide Mylar (A229 copier only)...................................... 1
6. Shift Tray Guide .................................................................... 1
7. Staple Position Decal ............................................................ 1
8. Screw – M3x6 ....................................................................... 2
9. Screw – M4x14 ..................................................................... 4
10. Screw – M3x8 ....................................................................... 4
11. Cushion................................................................................. 1
12. Upper Grounding Plate ......................................................... 1
13. Lower Grounding Plate ......................................................... 2
14. NECR (-17 machine)............................................................. 1
SM 3-35 A283/A284
A697I506.WMF
A697I507.WMF
CAUTION
procedure.
NOTE: The bridge unit (A688) and paper tray unit (A682) must be installed before
installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
A283/A284 3-36 SM
[C]
[B]
[A]
Installation
[D]
A697I508.WMF
[E]
[F]
A697I755.WMF
2. Install the front joint bracket [A] and rear joint bracket [B] (2 screws each).
3. Attach the upper grounding plate [C] (1 screw).
4. Peel off the backing of the double sided tape that is attached to the lower
grounding plate [D].
5. Attach one lower grounding plate to the center position of the paper tray unit as
shown.
6. Attach the cushion [E] to the plate as shown.
7. Install the entrance guide plate [F] (2 screws).
SM 3-37 A283/A284
[C]
[H]
[G]
A697I534.WMF
[D]
[B]
[A]
[F] [E]
A697I756.WMF
8. If the customer requires the punch unit, install it now, before attaching the
finisher to the machine. See Punch Unit Installation.
9. Open the front door of the finisher, and remove the screw [A] which secures the
locking lever [B]. Then pull the locking lever.
10. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the
locking lever.
NOTE: Before securing the locking lever, make sure that the top edges of the
finisher and the copier are parallel from front to rear as shown [C].
11. Secure the locking lever (1 screw) and close the front door.
12. Install the sub shift tray [D] on the shift tray. If the customer does not wish to
install it on the shift tray, store it at location [E].
NOTE: The shift tray guide is required to assist in proper paper stacking.
However, it reduces the capacity of the shift tray by 50, from 3,000 to
2,950.
13. Install the shift tray [F] (4 screws).
14. Connect the finisher cable [G] to the main machine.
15. Attach the staple position decal [H] to the ARDF as shown.
16. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
A283/A284 3-38 SM
PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION
3.11 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION

list:
Description Q’ty
1. Spacer – 2 mm...................................................................... 1
2. Spacer – 1 mm...................................................................... 2
3. Stepped Screw – Short ......................................................... 1
Installation
4. Stepped Screw – Long.......................................................... 1
5. Punch Unit Knob ................................................................... 1
6. Spring.................................................................................... 1
7. Harness – Long..................................................................... 1
8. Harness – Short .................................................................... 1
9. Hopper .................................................................................. 1
10. Punch Position Decal ............................................................ 1
11. Tapping Screw – M4x10 ....................................................... 2
12. Screw with Flat Washer – M4x6............................................ 1
13. NECR.................................................................................... 1
SM 3-39 A283/A284
[A]
[B] [D]
A284I761.WMF
[C]
A284I763.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord and remove the 3,000-sheet finisher from the
copier before starting the following procedure.
1. Unpack the punch unit and remove the shipping retainers [A] (4 screws) and [B]
(1 screw).
2. Open the front door and remove the hopper cover [C] (2 screws).
3. Remove the finisher rear cover (2 screws) and remove the transport guide plate
[D] (4 screws).
A283/A284 3-40 SM
[A]
[B]
Installation
A284I610.WMF
[D]
[C]
A284I765.WMF
4. Install the spacer [A] (thickness = 2 mm).

NOTE: There are three spacers in the accessory box. Do not lose the other
two spacers (1 mm) because they are used for adjusting the punch
hole position.
5. Install the punch unit [B] and secure it with a long stepped screw [C].
6. Install the punch unit knob [D] (1 screw).
7. Secure the rear of the punch unit (2 screws).
SM 3-41 A283/A284
[A]
[B]
[E]
A284I767.WMF
[C]
[D]
A284I611.WMF
[F]
A284I612.WMF
8. Install the sensor bracket [A] (1 short stepped screw, 1 spring).

9. Connect the harnesses [B].
NOTE: 1) The harness binders [C] must not be between the harness clamps [D].
2) The harness binder [E] must be positioned to the left of the harness
clamp.
10. When a three-punch-hole unit is installed:
Change switch 1 of DIP SW 100 on the finisher control board to ON.
11. Slide the hopper [F] into the finisher.
12. Reassemble the finisher and attach the 3,000-sheet finisher to the copier, then
check the punch unit function.
A283/A284 3-42 SM
PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
3.12 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION
[C]
[B]
[A]
Installation
A284I526.WMF
1. Install the two stud screws [A] on the top cover as shown.
2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the stud screws and slide the platen
cover [C] to the left.
SM 3-43 A283/A284
KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
3.13 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[G]
A284I518.WMF
[E]
[F]
A284I966.WMF
CAUTION
1. Hold the key counter plates [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and
insert the key counter holder [C]
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket (2 screws).
3. Attach the key counter cover [D] (2 screws).
4. Remove the connector cover [E].
5. Cut off the part [F] of the connector cover.
6. Remove the rear cover [G] (4 screws).
A283/A284 3-44 SM
Rev. 08/2000 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
A284I967.WMF
[B]
A284I965.WMF
7. Connect the key counter connector [A] to CN211 on the I/O board.
8. Reinstall the covers.
9. Attach the double-sided tape to the key counter bracket.
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape and attach the key counter
assembly [B] to the left side of the scanner unit, as shown.
NOTE: When attaching the key counter assembly, press the assembly against
the scanner cover strongly. Otherwise, the key counter assembly may
come off easily.
⇒11. Turn on the Key Counter Option under User Tools, #19 Management Settings,
#5 Key Counter and select YES.
SM 3-45 A283/A284
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
3.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[B]
[F]
[A]
[C]
A284I519.WMF
[D]
[E]
A284I520.WMF
CAUTION
1. Remove the exposure glass, scanner rear cover, and stand rear cover (see
Interchange Unit Installation for the stand rear cover).
2. Remove the rear cover and upper left cover.
3. Move the 1st and 2nd scanners to the right.
4. Install the harness clamp [A].
5. Install the anti-condensation heater [B] (2 screws).
NOTE: The heater harness should be routed under the harness guard [C].
6. Install the harness clamp [D].
7. Connect the connector [E] to the heater, then secure the grounding wire [F] (1
screw).
A283/A284 3-46 SM
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
[B]
[A]
Installation
[C] [E]
A284I521.WMF [D]
A284I524.WMF
8. Install two harness clamps [A] on the stand bracket.

9. Connect the connector [B] to the ac power harness [C].
10. Move the grounding wire of the connector [D], as shown.
11. Secure the grounding wire [E] of the connector cable (1 screw).
SM 3-47 A283/A284
TRAY HEATER
3.15 TRAY HEATER

[C]
[A]
[B]
A284I531.WMF [D]
[G]
A284I528.WMF
[E]
[E]
[F] [H]
A284I529.WMF
CAUTION
1. Attach the optional tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B].
2. Install the harness holder [C].
3. Remove the rear cover.
4. Draw out the upper and lower paper trays.
5. Install the heater assembly [D] (1 screw).
6. Install four harness clamps [E] as shown.
7. Route the harness [F] and connect it to the ac harness [G] and heater harness
[H].
A283/A284 3-48 SM
TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)
3.16 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT)

[C]
[A]
Installation
[B]
A284I531.WMF
[D]
A284I600.WMF
[G]
[E]
[H]
[F]
A284I601.WMF
CAUTION
1. Attach the optional tray heater [A] to the heater bracket [B].
2. Install the harness holder [C].
3. Remove the rear cover of the machine and the rear cover of the optional paper
tray unit.
4. Draw out the upper and lower paper trays of the optional paper tray unit.
5. Install the heater assembly [D] (1 screw).
6. Install four harness clamps [E] as shown.
7. Route the harness [F] and connect it to the harness [G] and heater harness [H].
SM 3-49 A283/A284
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
NOTE: 1) A “#” mark by the mode number means that this SP mode has been
changed.
2) In the Function column, comments are in italics.
3) In the Settings column, the default value is in bold letters.
4) An asterisk “ * ” after the mode number means that this mode is stored
in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM reset, all these SP modes will be reset
to their factory settings.
5) In the Settings column, (40) means A284 and (30) means A283.
Mode No.
Class Class Function Settings
1 and 2 3
1-001* Leading Edge Adjusts the printing leading edge +9 ~ –9
Registration registration using the trimming area 0.1 mm/step
pattern (SP2-902-3, No.10). +3.0 mm
Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between +
Service
Tables
and – before entering the value.
The specification is 3 ±2 mm. See
“Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
Adjustments” for details on SP1-001
and 1-002.
1-002* 1* Side-to-Side Adjusts the printing side-to-side +9 ~ –9
Registration registration from the 1st paper feed 0.1 mm/step
(1st paper feed) station using the trimming area pattern +3.0 mm
(SP2-902-3, No.10).
The specification is 2 ±1.5 mm.
2* Side-to-Side Adjusts the printing side-to-side +9 ~ –9
Registration registration from the 2nd paper feed 0.1 mm/step
(2nd paper feed) station using the trimming area pattern +3.0 mm
(SP2-902-3, No.10).
Registration registration from the 3rd paper feed 0.1 mm/step
(3rd paper feed: station using the trimming area pattern +2.0 mm
Option PFU tray 1 if (SP2-902-3, No.10).
present) Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between +
SM 4-1 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
1-002* 4* Side-to-Side Adjusts the printing side-to-side +9 ~ –9
Registration registration from the 4th paper feed 0.1 mm/step
(4th paper feed: station using the trimming area pattern +2.0 mm
Option PFU tray 2 if (SP2-902-3, No.10).
present) Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between +
Registration registration from the duplex tray using 0.1 mm/step
(Duplex) the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, +0.0 mm
No.10).
The specification is 2 ±1.5 mm. See
“Replacement and Adjustment - Copy
Adjustments” for details on SP1-002.
Registration registration from the by-pass feed table 0.1 mm/step
(By-pass feed) using the trimming area pattern (SP2- +3.0 mm
902-3, No.10).
Registration registration from the LCT using the 0.1 mm/step
(LCT) trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, +1.5 mm
No.10).
1-003* 1* Paper Feed Timing Adjusts the relay clutch timing at +9 ~ –9
(Paper Feed registration. The relay clutch timing 1 mm/step
Trays/LCT) determines the amount of paper buckle +0 mm
2* Paper Feed Timing at registration. (A +ve setting leads to
(Duplex) more buckling.)
3* Paper Feed Timing
(By-pass)
1-007 By-pass Feed Paper Displays the paper width sensor data
Size Display for the by-pass feed table.
1-103* Fusing Idling Selects whether fusing idling is done or 0: Off
not. 1: On
Normally disabled in this machine.
However, if fusing is incomplete on the
1st and 2nd copies, switch it on. This
may occur if the room is cold.
Refer to “Detailed Section Descriptions
- Fusing Temperature Control” of the
A230/A231/A232 manual for more
details.
1-104* Fusing Temperature Selects the fusing temperature control 0: On/Off
Control mode. 1: Phase
A283/A284 4-2 SM
Rev. 08/2003 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
1-105* 1* Fusing Temperature Adjusts the fusing temperature for 170 ~ 200 (40)
Adjustment paper fed from a paper tray. 150 ~ 180 (30)
(Paper Tray) 1°C/step
185°C (40)
165°C (30)
2* Fusing Temperature Adjusts the fusing temperature for 170 ~ 200 (40)
Adjustment paper fed from the by-pass feed unit. 160 ~ 190 (30)
(By-pass) 1°C/step
185°C (40)
175°C (30)
1-106 Fusing Temperature Displays the fusing temperature.
Display
1-109 Fusing Nip Band Checks the fusing nip band 1: Start
Check Refer to “Nip Band Width Adjustment” 0: Stop
for more details.
1-111* Paper Switch Back Adjusts the paper switch back timing +5 ~ –5
Timing Use this SP mode when paper often 1 mm/step
(Duplex) jams at the inverter gate in the duplex 0 mm
unit.
2-001* 1* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid –1000 ~ –2000
Service
Tables
Adjustment plate during copying. 10 V/step
(Copying) After replacing the drum or charge –1650 V (40)
roller, change this value to the default. –1630 V (30)
2* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the voltage applied to the 0 ~ 700
Adjustment (ID charge roller when making the VSDP ID 10 V/step
⇒ sensor pattern) sensor pattern (for charge roller voltage

correction). The actual charge roller
400 V
NOTE: Requires
BICU version 8.12
voltage is this value plus the value of or newer.
SP2-001-1.
Do not adjust.
2-005* 1* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the lower threshold value for 0.1 ~ 1.0
Correction 1 the charge roller correction. 0.05/step
(Lower threshold) When the value of VSP/VSG is greater 0.85
than this value, the charge roller
voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from –
500 to –530).
2* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the upper threshold value for 0.1 ~ 1.0
(Upper threshold) When the value of VSP/VSG is greater 0.90
voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute
value).
3* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the lower limit value for charge –1000 ~ –2000
Correction 3 roller voltage correction. 10 V/step
(Lower limit) –1650 V (40)
–1630 V (30)
4* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the upper limit value for charge –1000 ~ –2000
⇒ Correction 4
(Upper limit)
roller voltage correction.
NOTE: Requires BICU version 8.12 or newer.
10 V/step
–1700 V
5* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the correction voltage 0 ~ 100
Correction Step adjustment step size. 10 V/Step
30 V
SM 4-3 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-101* 1* Leading Edge Erase Adjusts the leading edge erase margin. 0.0 ~ 9.0
Margin The specification is 3 ±2 mm. See 0.1 mm/step
(Printing) “Replacement and Adjustment - Copy 3.0 mm
Adjustments” for details.
2* Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin. 0.0 ~ 9.0
Margin The specification is 2 ±2 mm. 0.1 mm/step
(Printing) 3.0 mm
3* Right Side Edge Adjusts the right side erase margin. 0.0 ~ 9.0
Erase Margin The specification is 2 ±2.5/–1.5 mm. 0.1 mm/step
(Printing) 2.0 mm
4* Left Side Edge Adjusts the light side erase margin. 0.0 ~ 9.0
Erase Margin The specification is 2 +1.5 mm. 0.1 mm/step
(Printing) 2.0 mm
5* Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin 0.0 ~ 4.0
Margin on the reverse side of duplex copies. 0.1 mm/step
(Back side) The specification is 2 ±2 mm 1.2 mm
6* Left Side Erase Adjusts the left side erase margin in the 0.0 ~ 9.0
Margin reverse side of duplex copies. 0.1 mm/step
(Rear side) The specification is 2 ±1.5 mm. 0.3 mm
7* Right Side Erase Adjusts the right side erase margin in 0.0 ~ 9.0
Margin the reverse side of duplex copies. 0.1 mm/step
(Rear side) The specification is 2 +2.5/–1.5 mm. 0.3 mm
2-103* 1* LD Power Adjusts the power of LD1 for 400 dpi –127 ~ +127
Adjustment resolution. 1/step
LD1 - 400dpi Do not change the value. 1 = 0.6 µW (30)
1 = 0.8 µW (40)
+0
2* LD Power Adjusts the power of LD1 for 600 dpi –127 ~ +127
1 = 0.8 µW (40)
+0
1 = 0.8 µW (40)
+0
1 = 0.8 µW (40)
+0
5 LD Power Factory use only. Do not use this SP 0: Stop
Adjustment - LD1 mode. 1: Start
6 LD Power Factory use only. Do not use this SP 0: Stop
Adjustment - LD2 mode. 1: Start
A283/A284 4-4 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-109* 1* Laser Beam Pitch Input the laser beam pitch value for 400 0 ~ 262
Adjustment - 400 dpi dpi resolution. 4 pulses/step
After replacing the LD unit or replacing 144
or clearing the NVRAM, use this SP
mode and SP2-109-3 to adjust the
laser beam pitch. Refer to
“Replacement and Adjustment - Laser
Beam Pitch Adjustment” for details.
2* Laser Beam Pitch Input the laser beam pitch value for 600 0 ~ 284
3 Laser Beam Pitch Initializes the laser beam pitch for 400 1: Start
Initial Setting - 400 dpi to the SP2-109-1 value.
dpi Press “1” to initialize.
After inputting data for SP2-109-1, this
SP must be performed.
Service
Tables
5* Laser Unit Auto. Input the interval value of the laser 0 ~ 65535
Adjustment Interval beam pitch automatic adjustment. 1/step
When the number of times that the 1000 times
resolution been changed reaches this
value, the laser unit position is
automatically corrected.
6 Current LD Unit Displays the current LD unit position
Position (number of pulses from home position).
If this is different from the value of 2-
109-1 or 2-109-2, LD unit positioning
has failed.
7 Laser Beam Pitch Displays how many times the LD unit
Change Counter position has been changed (how many
times the resolution has changed.)
When the laser beam pitch adjustment
is done, this counter is reset to “0”.
8 Beam Pitch Data Resets the values of SP2-109-6 and 1: Start
Reset SP2-109-7. Press “1” to reset.
After replacing the LD unit, this SP
⇒
mode must be done.
2-110 Image Resolution Select the Image Resolution. 0: 400 dpi
Change 8: 600 dpi
SM 4-5 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-112* Polygon Motor Off Input the time that the polygon motor 0 ~ 60
Timer turns off after entering the stand-by 5 s/step
condition. 10 s
If set at “0”, the polygon motor never
turns off during stand-by. However,
when the machine goes into energy
saver mode, the polygon motor turns
off regardless of this timer.
2-201* 1* Development Bias Adjusts the development bias for 200 ~ 700
Adjustment (for copying. 10 V/step
copying) This can be adjusted as a temporary 600 V
measure if faint copies appear due to
an aging drum.
2* Development Bias Adjusts the development bias for 200 ~ 700
Adjustment (for ID making the ID sensor pattern for VSP. 1 V/step
sensor pattern) This should not be used in the field, 380 V
because it affects ID sensor pattern
density, which affects toner supply.
2-207 Forced Toner Supply Forces the toner bottle to supply toner 1: Start
to the toner supply unit for 30 seconds.
Press “1” to start.
Toner supply finishes automatically
after 30 seconds. This process is not
normally needed in the field for this
model.
2-208* 1* Toner Supply Mode Selects the toner supply mode. 0: Sensor
Use image pixel count mode only as a 1: Image Pixel
temporary measure if the ID or TD Count
sensor is defective.
2-209* 1 Toner Supply Rate Adjusts the toner supply rate. 10 ~ 800
Increasing this value reduces the toner 5 mg/s/step
supply clutch on time. Use a lower 30 mg/s
value if the user tends to make lots of
copies that have a high proportion of
black.
2* Toner Supply Displays the toner supply correction 0.25 ~ 3.00
Correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to 0.25/step
Coefficient adjust K, but the value is changed 3.00
again when VT is measured for the next
copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the
amount of toner in the toner bottle. This
change is corrected using this
coefficient. This SP can be used to
check the toner supply condition. In
general, the lower the value of K, the
lower the toner density.
2-210* ID Detection Interval Changes the interval for making the ID 10 ~ 200
sensor pattern (VSP/VSG detection). 1 copy/step
If the user normally makes copies with 10 copies
a high proportion of black, reduce the
interval.
A283/A284 4-6 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-213* Number of Copies Selects the number of copies can be 0: 90 copies
After Toner Near- made after entering a toner near-end 1: Unlimited
end Condition condition. 2: 10 copies
If the user normally makes copies with
a high proportion of black, reduce the
interval.
2-220* VREF Manual Setting Adjust the TD sensor reference voltage 1.00 ~ 5.00
(VREF). 0.01 V/step
Change this value after replacing the 4.00 V
development unit with another one that
already contains toner.
For example, when using a
development unit from another
machine for test purposes, do the
following:
1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both
the machine containing the test unit
and the machine that you are going
to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit,
then input the VREF for this unit into
Service
Tables
SP2-220.
3. After the test, put back the old
development unit, and change SP2-
220 back to the original value.
2-223 * 1 VT Display Displays the current TD sensor output
voltage.
2 VT (10) Display Displays the average of the most
recent 10 TD sensor outputs.
3 VT Change Rate Displays the rate of change in the TD
Display sensor output.
4 GAIN Display Displays the value of GAIN which is
used for calculating the toner supply
motor on time.
5 Image Pixel Count Displays the image pixel count.
Display
2-301* 1* Transfer Current Adjusts the current applied to the 20 ~ 100
Adjustment transfer belt during copying on the 1st 1 µA/step
(1st side of the side of the paper. 45 µA (40)
paper) If the user uses thicker paper, the 35 µA (30)
current may have to be increased to
ensure sufficient transfer of toner.
2* Transfer Current Adjusts the current applied to the 20 ~ 100
Adjustment transfer belt during copying on the 2nd 1 µA/step
(2nd side of the side of the paper. 32 µA (40)
paper) See above. 25 µA (30)
Adjustment transfer belt during copying at the 1 µA/step
(Leading edge of the leading edge of the paper. 45 µA (40)
paper) Increase the current to separate the 35 µA (30)
paper from the drum properly in high
humidity and high temperature
conditions.
SM 4-7 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-301* 4* Transfer Current Adjusts the current applied to the 20 ~ 100
Adjustment transfer belt during copying from the 1 µA/step
(By-pass Feed) by-pass feed table. 45 µA (40)
See above. If the user normally feeds 35 µA (30)
thicker paper from the bypass tray, use
a higher setting.
Adjustment transfer belt during copying at the 1 µA/step
(Leading edge of the leading edge of paper from the by-pass 60 µA (40)
paper from by-pass feed table. 45 µA (30)
Feed) Increase the current to separate the
paper from the drum properly in high
humidity and high temperature
conditions.
2-309* 1* Transfer Current Adjusts the lower paper width threshold 0 ~ 297
Correction (Paper for the transfer current correction. 1 mm/step
width - lower) Use this SP when an image problem 150 mm
(e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs
with a small width paper. If the paper
width is smaller than this value, the
transfer current will be multiplied by the
factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or
SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions -
Image Transfer for more details.
2* Transfer Current Adjusts the upper paper width 0 ~ 297
Correction (Paper threshold for the transfer current 1 mm/step
width - upper) correction. 216 mm
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in
SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and SP2-309-6
(by-pass).
3* Transfer Current Adjusts the transfer current correction 1.0 ~ 3.0
Correction - α coefficient which is used if the paper 0.1/step
(Paper tray) width is less than the setting of SP2- 1.2
309-1.
Correction - β coefficient which is used if the paper 0.1/step
(Paper tray) width is less than the setting of SP2- 1.2
309-2.
Correction - γ (By- coefficient which is used if the paper 0.1/step
pass feed) width is less than the setting of SP2- 1.5
309-1.
Correction - δ coefficient which is used if the paper 0.1/step
(By-pass feed) width is less than the setting of SP2- 1.5
309-2.
A283/A284 4-8 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-801 TD Sensor Initial Performs the TD sensor initial setting. 1: Start
Setting This SP mode controls the voltage
applied to the TD sensor to make the
TD sensor output about 4.0 V. Press 1
to start. After finishing this, the TD
sensor output voltage is displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the
machine, changing the TD sensor, or
adding new developer.
2-802* 1* TD Sensor Manual Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT). 1.0 ~ 5.0
Setting - VTS Change this value after replacing the 0.01 V/step
development unit with another one that 4.00 V
already contains toner.
For example, when using a
development unit from another
machine for test purposes. To adjust
VT, use a similar procedure as for SP2-
220.
2* TD Sensor Manual Adjusts the maximum value for SP2- 1.0 ~ 5.0
Setting - VTMAX 802-1. 0.01 V/step
4.10 V
Service
Tables
3* TD Sensor Manual Adjusts the minimum value for SP2- 1.0 ~ 5.0
Setting - VTMIN 802-1. 0.01 V/step
3.70 V
2-805 Developer Performs the developer initialization. 1: Start
Initialization Press 1 to start.
This SP should be performed after
doing SP2-801-1 at installation and
after replacing the drum.
2-902 2 Test Pattern Printing Prints the test patterns for the IPU chip.
(IPU) See section 4.2.3. for how to print test patterns.
This SP mode is useful for finding whether the BICU or
the SBU is defective. If the printout is not OK, the BICU
is defective.
3 Test Pattern Printing Prints the printer test patterns.
(Printing) See section 4.2.3 for how to print test patterns.
Example: 10. Trimming Area
This SP mode is useful for finding whether the LDDR or
the BICU is defective. If the printout is not OK, the LDDR
is defective.
2-909* 1* Main Scan Adjusts the magnification in the main –2.0 ~+2.0
Magnification scan direction for copy mode. 0.1 %/step
(Copier) Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between + +0.00 %
and –. See “Replacement and
Adjustment - Copy Adjustments” for
details.
SM 4-9 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-909* 2* Main Scan Adjusts the magnification in the main –2.0 ~+ 2.0
Magnification scan direction when printing from a 0.1 %/step
(Printer) personal computer. +0.00 %
details.
2-911* 1* Transfer Current Adjusts the transfer current on timing at –30 ~ +30
Timing the leading edge. 1 mm/step
(On Timing) 0 mm
2* Transfer Current Adjusts the transfer current switch –30 ~ +30
Timing timing. This determines when the 1 mm/step
(Switch Timing) leading edge stops and the image area 10 mm
current begins (see SP2-301).
3* Transfer Current Adjusts the transfer current off timing (– –30 ~ +30
Timing 5 mm is 5 mm after the trailing edge). 1 mm/step
(Off Timing) –5 mm
2-912* Drum Reverse Designer use only. Do not change 0 ~ 50
Rotation Time the value. 1 ms/step
0 ms
2-914* 1* Process Control Adjusts the charge roller voltage used 0 ~ 400
Setting - Cα when paper with a small width is fed 10 V/step
from the by-pass tray. The paper width 250 V
below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem
(such as white spots at the center of
black dots or breaks in thin black lines)
occurs when paper with a small width is
fed from the by-pass feed tray.
2* Process Control Adjusts the charge roller voltage used 0 ~ 400
Setting - Cβ when paper with a small width is fed 10 V/step
(see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with
a small width is fed from the by-pass
feed tray.
3* Process Control Adjusts the development bias used 0 ~ 300
Setting - Bγ when paper with a small width is fed 10 V/step
feed tray.
A283/A284 4-10 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-914* 4* Process Control Adjusts the development bias used 0 ~ 300
Setting - Bδ when paper with a small width is fed 10 V/step
feed tray.
2-920 LD Off Check Factory use only. 0: On
1: Off
2-921* Shading Correction - Selects whether shading correction for 0: No
Printer printing is done or not. 1: Yes
Do not change the setting.
2-960* Toner Overflow Select whether the toner overflow 0: No
Sensor sensor is activated or not. 1: Yes
# LD PWM Selection - Changes the LD power PWM control. A 1~5
2-969* Printer larger value causes a darker image. 1/step
Use this SP to adjust the image density 4
Service
Tables
for printing from a personal computer or
printing a received fax message.
2-971 Toner Full Sensor Displays total occurrence of connection
⇒ Counter errors for the toner overflow sensor.
This SP is for factory use only.
3-001* 1* ID Sensor PWM This SP mode is added to solve the 0 ~ 255
Setting following problem. 1/step
A SC condition occurs when ID Sensor 100
Initial Setting is not done after doing an
NVRAM Clear or replacing the
NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored at doing the ID
Sensor Initial Setting.
2* ID Sensor Initial Performs the ID sensor initial setting. 1: Start
Setting The ID sensor output for the bare drum
(VSG) is adjusted to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
This SP mode should be performed
after replacing or cleaning the ID
sensor or replacing the drum or doing
an NVRAM clear.
3-103* ID Sensor Output Displays the current VSG and VSP VSP = x.xx V
Display output. VSG = x.xx V
If the ID sensor does not detect the ID
pattern, “VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V” is
displayed and an SC code is
generated.
If the ID sensor does not detect the
bare area of the drum, “VSP = 0.0
V/VSG =0.0 V” is displayed and an SC
code is generated.
SM 4-11 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
3-903* Initialization at Decides whether or not the machine is 0: Yes
Power-up initialized (drum cleaning, charge roller 1: No
H.P check, charge roller voltage
correction, etc) at power-up.
If set to “1”, the fusing idling mode is
disabled regardless of the setting of
SP1-103.
4-008* Sub Scan Adjusts the magnification in the sub –9.0 ~ +9.0
Magnification scan direction for scanning. 0.1 %/step
(Scanning) If this value is changed, the scanner +0.0 %
motor speed is changed.
details.
4-010* Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration –9.0 ~ +9.0
Registration for scanning. 0.1 mm/step
(Scanning) (–): The image moves in the direction +0.0 mm
of the leading edge
details.
4-011* Side-to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for –4.6 ~ +4.6
Registration scanning. 0.1 mm/step
(Scanning) (–): The image disappears at the left +0.0 mm
side.
(+): The image appears at the left side.
and –. See "Replacement and
Adjustment - Copy Adjustments" for
details.
4-012* 1* Leading Edge Erase Adjusts the leading edge erase margin 0.0 ~ 0.9
Margin for scanning. 0.1 mm/step
(Scanning) Do not adjust this unless the user 0.5 mm
wishes to have a scanner margin that is
greater than the printer margin.
2* Trailing Edge Erase Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin 0.0 ~ 0.9
Margin for scanning. 0.1 mm/step
(Scanning) See the comment for SP4-012-1. 0.5 mm
3* Left Side Erase Adjusts the left side erase margin for 0.0 ~ 0.9
Margin scanning. 0.1 mm/step
4* Right Side Erase Adjusts the right side erase margin for 0.0 ~ 0.9
Margin scanning. 0.1 mm/step
4-013 Scanner Free Run Performs a scanner free run with the
exposure lamp off.
A283/A284 4-12 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
4-301 APS Sensor Output Displays the APS sensor output signals 00000000
Check when an original is placed on the
exposure glass. 0: Not detected
Bit 0: Width sensor 1 1: Detected
Bit 1: Width sensor 2
Bit 2: Length sensor 1
See “Detailed Section Descriptions -
Original Size Detection in Platen Mode”
for more details.
4-303* APS Small Size Selects whether or not the copier 0: Not detected
Original Detection determines that the original is A5/HLT 1: A5 length/
size when the APS sensor does not 51/2" x 81/2"
detect the size.
If A5 length/51/2" x 81/2" is selected,
paper sizes that cannot be detected by
the APS sensors are regarded as A5
lengthwise or 51/2" x 81/2".
If "Not detected" is selected, “Cannot
detect original size” will be displayed.
Service
Tables
4-428* 1* Standard White Displays whether or not the standard 0: Performed
Level Adjustment white level adjustment has been done. 1: Not
Flag performed
2 Standard White Corrects the standard white level of the 1: Start
Level Adjustment white plate.
This SP mode is for factory use only.
Do not use this SP mode.
# 1# Image Data Path This SP mode is for designer use 0~3
4-901* (SBU) only. Do not use this SP mode. 1/step
0
2# ASIC ID Display Displays the ID code for the ASIC.
This SP mode is for designer use
only. Do not use this SP mode.
3* # Black Level Checks the black level adjustment 0 ~ 255
Adjustment (current value at power-up. 1/step
value) This SP mode is for designer use 209
4 *# BK E/O Adjustment Checks the difference between black 0 ~ 255
levels for Even and Odd channels after 1/step
adjusting the black level at power-up. 128
5* # Temporary AGC Checks the temporary AGC range 0 ~ 255
Range Adjustment value after adjusting the white level at 1/step
power-up. 160 (30)
This SP mode is for designer use 187 (40)
6* # AGC Range Checks the AGC range value after 0 ~ 255
Adjustment adjusting the white level at power-up. 1/step
only. Do not use this SP mode. 187 (40)
SM 4-13 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 7* # AGC Gain Checks the AGC gain value for the 0 ~ 255
4-901* Adjustment - E ch Even channel after adjusting the white 1/step
level at power-up. 0
8* # AGC Gain Checks the AGC gain value for the Odd 0 ~ 255
Adjustment - O ch channel after adjusting the white level 1/step
at power-up. 0
9* # Temporary AGC Checks the temporary AGC range 0 ~ 255
Range Adjustment value for the scanner application after 1/step
(Scanner App.) adjusting the white level at power-up. 140 (30)
10* # AGC Range Checks the AGC range value for the 0 ~ 255
Adjustment scanner application after adjusting the 1/step
(Scanner App.) white level at power-up. 160 (30)
11* # AGC Gain Checks the AGC gain value for the 0 ~ 255
Adjustment - E ch Even channel for the scanner 1/step
(Scanner Option) application after adjusting the white 0
level at power-up.
12* # AGC Gain Checks the AGC gain value for the Odd 0 ~ 255
Adjustment - O ch channel for the scanner application 1/step
(Scanner Option) after adjusting the white level at power- 0
up.
13* # Standard White Checks the value of the standard white 0 ~ 255
Level Display level after adjusting the white level. 1/step
This SP mode is for factory use only. 94
14* # Overflow Flag Checks the overflow flag data during
the automatic scanner adjustment.
only.
15* # Time Out Flag Checks the time out flag data during
the automatic scanner adjustment.
only.
16* # Error Flag Checks the error flag data during the
automatic scanner adjustment.
only.
17* # SBU Reset Error Checks the SBU reset error flag after
Flag resetting the SBU at power-up.
This SP mode is for factory use only.
A283/A284 4-14 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 18* # AGC Range Checks the AGC range value which is
4-901* Adjustment adjusted in the factory.
(Factory) This SP mode is for designer use
19* # AGC Gain Checks the AGC gain value for the
Adjustment - E ch Even channel that is adjusted in the
(Factory) factory.
20* # AGC Gain Checks the AGC gain value for the Odd
Adjustment - O ch channel that is adjusted in the factory.
(Factory) This SP mode is for designer use
21* # Standard White Checks the value of the standard white
Level Display level that is adjusted in the factory.
(Factory) This SP mode is for factory use only.
22* # A/D Standard Adjusts the upper limit voltage for A/D 0 ~ 255
Voltage in ADS conversion in ADS mode. 1/step
Mode This SP mode is for factory use only. 204
Service
Tables
23* # Black Level Use this value when the timeout error 0 ~ 255
Adjustment for the black level adjustment occurs. 1/step
(Previous value) This value updates after adjusting the 209
black level without error.
24* # BK E/O Adjustment Use this value when the timeout error 0 ~ 255
(Previous value) occurs for adjusting the difference 1/step
between the black levels for Even and 128
Odd channel. This value updates after
adjusting it without error.
25* # Standard White This SP mode is for factory use only. 0 ~ 255
Level Data Do not use this SP mode. 1/step
94
26* # AGC Range Use this value when the timeout error 0 ~ 255
Adjustment for the AGC range value adjustment 1/step
(Previous value) occurs. This value updates after 160 (30)
adjusting it without error. 187 (40)
27* # AGC Gain Use this value when the timeout error 0 ~ 255
Adjustment - E ch occurs for the AGC gain adjustment for 1/step
(Previous value) the Even channel. This value updates 0
after adjusting it without error.
SM 4-15 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 28* # AGC Gain Use this value when the timeout error 0 ~ 255
4-901* Adjustment - O ch occurs for the AGC gain adjustment for 1/step
(Previous value) the Odd channel. This value updates 0
after adjusting it without error.
29 # Temporally AGC This SP mode is for designer use
Range Data only. Do not use this SP mode.
(Scanner App.)
30 # AGC Range Data This SP mode is for designer use
(Scanner App.) only. Do not use this SP mode.
Adjustment - E ch occurs for the AGC gain adjustment for 1/step
(Scanner Option) the Even channel for the scanner 0
application. This value updates after
Adjustment - O ch occurs for the AGC gain adjustment for 1/step
(Scanner Option) the Odd channel for the scanner 0
application. This value updates after
# 5 Full Size Mode Selects whether the copy is always in 0: Normal
4-903* full size mode even if the magnification operation
ratio has been changed. 1: Always full
Set to 1 when checking the size mode
magnification in the main scan
direction. If the magnification is not
100%, something is wrong with the
image processing circuits.
7 Image Shift in Adjusts the pixel shift amount in the 0 ~ 7680
Magnification Mode main scan direction in magnification 1/step
mode. 0
only.
10* # 25%/50% Reduction Selects whether 25% and 50% 0: Available
in Fax Mode reduction in fax mode is available or 1: Not available
not.
11* # MTF Filter Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the 0 ~ 15
Coefficient main scan direction for letter mode. 1/step
(Text: Main: 25% ~ See “Detailed Descriptions - Image 12
64%) Processing” for details.
12* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 15
Coefficient 1/step
(Text: Main: 65% ~ 14
154%)
A283/A284 4-16 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 13* # MTF Filter Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the 0 ~ 15
4-903* Coefficient main scan direction for letter mode. 1/step
(Text: Main: 155% ~ See “Detailed Descriptions - Image 15
400%) Processing” for details.
14* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 15
Coefficient 1/step
(Text: Main: 14
Notch 1)
15* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 15
Coefficient 1/step
(Photo: Main) 14
16* # Smoothing Filter Selects the smoothing filter coefficient 0 ~ 7
Coefficient for photo mode, if smoothing is enabled 1/step
(Photo) for photo mode with SP4-904-3. 2
Coefficient main scan direction for each original 1/step
(Text/Photo: Main) type mode. 9
18* # MTF Filter See “Detailed Descriptions - Image 0 ~ 15
Coefficient Processing” for details. 1/step
(Low Density 9
Original: Main)
Service
Tables
19* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 15
Coefficient 1/step
(Copied Original: 10
Main)
20* # MTF Filter Strength Selects the MTF filter strength in the 0~7
(Text: Main: 25% ~ main scan direction for each original 1/step
64%) type mode. 2
21* # MTF Filter Strength SP4-903-24 is only effective if MTF is 0~7
(Text: Main: 65% ~ enabled with SP4-904-3. 1/step
154%) See “Detailed Descriptions Image 2
22* # MTF Filter Strength Processing” for details. 0~7
(Text: Main: 155% ~ 1/step
400%) 2
23* # MTF Filter Strength 0~7
(Text: Main: 1/step
Notch 1) 3
(Photo: Main) 1/step
1
(Text/Photo: Main) 1/step
1
(Low Density 1/step
Original: Main) 3
(Copied Original: 1/step
Main) 2
SM 4-17 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 28* # Independent Dot Selects the independent dot erase level 0 ~ 15
4-903* Erase Level for each original type mode. 1/step
(Text mode) A larger value erases more 4
30* # Independent Dot independent dots. If “0” is selected, 0 ~ 15
Erase Level independent dot erase is disabled. 1/step
(Text/Photo Mode) 0
31* # Independent Dot 0 ~ 15
Erase Level 1/step
(Low Density 0
Original)
32* # Independent Dot 0 ~ 15
Erase Level 1/step
(Copied Original 10
mode)
34* # Background Erase Adjust the threshold level for 0 ~ 255
Level background erase. A larger value 1/step
(Text mode) reduces dirty background. If “0” is 5
35* # Background Erase selected, background erase is disabled. 0 ~ 255
Level 1/step
(Text/Photo mode) 0
36* # Background Erase 0 ~ 255
Level 1/step
(Photo mode) 0
37* # Background Erase 0 ~ 255
Level 1/step
(Copied Original 10
mode)
Coefficient sub scan direction for each original 1/step
(Text: Sub: 25% ~ type mode. 12
64%) SP4-903-48 is only effective if MTF is
42* # MTF Filter enabled with SP4-904-3. 0 ~ 13
Coefficient See “Detailed Descriptions - Image 1/step
(Text: Sub: 65% ~ Processing” for details. 13
154%)
43* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 13
Coefficient 1/step
(Text: Sub: 155% ~ 13
400%)
44* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 13
Coefficient 1/step
(Text: Sub: 13
Notch 1)
45* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 13
Coefficient 1/step
(Low Density 13
Original: Sub)
46* # MTF Filter 0 ~ 13
Coefficient 1/step
(Copied Original: 13
Sub)
A283/A284 4-18 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 47* # MTF Filter Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the 0 ~ 13
4-903 Coefficient sub scan direction for each original 1/step
(Text/Photo: Sub) type mode. 10
48* # MTF Filter SP4-903-48 is only effective if MTF is 0 ~ 13
Coefficient enabled with SP4-904-3. 1/step
(Photo: Sub) See “Detailed Descriptions - Image 13
Processing” for details.
50* # MTF Filter Strength Selects the MTF filter strength in the 0~7
(Text: Sub: 25% ~ sub scan direction for each original 1/step
64%) type mode. 2
51* # MTF Filter Strength SP4-903-54 is only effective if MTF is 0~7
(Text: Sub: 65% ~ enabled with SP4-904-3. 1/step
154%) See “Detailed Descriptions - Image 2
52* # MTF Filter Strength Processing” for details. 0~7
(Text: Sub: 155% ~ 1/step
400%) 2
(Text: Sub: Notch 1) 1/step
3
(Photo: Sub) 1/step
Service
Tables
1
(Text/Photo: Sub) 1/step
1
(Low Density 1/step
Original: Sub) 3
(Copied Original: 1/step
Sub) 2
4-904* 2* Dither Matrix Setting Selects the dither matrix for photo 0: 4 x 4
mode. 1: 6 x 6
If “0” is selected, the image will be
sharper.
3* Filter Type Selection Selects the filter type for photo mode. 0: MTF
in Photo Mode Coefficients used: 1: Smoothing
0: SP4-903-15, 24, 48, and 54.
1: SP4-903-16
If “0” is selected, the image will be
sharper. However, dot screen areas will
be faint.
6* Line Width Selects the line width correction type 0: Not

Correction Type in for copied original mode. corrected
Copied Original In copied original mode, lines may 1: Thin line-1
Mode bulge in the main scan direction. Adjust 2: Thin line-2
this SP mode until the result is 3: Thick line
satisfactory.
SM 4-19 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
4-904* 9 Image Data Path - Selects one of the following video data outputs, which
MSU will be used for printing.
0: After image scanning
1: After gradation processing 1
2: After gradation processing 2
3: After image data form application
4: After MSU 1
5: After MSU 2
6: Image synchronize signal only
7: Not output
8: Normal video processing
Do not change the value.
12* Threshold Level in Adjusts the threshold level for binary 0 ~ 255
Binary Picture picture processing. 1/step
Processing Mode 128
18* Binary Dither Pattern Selects the dither pattern for photo 0: 70 lines
mode in binary picture processing (8 x 8)
mode. 1: 95 lines
A greater number of lines give a more (6 x 6)
detailed copy. 2: 140 lines
(8 x 8)
3: 180 lines
(8 x 8)
23* Binary Error Selects the error diffusion pattern 0: Normal
Diffusion Pattern except for photo mode. 1: Matrix 1
Changes this value If the image quality 2: Matrix 2
for the texture original to be improved.
4-905 1 Image Data Path - Selects one of the following video data outputs, which
Filtering/Magnifi- will be used for printing.
cation 0: Magnification → Filtering
1: Magnification only
2: Filtering only
3: No processing
2 Image Data Path - Selects one of the following video data outputs, which
Gradation will be used for gradation processing.
Processing 0: After image scanning
1: After MSU
2. After image overlay
3: Normal operation
4 Printout Type Selects one of the following video data outputs, which
Selection will be used for the printer controller.
0: Normal operation
1: Black/white conversion
2: Not printout
3: Application through
# 2*# Line Width Decides the threshold value in the main 0 ~ 255
4-909* Correction - Black scan direction for a pixel to be black. 1/step
(Main scan) Do not change the value. 223
A283/A284 4-20 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 3 * # Line Width Decides the threshold value in the main 0 ~ 255
4-909* Correction - White scan direction for a pixel to be white. 1/step
(Main scan) Do not change the value. 111
4 * # Line Width Decides the threshold value in the sub 0 ~ 255
Correction - Black scan direction for a pixel to be black. 1/step
(Sub scan) Do not change the value. 223
5 * # Line Width Decides the threshold value in the sub 0 ~ 255
Correction - White scan direction for a pixel to be white. 1/step
(Sub scan) Do not change the value. 111
19 Image Data Path - Selects one of the following video data 0 ~ 14
Application outputs, which will be used for the 1/step
application. 14
20 Image Data Path - Selects one of the following video data 0 ~ 8
Printing outputs, which will be used for printing. 1/step
Do not change the value. 8
4-910 3 Data Compression - Selects whether the ABS function is 0: Yes
ABS Through done or not. 1: No
4-911* 1 HDD Setting Checks for bad sectors on the hard 1: Start
Service
Tables
(Media Test) disk that develop during machine use.
Press “1” to start. This takes 4 minutes.
This SP mode should be done when an
abnormal image is printed. There is no
need to do this at installation as the
hard disk firmware already contains
bad sector information, and damage is
not likely during transportation.
Bad sectors detected with this SP
mode will be stored in the NVRAM with
the bad sector data copied across from
the firmware.
If the machine detects over 50 bad
sectors, SC361 will be generated. At
this time, use SP4-911-2.
2 HDD Setting Formats the hard disk. This takes 4 1: Start
(Formatting) minutes. Press “1” to start.
Do not turn off the main power
switch during this process.
3* HDD Setting Decides the disk drive motor (spindle motor) stop timing.
(Spindle Control) 0: Enabled
The hard disk stops in low power mode. The first copy
after returning to standby will take longer.
1: Disabled
The hard disk keeps going in low power mode.
6 HDD Setting Resets the bad sector information 1: Start
(Bad Sector which is stored in the NVRAM. Press
Information Reset) “1” to start.
This SP should be performed when the
hard disk is replaced.
SM 4-21 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
4-911* 7 HDD Setting Displays the number of bad sectors Total: 0
(Bad Sector Display) there are on the hard disk. Copy: 0
If the machine detects over 50 bad Printer: 0
sectors, SC361 will be generated. At AF: 0
this time, use SP4-911-2. (Archive File)
8 HDD Model Name Displays the model name of the HDD.
Display If the hard disk is not installed, “Not
Connected” is displayed.
5-001 All Indicators On Turns on all indicators on the operation M/C: Stop
#
panel. 1: Start
Press “1” to check.
Press to exit this SP mode.
5-009* Language Selection Selects the language for the display.
After selecting the language, turn the
main power switch off and on.
5-024* mm/inch Display Selects what unit is used. 0: mm
Selection After selecting the unit, turn the main 1: inch
power switch off and on.
5-104* A3/11" x 17" Double Specifies whether the counter is 0: No
Count doubled for A3/11" x 17" paper. 1: Yes
If “1” is selected, the total counter and
the current user code counter count up
twice when A3/11" x 17" paper is used.
5-106* ADS Level Selection Selects the image density level that is 1~5
used in ADS mode. 1 notch/step
3
5-112* Non-standard Paper Selects whether a non-standard paper 0: No
Size size can be input or not. 1: Yes
If “1” is selected, the customer will be
able to input a non-standard paper size
using a UP mode.
5-113* Optional Counter This SP is for Japan only. Do not 0~5
Type change the value. 1/step
0
5-115* Duplex Punch Hole Selects whether or not the image on 0: Yes
Margin the back of duplex copies shifts for 1: No
making the punch holes.
5-118 * Disable Copying Selects whether the copy function is 0: No
disabled or not. 1: Yes
5-120 Mode Clear - Op. This SP is for Japan only. Do not 0~2
Counter Removal change the value. 1/step
0
5-121* Counter Up Timing Determines whether the optional key 0: Feed-in
counter counts up at paper feed-in or at 1: Exit
paper exit.
The total counter is not affected by this
SP mode.
5-127* APS Mode Selects whether the APS function is 0: Disabled
enabled or not. 1: Enabled
A283/A284 4-22 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
5-131* Paper Size Type Selects the paper size type (for 0: Japan
Selection originals and copy paper). 1: North
• After changing the value, turn the America
main power switch off and on. 2: Europe
• If the paper size type of the archive
files stored in the HDD is different,
abnormal copies will be made. In this
condition, perform SP5-822 and ask
the user to restore the archive files.
5-212* 3* Page No. position in Japanese version only. Do not -10 ~ 10
Duplex Mode change the value. 1 mm/step
(Horizontal) 0 mm
4* Page No. position in
Duplex Mode
(Vertical)
Service
Tables
SM 4-23 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
5-501* PM Alarm Interval Sets the PM interval, with an alarm. 0 ~ 255
When the setting is “0”, this function is 1 k copies/step
disabled. 0 k copies
5-504* 1* Jam Alarm Level Japanese version only. 0: Z
(RSS function) Do not change the values. 1: L
2: M
3: H
5-504* 2* Jam Auto Call Japanese version only. 0: Off
(RSS function) Do not change the values. 1: On
5-505* Error Alarm Level Japanese version only. 0 ~ 255
Do not change the values. 100 copies/step
2500 copies
(30)
5000 copies
(40)
5-507* 128* Paper Control Call Japanese version only. 250 ~ 10000
Interval - Other Do not change the values. 1 page/step
Paper Sizes 1000 pages
(RSS function)
132* Paper Control Call
Interval - A3
(RSS function)
Interval - A4
(RSS function)
Interval - A5
(RSS function)
Interval - B4
(RSS function)
Interval - B5
(RSS function)
Interval - DLT
(RSS function)
Interval - LG
(RSS function)
Interval - LT
(RSS function)
Interval - HLT
(RSS function)
5-590* 1* Original Auto Call Japanese version only. 0: Off
2* Cover Open Auto 0: Off
Call 1: On
(RSS function)
3* Paper Control Call 0: Off
(RSS function) 1: On
A283/A284 4-24 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
5-590* 4* Staple Auto Call Japanese version only. 0: Off
5* Toner Auto Call 0: Off
(RSS function) 1: On
5-801 Memory All Clear Resets all correction data for process
control and all software counters. Also,
returns all modes and adjustments to
the default settings.
See the “Memory All Clear” section for
how to use this SP mode correctly.
Press “1” for over 3 seconds, then turn
the main power switch off and on.
Normally, this SP mode should not
be used.
It is used only after replacing the
NVRAM, or when the copier
malfunctions due to a damaged
NVRAM.
5-802* Free Run Performs a free run. The scanner 0: Stop

scans once and the printer prints for 1: Start
Service
Tables
N
the number of copies requested.
To perform the free run, after selecting
“1”, press the key to enter copy
$
mode then input the number of copies.
Then, press the Start key.
To stop the free run, press .
5-803 1~9 Input Check Displays the signals received from

sensors and switches.
See the “Input Check” section for
details.
5-804 Output Check Turns on the electrical components
individually for test purposes.
See the “Output Check” section for
details.
5-807 1 Option Connection Checks the connectors to the optional 0: Not
Check - ADF peripherals. connected
2 Option Connection 1: Connected
Check - Paper Tray
Unit
3 Option Connection
Check - LCT
4 Option Connection
Check - Finisher
5-811* Machine Serial Use to input the machine serial
Number number. (Normally done at the factory.)
This serial number will be printed on
the system parameter list.
Use the ●/✽ key to input “A”.
SM 4-25 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
5-812* 1* Service Telephone Use this to input the telephone number
Number at SC of the service representative (this is
condition displayed when a service call condition
occurs.)
Press the ●/✽ key to input a pause.
Press the “Clear modes” key to delete
the telephone number.
5-812* 2* Service Fax Number Use this to input the fax number of the
for Counter Printing service representative (this is printed
on the Counter Report - UP mode,
System No.19)
Press the ●/✽ key to input a pause.
Press the “Clear modes” key to delete
the telephone number.
5-816* 1* CSS (CSS) Function Japanese version only. 0: Off
Do not change the values. 1: On
2* CE Visit Call 0: Start
(CSS function) 1: Finish
5-821* CSS PI Device Code Japanese version only. 0~4
(CSS function) Do not change the value. 1/step
0
5-822 Archive File Clear Clears all archive file data stored in the 1: Start
HDD. Press “1” to clear.
Before (or after) performing SP5-131,
do this SP mode. After this, ask the
user to restore the archive files.
# NVRAM Data Uploads the UP and SP mode data 1: Start
5-824 Upload (except for counters and the serial
number) from the NVRAM on the BICU
board to a flash memory card.
Note: While using this SP mode, keep
the front cover opened.
To prevent any software modules from
accessing the NVRAM while uploading
the NVRAM data, keep the front cover
open.
# NVRAM Data Downloads the UP and SP mode data 1: Start
5-825 Download from a flash memory card to the
NVRAM on the BICU board.
Note: While using this SP mode, keep
the front cover opened.
To prevent any software modules from
accessing the NVRAM while
downloading the NVRAM data, keep
the front cover opening.
# Program Upload Uploads the system program from the 1: Start
5-826 flash memory on the BICU board to a
flash memory card.
A283/A284 4-26 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
5-907 Plug & Play Brand Selects the brand name and the
Name and production name for Windows 95 Plug
Production Name & Play. This information is stored in the
Setting NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective,
these names should be registered
again.
After selecting, press the “Original
Type” key and 7 at the same time. If
the setting is completed, a “*” mark will
be displayed before the selection.
5-914 Printer Counter Selects whether or not the total printer 0: Off
Display counter is displayed in the UP mode. 1: On
5-915 Mechanical Counter Checks whether the mechanical 0: Not detected

Detection counter inside the inner cover is 1: Detected
connected or not. 2: Unknown
5-920* Recovery Time for Selects the recovery time from the low 0: 30 s
Low Power Mode power mode. 1: 20 s
5-990 1 SMC Printing Prints all the system parameter lists. 1: Start
Service
Tables
(All Data) See the “System Parameter and Data
Lists” section for how to print the lists.
2 SMC Printing Prints the SP mode data list. 1: Start
(SP Mode Data) See the “System Parameter and Data
3 SMC Printing Prints the UP mode data list. 1: Start
(UP Mode Data) See the “System Parameter and Data
4 SMC Printing Prints the machine status history data 1: Start
(Machine Status list.
Data) See the “System Parameter and Data
5 SMC Printing Prints the Copy Mode list (UP Mode 1: Start
(UP Mode - Copy) No.10)
See the “System Parameter and Data
6 SMC Printing Prints the SP mode data list with a 1: Start
(Large Font Size) large font size.
See the “System Parameter and Data
This SP mode is used when the SMC
list is sent by fax to the number stored
with SP5-812.
6-006* 1* ADF Side-to Side Adjusts the printing side-to-side –3 ~ +3
Registration registration in the ADF mode. 0.1 mm/step
Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between + +0.0 mm
and –.
2* ADF Leading Edge Adjusts the original stop position. –29 ~ +29
Registration Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between + 0.18 mm/step
(Simplex) and –. +0.0 mm
SM 4-27 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
6-006* 3* ADF Leading Edge Adjusts the original stop position –29 ~ +29
Registration against the original left scale in one- 0.18 mm/step
(Duplex-front) sided original mode. +0.0 mm
and –.
4* ADF Leading Edge Adjusts the original stop position –29 ~ +29
Registration against the original left scale in two- 0.1 mm/step
(Duplex-rear) sided original mode. +0.0 mm
and –.
For details on the correct way to use SP 6-006, see the ADF service manual.
6-007 1 ADF Input Check 1 Displays the signals received from
sensors and switches of the ADF.
details.
2 ADF Input Check 2 Displays the signals received from
sensors and switches of the ADF.
details.
6-008 ADF Output Check Turns on the electrical components of
the ADF individually for test purposes.
See the “Output Check” section for
details.
6-009 1 ADF Free Run (Two- Performs an ADF free run with two- 1: Start
sided original) sided. Press “1” to start.
This is a general free run controlled
from the copier. For more detailed free
run modes, see the DF manual.
2 ADF Free Run Performs an ADF free run with stamp 1: Start
(Stamp) mode. Press “1” to start.
This is a general free run controlled
from the copier. For more detailed free
run modes, see the DF manual.
6-010* Stamp Position Adjusts the stamp position in the sub- –3.5 ~ +3.5
Adjustment scan direction in facsimile mode. 0.5 mm/step
Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between + 0 mm
and –.
6-105* Finisher Staple Adjusts the staple position in the main –1~ +3.5
Position Adjustment scan direction when using the 3,000- 0.5 mm/step
(3,000-sheet sheet finisher. +0.0 mm
Finisher Only) Use the ●/✽ key to toggle between +
and –.
A larger value causes the staple
position to shift outward.
6-113* 1* Punch Hole Position Adjusts the punch hole position in the –7.5 ~ +7.5
Adjustment sub-scan direction for the punch unit 0.5 mm/step
(2 Punch Hole Type) with two punch holes. 0 mm
and –. A larger value shifts the punch
holes towards the edge of the paper.
A283/A284 4-28 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
6-113* 2* Punch Hole Position Adjusts the punch hole position in the –7.5 ~ +7.5
Adjustment sub-scan direction for the punch unit 0.5 mm/step
(3 Punch Hole Type) with three punch holes. 0 mm
and –. A larger value shifts the punch
holes towards the edge of the paper.
6-902* 1 Saddle Stitch Japanese version only -30 ~ 30
Adjustment (A3) 0.5 mm/step
2 Saddle Stitch 0.0 mm
Adjustment (B4)
3 Saddle Stitch
Adjustment (A4)
7-001* Total Operation Displays the total drum rotation time. Min.
Time Display
7-002* 1* Total Original Displays the total number of fed
Counter originals in copy and fax modes.
(Copy and Fax
Modes)
2* Total Original Displays the total number of fed
Counter originals in copy mode.
Service
Tables
(Copy Mode)
3* Total Original Displays the total number of fed
Counter originals in fax mode.
(Fax Mode)
7-003* 1* Total Copy Counter Displays the total number of prints in all
(All Modes) modes.
2* Total Copy Counter Displays the total number of prints in
(Copy Mode) copy mode.
(Fax Mode) fax mode.
(Printer Mode) printer mode.
7-006* 1* C/O (Copy per Displays the number of sets of copies
Original) Counter per original when making 10 or more
sets of copies.
e.g.: When making 15 sets of copies of
an original, this counter value will
increase by “6”.
2* P/O (Print per Displays the number of sets of prints
Original) Counter per original data when making 10 or
more sets of prints.
e.g.: When making 15 sets of prints of
an original data, this counter value will
increase by “6”.
7-101* 4* Total Copies by Displays the total number of prints by
Paper Size paper size.
(A3)
5* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(A4)
SM 4-29 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
Paper Size paper size.
(A5)
13* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(B4)
14* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(B5)
32* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(DLT)
36* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(LG)
38* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(LT)
44* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(HLT)
128* Total Copies by
Paper Size
(Other Sizes)
7-201* Total Number of Displays the total number of scanned
Scanning originals.
7-204* 1* Total Paper Tray Displays the total number of sheets fed
Counter from each paper feed tray.
(1st Paper Tray)
2* Total Paper Tray
Counter
(1st Paper Tray)
3* Total Paper Tray
Counter
(2nd Paper Tray)
4* Total Paper Tray
Counter
(3rd Paper Tray)
5* Total Paper Tray
Counter
(4th Paper Tray)
6* Total Paper Tray
Counter
(By-pass Feed)
7-205* ADF Total Counter Displays the total number of originals
fed by the ADF.
7-206* 1* Total Staple Counter Displays the total number of used
staples.
2* Total Staple Counter Japanese version only
Booklet
A283/A284 4-30 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
Reproduction Ratio reproduction ratio.
(25% ~ 49%)
2* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(50% ~ 99%)
3* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(Full size)
4* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(101% ~ 200%)
5* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(201% ~ 400%)
6* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(Direct Mag.)
7* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
Service
(Direct Size Mag.)
Tables
8* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(Size Mag.)
9* Total Copies by
Reproduction Ratio
(Fix Mag.)
Image Editing image editing mode.
(Pos./Neg.)
2* Total Copies by
Image Editing
(Repeat Copy)
3* Total Copies by
Image Editing
(Memory Sort)
4* Total Copies by
Image Editing
(Staple)
5* Total Copies by
Image Editing
(Combine)
6* Total Copies by
Image Editing
(Series Copy)
7* Total Copies by
Image Editing
(Erase Copy)
Copy Mode copy mode.
(Text)
SM 4-31 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
Copy Mode copy mode.
(Text/Photo)
3* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Photo)
4* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Generation)
5* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Light Original)
6* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Duplex)
7* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(ADF)
8* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Double Copy)
9* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(2-sided Original)
10* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Interrupt)
11* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Archive File)
12* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(1-sided to 2-sided)
13* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
14* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
15* Total Copies by
Copy Mode
(Book to 2-sided)
Multiple Copy multiple copy quantity.
(1 to 1)
2* Total Copies by
Multiple Copy
(1 to 2 ~ 5)
3* Total Copies by
Multiple Copy
(1 to 6 ~ 10)
A283/A284 4-32 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
Multiple Copy multiple copy quantity.
(1 to 11 ~ 20)
5* Total Copies by
Multiple Copy
(1 to 21 ~ 99)
6* Total Copies by
Multiple Copy
(1 to 100 ~)
7-401* Total SC Counter Displays the total number of service
calls that have occurred.
7-403* 1* SC History Displays the latest 10 service call
(Latest) codes.
2* SC History
(2nd Latest)
3* SC History
(3rd Latest)
4* SC History
(4th Latest)
5* SC History
Service
Tables
(5th Latest)
6* SC History
(6th Latest)
7* SC History
(7th Latest)
8* SC History
(8th Latest)
9* SC History
(9th Latest)
10* SC History
(10th Latest)
7-501* Total Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams
and original jams.
7-502* Total Copy Jam Displays the total number of copy jams.
Counter
7-503* Total Original Jam Displays the total number of original
Counter jams.
7-504* 1* Total Copy Jam by Displays the total number of copy jams
Location by location.
(At Power On) These are paper non-feed jams.
3* Total Copy Jam by
Location
(1st Paper Tray)
Location
(2nd Paper Tray)
Location
(3rd Paper Tray)
Location
(4th Paper Tray)
SM 4-33 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
(LCT) These are paper non-feed jams.
8* Total Copy Jam by Displays the total number of copy jams
(Upper Relay These are jams when the paper does
Sensor) not activate the sensor.
Location
(Lower Relay
Sensor)
Location
(Upper Relay Sensor
- Op. PTU)
Location
(Regist. Sensor)
Location
(Exit Sensor)
Location
(Bridge Exit Sensor)
Location
(Bridge Relay
Sensor)
Location
(Duplex Entrance
Sensor)
Location
(Duplex Exit Sensor)
Location
(1-bin Tray Entrance
Sensor)
Location
(Finisher Entrance
Sensor)
Location
(3,000-sheet
Finisher Upper Tray
Exit Sensor)
A283/A284 4-34 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
(3,000-sheet These are jams when the paper does
Finisher Shift Tray not activate the sensor.
Exit Sensor, 1,000-
sheet Finisher Exit
Sensor)
Location
(3,000-sheet Staple
Tray Paper Sensor,
1,000-sheet Finisher
Jogger Unit Paper
Sensor)
Location
(Finisher Stack
Feed-out Belt HP
Sensor)
Location
Service
Tables
(Mail Box Entrance
Sensor)
Location
(Mail Box Proof Tray
Exit Sensor)
Location
(Mail Box Relay
Sensor)
Location
(Mail Box: Mailbox
Section)
35* Total Copy Jam by 35 ~ 41 are Japanese version only.
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Entrance 1)
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Transport)
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Entrance 2)
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Finisher Stapler)
SM 4-35 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
7-504* 39* Total Copy Jam by 35 ~ 41 are Japanese version only.
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Saddle Stitch 1)
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Saddle Stitch 2)
Location
(Booklet Finisher:
Saddle Stitch
Stapler)
(LCT) These are jams when the paper does
not activate the sensor.
(Upper Relay These are jams when the paper stays
Sensor) at the sensor.
Location
(Lower Relay
Sensor)
Location
(Upper Relay Sensor
- Op. PTU)
Location
(Lower Relay Sensor
– Op. PTU)
Location
(Regist. Sensor)
Location
(Exit Sensor)
Location
(Bridge Exit Sensor)
Location
(Bridge Relay
Sensor)
Location
(Duplex Entrance
Sensor)
Location
(Duplex Exit Sensor)
A283/A284 4-36 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
(1-bin Tray Entrance These are jams when the paper stays
Sensor) at the sensor.
7-505* 1* Total Original Jam Displays the total number of original
by Location jams by location.
(At Power On) These are jams when the original does
3* Total Original Jam not activate the sensor.
by Location
(ADF Feed-in
Sensor)
4* Total Original Jam
by Location
(ADF Feed-out
Sensor)
Paper Size by paper size.
(A3)
Paper Size
(A4)
Service
Tables
Paper Size
(A5)
Paper Size
(B4)
Paper Size
(B5)
Paper Size
(DLT)
Paper Size
(LG)
Paper Size
(LT)
Paper Size
(HLT)
Paper Size
(Other Sizes)
7-507* 1* Total Counter Value Displays the last 5 digits of the total
at Copy Jam counter value for the most recent 10
(Latest) copy jams.
2* Total Counter Value
at Copy Jam
(2nd Latest)
SM 4-37 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
at Copy Jam counter value for the most recent 10
(3rd Latest) copy jams.
at Copy Jam
(4th Latest)
at Copy Jam
(5th Latest)
at Copy Jam
(6th Latest)
at Copy Jam
(7th Latest)
at Copy Jam
(8th Latest)
at Copy Jam
(9th Latest)
at Copy Jam
(10th Latest)
at Original Jam
(Latest)
at Original Jam
(2nd Latest)
at Original Jam
(3rd Latest)
at Original Jam
(4th Latest)
at Original Jam
(5th Latest)
at Original Jam
(6th Latest)
at Original Jam
(7th Latest)
at Original Jam
(8th Latest)
at Original Jam
(9th Latest)
A283/A284 4-38 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
at Original Jam counter value for the most recent 10
(10th Latest) copy jams.
7-801 1 ROM Version Displays the ROM versions.
Display No. 13, 14, and 15 are Japanese
(BICU) version only.
2 ROM Version
Display
(CSS)
3 ROM Version
Display
(HDD Controller)
4 ROM Version
Display
(ADF)
5 ROM Version
Display
(SIB)
6 ROM Version
Display
Service
(Finisher)
Tables
7 ROM Version
Display
(Paper Tray Unit)
8 ROM Version
Display
(LCT)
9 ROM Version
Display
(Mail Box)
10 ROM Version
Display
(FCU)
11 ROM Version
Display
(Printer Controller)
12 ROM Version
Display
(Scanner Controller)
13 ROM Version
Display
(ANITA)
14 ROM Version
Display
(Booklet Finisher)
15 ROM Version
Display
(Stamp Card)
16 ROM Version
Display
(SARIC)
7-803* PM Counter Display Displays the PM counter since the last
PM.
SM 4-39 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
7-804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM counter. Press “1” to 1: Start
reset.
7-807 SC/Jam Counter Resets the SC and jam counters. Press 1: Start
Reset “1” to reset.
7-808 Resets Counters Resets all counters except for the 1: Start
(except for the total following counters:
counter) Press “1” to reset.
• All counters of SP7-003
• All counters of SP7-006
• All counters which are listed on the
counter list (UP1-19-2)
7-810 Key Operator Code Resets the key operator code. Press 1: Start
Number Reset “1” to reset.
7-816 1 Reset the total Copy Resets the total copy counter by paper 1: Start
Counter by Paper tray. Press “1” to reset.
Tray Use these SP modes when replacing
(1st Paper Tray) the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers
in the paper feed stations
7-816 2 Reset the total Copy Resets the total copy counter by paper 1: Start
(2nd Paper Tray) the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers
3 Reset the total Copy in the paper feed stations 1: Start
Counter by Paper
Tray
(3rd Paper Tray)
4 Reset the total Copy 1: Start
Counter by Paper
Tray
(4th Paper Tray)
5 Reset the Total 1: Start
Copy Counter by
Paper Tray
(LCT)
6 Reset the total Copy Resets the total copy counter by paper 1: Start
(By-pass Feed) the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers
in the paper feed stations
7-822 Reset the Total Resets all counters of SP7-301. Press 1: Start
Copy Counter by “1” to reset.
Magnification
Image Editing
7-825 Electrical Total Resets the electrical total counter. 1: Start
Counter Reset Press “1” to reset.
Usually, this SP mode is done at
installation.
This SP mode affects only once when
the minus (“–“) counter value.
# SC990 Contents Displays details about the latest
7-901 SC990.
A283/A284 4-40 SM
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
# 1 SC Details Displays details about the latest SCs.
7-902 (Latest) Not all SCs have these details.
2 SC Details
(Latest 1st)
3 SC Details
(Latest 2nd)
Copy Mode
Multiple Copies
Service
Tables
SM 4-41 A283/A284
4.1.1 TEST PATTERN PRINTING (SP2-902)

NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely.
Otherwise, an SC may occur.
1. Access the SP mode which contains the test pattern you need.
2. Press the N key on the operation panel to access the copy mode display.
3. Select required copy features such as paper size, image density, and
reproduction ratio.
4. Press the “Start” key to print the test pattern.
5. After checking the test pattern, exit copy mode by pressing the N key again.
6. Exit the SP mode.
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-2: Test Pattern Printing – IPU)

No. Test Pattern No. Test Pattern
0 None 8 8 Grayscales (Horizontal)
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 9 8 Grayscales (Vertical)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 10 Patch Pattern (8-grayscale)
3 Vertical Line (2 dot) 11 Cross Pattern
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot) 12 Argyle Pattern
5 Alternating Dot Pattern 13 Not Used
6 Grid Pattern (Single-dot) 14 Not Used
7 Vertical Black Band 15 Not Used
Test Pattern Table (SP2-902-3: Test Pattern Printing – Printing)

No. Test Pattern No. Teat Pattern
0 None 11 Argyle Pattern
1 Vertical Line (1-dot) 12 16 Grayscales (Horizontal)
2 Horizontal Line (1-dot) 13 16 Grayscales (Vertical)
3 Vertical Line (2 dot) 14 16 Grayscales (Vert./Hor.)
4 Horizontal Line (2-dot) 15 16 Grayscales (Vert./Hor Overlay)
5 Grid Pattern (Single-dot) 16 Slant Cross Stitch
6 Grid Pattern (Double-dot) 17 Horizontal Line (1-dot)
7 Alternating Dot Pattern 18 Grid Pattern (Single-dot)
8 Full Dot Pattern 19 Grid Pattern (Double-dot)
9 Black Band 20 Alternating Dot Pattern
10 Trimming Area 21 Blank Page
A283/A284 4-42 SM
4.1.2 INPUT CHECK

Main Machine Input Check (SP5-803)
1. Access SP mode.
2. Select the class 3 SP number which will access the switch or sensor you wish
to check.
3. Check the status of the sensor or switch.
NOTE: If you wish to change to another class 3 level, press the “Next” or
“Prev.” key.
4. The reading (“0” or “1”) will be displayed. The meaning of the display is as
follows.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

| | | | | | | |
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Reading
Class 3 No. Bit No. Description
0 1
Service
Tables
1 7 Not used
(Upper Tray) 6 Height Sensor 2 Not activated Activated
(Op. Printer Controller)
5 Height Sensor 1 Not activated Activated
4 Not used
3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Switch pressed Switch not
pressed
pressed
pressed
pressed
2 7 Duplex Unit Set Sensor Unit set Unit not set
(Lower Tray) 6 Height Sensor 2 Not activated Activated
5 Height Sensor 1 Not activated Activated
4 Not used
pressed
pressed
pressed
pressed
SM 4-43 A283/A284
Reading
0 1
3 7 Zero Cross Signal Detected Not detected
(Registration 6 Transfer Belt Unit H.P Not at home At home position
& Others) Sensor position
5 Exhaust Fan Lock Signal Not locked Locked
4 Cooling Fan Lock Signal Not locked Locked
3 Main Motor Lock Signal Not locked Locked
2 Toner Overflow Sensor Tank not full Tank full
1 Cover Open Cover closed Cover opened
0 Registration Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
4 7 Not used
(By-pass) 6 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
5 Not used
4 Paper Size Sensor 4 See table 1
3 Paper Size Sensor 3
0 Unit Set Signal Connected Not connected
5 7 Not used
(Bridge Unit) 6 Unit Set Signal Connected Not connected
5 Paper Sensor Paper detected Paper not
(Printer Controller Option) detected
4 Relay Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
3 Exit Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
2 Left Cover Switch Switch pressed Switch not
(cover closed) pressed
1 Right Cover Switch Switch pressed Switch not
0 Tray Exit Unit Switch Switch pressed Switch not
6 7 Not used
(Unit Set) 6 F gate Signal Active Not active
5 Height Sensor At feed height Not at feed height
(Printer Controller Option) position position
4 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
3 Fusing Unit Detected Not detected
2 Total Counter Not detected Detected
1 Key Counter Detected Not detected
0 Not used
7 7 Not used
(Paper End) 6 Right Lower Cover Switch not Switch pressed
Switch pressed
A283/A284 4-44 SM
Reading
0 1
7 5 2nd Tray Height Sensor Paper not at upper Paper at upper
(Paper End) limit limit
4 1st Tray Height Sensor Paper not at upper Paper at upper
limit limit
3 Lower Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
2 Upper Relay Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
1 Lower Paper End Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
0 Upper Paper End Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
8 7 Dip Switch - 8 On Off
(I/O Board 6 Dip Switch - 7 On Off
Dip Switch 5 Dip Switch - 6 On Off
101) 4 Dip Switch - 5 On Off
3 Dip Switch - 4 On Off
Service
Tables
9 7 Not used
(Duplex) 6
5
4
3 Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
2 Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not
detected
1 Cover Guide Sensor Cover guide Cover guide
opened closed
0 Duplex Unit Switch Switch pressed Switch not
Table 1: By-pass Feed Table Paper Size Data

Class 3 No. Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Paper Width
4 1 1 1 1 Post card
1 1 1 0 B6 lengthwise
1 1 0 0 A5 lengthwise/5.5"
1 0 0 1 A4 lengthwise/8.5"/8"
0 1 1 1 A3 lengthwise
0 0 1 1 11" x 17"
SM 4-45 A283/A284
ADF Input Check (SP6-007)

Reading
0 1
1 7 Inverter Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
6 Exit Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
5 Registration Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
4 Entrance Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
3 Original Width Sensor 1 Paper not Paper detected
detected
detected
detected
0 Original Set Sensor Paper not Paper detected
detected
2 7 Not used
(Lower Tray) 6
5 Original Stopper H.P Original stopper Original stopper
Sensor up down
4 Pick-up Roller H.P Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller
Sensor down
3 Exit Cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened
2 Feed Cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened
1 DF Position Sensor Sensor not Sensor activated
activated (cover closed or
(cover open) being closed)
0 APS Start Sensor Sensor not Sensor activated
activated (cover closed or
(cover open) being closed)
A283/A284 4-46 SM
4.1.3 OUTPUT CHECK

NOTE: Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor
signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)

1. Access SP mode 5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
3. Press “1”, then press 7 to check that component.
4. Press “0” to interrupt the test.
5. If you wish to check another component, press the “Next” or “Prev.” Key.
No. Description No. Description

1 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 35 Relay Clutch (PTU)
Service
Tables
2 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 36 Relay Clutch
3 Upper Paper Feed Clutch (PTU) 37 Not used
4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch (PTU) 38 Relay Clutch (LCT)
5 Paper Feed Clutch (By-pass) 39 Registration Clutch
6 Paper Feed Clutch (LCT) 40 Not used
7 ~ 12 Not used 41 Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
(Interchange Unit)
13 Pick-up Solenoid (By-pass) 42 Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid
(Interchange Unit)
14 Pick-up Solenoid (LCT) 43, 44 Not used
15, 16 Not used 45 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Duplex)
17 Upper Transport Motor (Finishers) 46 Not used
18 Lower Transport Motor (3,000-sheet 47 Junction Gate Solenoid
Finisher only) (Bridge Unit)
19 Shift Tray Exit Motor (3,000-sheet 48, 49 Not used
Finisher), Exit Motor (1,000-sheet
Finisher)
20 Staple Hammer Motor (Finishers) 50 Tray Junction Gate Solenoid (3,000-
sheet Finisher only)
21 Punch Motor (Punch Unit) 51 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
(Finishers)
22 ~ 24 Not used 52 Positioning Roller Solenoid
(Finishers)
25 LCT Motor (LCT) 53 ~ 55 Not used
26 Tray Motor (PTU) 56 Toner Supply Motor
27 Not used 57 Transfer Belt Clutch
28 Main Motor 58 ~ 61 Not used
29 Transport Motor (Duplex) 62 Quenching Lamp
30 Inverter Motor – Reverse (Duplex) 63 Charge Roller Bias
31 Inverter Motor – Forward (Duplex) 64 ~ 66 Not used
32 ~ 34 Not used 67 Development Bias
SM 4-47 A283/A284
No. Description No. Description

68 Not used 86 ~ 89 Not used
69 Transfer Belt Bias 90 Laser Diode
70 ID Sensor 91 Not used
71 ~ 74 Not used 92 Shift Tray Lift Motor (Finishers)
75 Exhaust Fan Motor 93 Jogger Motor (3,000-sheet
Finisher)/Jogger Fence Motor
(1,000-sheet Finisher)
76 Cooling Fan Motor 94 Stapler Motor (3,000-sheet Finisher)
77 Not used 95 Stack Feed Out Motor (Finishers)
78 Cooling Fan Motor (Bridge Unit) 96 Shift Motor (Finishers)
79 ~ 84 Not used 97 Stapler Rotation Motor (3,000-sheet
Finisher)
85 Mechanical Counter 98 ~ 99 Not used
ADF Output Check (SP6-008)

No. Description
1 Feed-in Motor (Forward)
2 Feed-in Motor (Reverse)
3 Transport Motor (Forward)
4 Transport Motor (Reverse)
5 Feed-out Motor
6 Exit Gate Solenoid
7 Inverter Gate Solenoid
8 DF Indicators
9 Pick-up Motor (Forward)
10 Pick-up Motor (Reverse)
4.1.4 SYSTEM PARAMETER AND DATA LISTS (SMC LISTS)
1. Access SP mode 5-990 and select the class 3 number corresponding to the list
that you wish to print.
2. Press the N key to access the copy mode display.
3. Select the paper size and press the “Start” key to print the list.
4. After printing the list, exit the copy mode display by pressing the N key.
5. Exit SP mode.
A283/A284 4-48 SM
4.1.5 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT (SP1-109)
OHP
Paper feed direction

[A]
A231M509.WMF
When paper wrinkling or image off-set occurs, the pressure from the pressure roller
can be adjusted by changing the position of the pressure springs. At this time, the
Service
Tables
nip band width can also be checked with SP1-109, as follows.
1. Do a free run (SP5-802) for about 50 sheets.
2. Enter SP1-109 and press the “1” key, then press the 7 key.
3. Press the N key to enter copy mode.
4. Place an OHP sheet (A4/8.5" x 5.5" sideways) on the by-pass feed tray.
5. Press the “Start” key.
The OHP sheet is stopped in the fusing unit for about 10 seconds, then it will
be fed out automatically.
6. Check the nip band width [A]. The relationship between the position of the
pressure spring and the band width is as follows.
NOTE: Check the nip band width around the center of the OHP.
Pressure spring position Nip width
Upper (default position) 6.0 ± 0.5 mm
Lower 6.5 ± 0.6 mm
If the width is out of the above specification, the pressure spring should be
replaced.
SM 4-49 A283/A284
4.1.6 MEMORY ALL CLEAR (SP5-801)

NOTE: Memory All Clear mode resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:
• Electrical total counter value (SP7-003-1)
• Machine serial number (SP5-811)
• Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting (SP5-907)
Among the settings that are reset are the correction data for process
control and all the software counters.
Normally, this SP mode should not be used. This procedure is required

only after replacing the NVRAM or when the copier malfunctions due to a
damaged NVRAM.
1. Print out all SMC Data Lists (SP mode 5-990).

2. Access SP mode 5-801.
3. Hold down the "1" key for over 3 seconds. At this time the beeper will sound.
4. Turn the main power switch off and back on.
5. Do the laser beam pitch adjustment.
6. Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (see
Replacement and Adjustment - Copy Adjustments).
7. Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values which had been changed
from their factory settings.
8. Do SP 3-001-2 (ID Sensor Initial Setting) and SP4-911-1 (HDD media test).
9. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
A283/A284 4-50 SM
4.1.7 SOFTWARE RESET

The software can be reset when the machine hangs up. Use the following
procedure.
Either
Turn the main power switch off and on.
Or
Hold down the key and 7 key at the same time for over 10 seconds.
4.1.8 SYSTEM SETTING AND COPY SETTING (UP MODE) RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the
following procedure.
1. Confirm that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tool key.
Service
Tables
3. Hold the 7 key and press “1” on the ten-key pad.
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, press “Yes”.
Copy Setting Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following
procedure.
1. Confirm that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tool key.
3. Hold the 7 key and press “2” on the ten-key pad.
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, press “Yes”.
SM 4-51 A283/A284
4.1.9 NVRAM DATA DOWNLOAD

After doing the memory all clear procedure, NVRAM data will be reset to their
default settings. So, it is necessary to upload the NVRAM data before clearing the
NVRAM, and to download the NVRAM data afterwards.
• SP5-824: Uploads from the BICU to a flash memory card.
• SP5-825: Downloads from a flash memory to the BICU.
NVRAM Data Upload (SP5-824)
[A]
[B]
B
A284M919.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Remove the flash memory card cover [A].
3. Plug the flash memory card [B] into the card slot.
NOTE: Make sure that the surface printed “B” faces the front of the machine.
4. Turn on the main switch.
5. Access the SP mode 5-824.
7. Press “1” to download the NVRAM data.
A283/A284 4-52 SM
NVRAM Data Download (SP5-825)

NOTE: This procedure downloads all the settings stored in the NVRAM except for
the following items.
• Electrical Total Counter (SP7-003)
• C/O, P/O Counters (SP7-006)
• Plug and Play brand name and production name settings (SP5-907)
[A]
[B]
B
Service
Tables
A284M919.WMF
1. Turn off the main switch.

4. Turn on the main switch.
5. Access the SP mode 5-825.
7. Press “1” to download the NVRAM data.
SM 4-53 A283/A284
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
4.2 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

In this machine, the BICU software is upgraded using a flash memory card.
There are two program download procedures. One downloads from the flash
memory card to the BICU. The other downloads from the BICU to a flash memory
card.
NOTE: The procedure for how to write the source software data from a flash
memory card writer to a flash memory card is described in the SwapBox
FTL manual.
Downloading to the BICU
[A]
[B]
B
A284M919.WMF
NOTE: Step 4 of the procedure is different from the A230/A231/A232

machines.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
NOTE: Make sure that the surface
printed “B” faces the front of Flash Card Utility:CARD → I N T E R N A L R O M
the machine. C A RD: A2845XXXB ROM: A2845XXXA
INSTALL this card? 0000h
4. Turn on the main power switch VERIFY YES NO
while holding down the operation

switch. A284M503.WMF
A283/A284 4-54 SM
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5. Press the “YES” key. The machine erases the current software, then writes the
new software to the BICU. This takes about 100 seconds.
Display during erasing

Flash Card Utility: CARD → INTERNAL ROM
CARD: A2845XXXB ROM: A2845XXXA
Erasing.....
ADRS=200000h RDT=0000h, 0000h
Display during writing Flash Card Utility: CARD → INTERNAL ROM

Writing.....
ADRS=XXXXXXh RDT=0000h, 0000h
Display when the download is Installation / Copy is Completed

complete Turn main sw off and pull the card.
A2845XXXB Nov 18 1997 SUM: XXXXh
Service
Tables
CONFIRM
A284M504.WMF
If downloading failed, an error message appears as follows. At this time, press

the “CONFIRM” key to re-try the download.
Display if erasing failed Flash Card Utility: CARD → I N T E R N A L R O M

Erasing Failed
CONFIRM
Display if writing failed Flash Card Utility: CARD → I N T E R N A L R O M

Writing Failed
CONFIRM
A284M505.WMF
SM 4-55 A283/A284
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Download from BICU to Flash Memory Card (SP5-826)

NOTE: This function is done by SP mode instead of using the power
switches.
[B] [A]
A284M919.WMF
1. Turn off the main power switch.

4. Turn on the main power switch and access SP5-826.
[Serviceman] SP-5826-XXX
Up Load Program
1: Start
↑Prev. ↓Next OK Exit
A284M502.WMF
A283/A284 4-56 SM
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
5. Press the “1” key. The machine erases the current software, then writes the
new software to the flash memory card. This takes about 100 seconds.
NOTE: The display is inverted black on white during downloading from BICU to
flash memory card.
Display during erasing

Up Load Program Erasing.....
ADRS=000000h RDT=0000h, 0000h
Display during writing [Serviceman] SP-5826-XXX

Up Load Program Writing.....
ADRS=XXXXXXh RDT=XXXXh, XXXXh
Display Verifing
Service
Tables
Up Load Program Verifing.....
ADRS=XXXXXXh RDT=XXXXh, XXXXh
Display when the download is

complete [Serviceman] SP-5826-XXX
Up Load Program Finished
ADRS=200000h SSUM=XXXXh, DSUM=XXXXh
A284M501.WMF
If downloading failed, an error message appears. At this time, re-try the

download.
SM 4-57 A283/A284
USER PROGRAM MODE
4.3 USER PROGRAM MODE

The user program (UP) mode is accessed by users and operators, and by sales
and service staff. UP mode is used to input the copier’s default settings.
4.3.1 HOW TO ENTER AND EXIT UP MODE

Press the User Tools button, then select the UP mode program. After finishing the
UP mode program, press the User Tools button to exit UP mode.
4.3.2 UP MODE TABLE
NOTE: 1) A “#” mark by the item number means that this UP mode has been
added.
2) The function of each UP mode is explained in the System Setting and
Copy Reference section of the operating instructions.
System Setting Table

01. Function Priority
02. Panel Beeper
03. Ready Beeper
04. Copy Count Display
05. System Reset
06. Function Switch
07. Low Power Shift Timer
08. Low Power Timer
09. Energy Saver Mode
10. Auto Off Timer
11. Paper Size – Tray
12. Paper Tray Priority
13. Auto Tray Switch
1. System
14. Special Paper Indication

15. Output Tray 1. Copy
2. Fax
3. Printer
16. Print Priority
17. Contrast
18. User Code Manage
19. Management Setting 1. Show/Print Counter
2. Print Counter List
3. Key Operator Code
4. Register/Change Key Operator Code
# 5. Key Counter: Copier Access
# 6. AOF (Keep it on)
22. ADF Original Eject
23. Memory Priority
# 24. Print/Scan Priority
25. F/F4 Size Setting
A283/A284 4-58 SM
USER PROGRAM MODE
Copy Setting Table

1. General 01. APS Priority
Features 02. AID Priority
03. Original Priority
04. Show All Keys
05. Maximum Copy Q’ty
06. Original Beeper
07. Photo Mode
08. Reproduction Ratio
09. Slip Sheet Tray
10. Duplex Priority
11. Auto Reset
12. Density Pattern
13. Initial Mode Set
14. Management Setting 1. Counter Reset
2. Clear Code/Counter
3. Register User Code
4. Change/Delete User Code
2. Copy
5. Counter List Print

2. Adjust Image 01. Erase Border
Service
Tables
02. Erase Center
03. Margin Adjust – Front
04. Margin Adjust – Back
05. Double Copy
06. Combine Copy
07. Image Repeat
08. Booklet Original
3. Input/Output 01. Duplex Auto Eject
02. Combine Auto Eject
03. Original Count
04. SADF Auto Reset
05. Rotate Sort
06. Sort
07. Stack
08. Memory Full – Auto Sort
09. Auto Sort Mode
4. Shortcut Keys
SM 4-59 A283/A284
TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS
4.4 TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS

4.4.1 DIP SWITCHES
I/O Board: DIP SW101
No. Function ON OFF
1 Copy Speed 35 cpm (180 mm/s) 45 cpm (230 mm/s)
2 Jam Detection Off On
(see Note)
3 SC Generation Disabled Enabled
4 Not used Keep at “OFF”
6 Destination Off ) Japan On ) N. America Off ) Europe On ) Not used
7 Off Off On On
NOTE: Disabling jam detection is effective only for the main machine (not for the
options).
4.4.2 TEST POINTS

I/O Board
Number Monitored Signal
TP103 Ground
TP104 +24 V
TP136 +5 V
TP154 Ground
TP156 +12 V
TP158 –12 V
TP159 +5 VE
BICU
TP103 GND
TP145 F-gate signal
A283/A284 4-60 SM
Rev. 08/2000 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
4.4.3 LEDS
BICU
Monitors whether the program is working normally or not. The LED
LED101
blinks in normal conditions.
LED102 Monitors +5VE. During the energy saver mode, this LED will blink.
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1
A2309352 Flash Memory Card – 4MB 1
A2309351 Case – Flash Memory Card 1
Service
Tables
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set) 1
54209516 Test Chart – OS-A3 (10 pcs/Set) 1
A0299387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 87 1
A2849099 NVRAM – Minus Counter 1
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS
A0289300 Grease Barrierta JFE 5 5/2 1
52039501 Silicone Grease G-501 1
⇒4.6 USER CODES

The following is the procedure to set the machine for User Code mode:
1. Register at least one user code – User Tools, #2 Copy, #14
Management Settings, #3 Reg. User Code.
2. Turn on User Code Management – User Tools, #1 System,
#18 User Code Manage, set to YES.
SM 4-61 A283/A284
PM TABLE
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

5.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

A283/A284 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE
SCANNER/OPTICS
Reflector C C C Optics cloth
1st Mirror C C C Optics cloth
2nd Mirror C C C Optics cloth
3rd Mirror C C C Optics cloth
Scanner Guide Rails I I I Do not use alcohol.
Platen Sheet Cover Replace the platen sheet, if
C I I I necessary.
Dry cloth or alcohol
Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth
APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
AROUND THE DRUM

Charge Roller R R R
Charge Roller
R R R
Cleaning Pad
Maintenance
Quenching Lamp C Dry cloth
Preventive
Pick-off Pawls R R R
Spur C C C Dry cloth or alcohol
ID Sensor Perform the ID sensor initial
C C C setting (SP3-001-2) after
cleaning (blower brush)
CLEANING UNIT
Drum Cleaning Blade R R R
Cleaning Entrance Blower brush. Replace if
C C C
Seal necessary.
Side Seal I I I
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Development Drive Replace every 5 PM (750 k)
I I I
Gears
Development Filter R
Developer I R I
Entrance Seal I I I
Side Seal I I I
SM 5-1 A283/A284
PM TABLE
A283/A284 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE

PAPER FEED
Registration Roller C C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Paper Feed Roller I R R R Check the counter value for
Separation Roller I R R R each paper tray station (SP7-
Pick-up Roller I R R R 204). If the value has reached
Paper Feed Roller 150 k, replace the roller. After
I R R R replacing the roller, reset the
(By-pass feed table)
counter (SP7-816).
Separation Roller (By-
I R R R
pass feed table)
Pick-up Roller
I R R R
(By-pass feed table)
Paper Feed Guides C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Relay Rollers C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Bottom Plate Pad (By- Clean with water or alcohol.
C C C
pass feed)
Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush
TRANSFER BELT UNIT

Transfer Belt C R R R Dry cloth
Transfer Belt Cleaning
R R R
Blade
Transfer Belt Rollers C C C Dry cloth
Entrance Seal C C C Dry cloth
Transfer Entrance Dry cloth
C C C C
Guide
Used Toner Tank I C C C Empty the tank.
FUSING UNIT AND PAPER EXIT

Fusing Entrance and Clean with water or alcohol.
C C C
Exit Guide Plates
Hot Roller R R R
Pressure Roller R R R
Fusing Thermistor Clean if necessary (suitable
I I I
solvent)
Cleaning Roller C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
Cleaning Roller Grease Barrierta JFE 55/2
L L L
Bushings
Pressure Roller Clean with water or alcohol.
C C C
Strippers
Hot Roller Strippers C R C Clean with water or alcohol.
Paper Exit Guide Ribs C C C Clean with water or alcohol.
OTHERS
Drive Belts I Replace if necessary
A283/A284 5-2 SM
PM TABLE
EM 80K 160K 240K NOTE

ADF (for originals)
Transport Belt C R R R Belt cleaner
Feed Belt C R R R Belt cleaner
Separation Roller C R R R Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C C C Blower brush
Drive Gears L L L Grease G501

PAPER TRAY UNIT
Paper Feed Rollers R R R Check the counter value for
Pick-up Rollers R R R each paper tray station (SP7-
Separation Rollers 204). If the value has reached
150 k, replace the roller. After
R R R replacing the roller, reset the
counter (SP7-816).
Relay Rollers C C C Dry or damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth

LCT
Paper Feed Roller Check the counter value for
each paper tray station (SP7-
204). If the value has reached
R R R
150 k, replace the roller. After
Maintenance
Preventive
replacing the roller, reset the
counter (SP7-816).
Pick-up Roller R R R
Separation Roller R R R
Bottom Plate Pad C C C Dry or damp cloth

1,000-SHEET/3,000-SHEET FINISHER
Rollers C Clean with water or alcohol.
Brush Roller I I I I Replace if necessary.
Discharge Brush C C C C Clean with a dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if necessary.
Punch Waste Hopper I I I I Empty the hopper.

1-BIN TRAY UNIT
Rollers C Dry or damp cloth
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
SM 5-3 A283/A284
SCANNER UNIT
6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section.
6.1 SCANNER UNIT

6.1.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
[D] [B]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
A284R101.WMF
and
1. Open the ADF or platen cover.

2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear scale [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C].
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the mark [D] is
positioned at the rear left corner, as shown.
SM 6-1 A283/A284
SCANNER UNIT
6.1.2 SCANNER EXTERIOR/OPERATION PANEL
[C]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
A284R109.WMF
[C]
A284R105.WMF
1. Remove the ADF or platen cover.

2. Remove the exposure glass. (See Exposure Glass.)
3. Remove the operation panel [A] (4 screws, 1 connector).
4. Remove the lower operation cover [B] (4 screws).
5. Remove the rear cover [C] (2 screws, 2 pegs).
6. Remove the right cover [D] (3 screws).
7. Remove the left cover [E] (2 screws).
A283/A284 6-2 SM
SCANNER UNIT
6.1.3 LENS BLOCK/SBU ASSEMBLY
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A284R102.WMF
1. Remove the exposure glass. (See Exposure Glass.)

2. Remove the lens cover [A] (4 screws).
3. Remove the grounding plate [B] (2 screws).
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Disconnect the flexible harnesses [C]. and
5. Remove the lens block assembly [D] (4 screws).
6. Do the scanner and printer copy adjustments (see Replacement and
Adjustment – Copy Adjustments).
SM 6-3 A283/A284
SCANNER UNIT
6.1.4 SCANNER MOTOR
[C]
[B]
[A]
A284R106.WMF
1. Remove the scanner rear cover. (See Scanner Exterior.)

2. Remove the bracket [A] (4 screws).
3. Remove the rear bracket [B] (5 screws, 1 grounding wire, 1 connector).
4. Remove the scanner motor assembly [C] (3 screws, 1 connector, 1 spring, 1
timing belt).
5. Do the scanner and printer copy adjustments (see Replacement and
Adjustment – Copy Adjustments).
A283/A284 6-4 SM
SCANNER UNIT
6.1.5 SIB/LAMP STABILIZER
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
A284R108.WMF
1. Remove the scanner rear cover. (See Scanner Exterior.)

2. Remove the bracket [A] (4 screws).
3. Remove the rear bracket [B] (5 screws, 1 grounding wire, 1 connector).
4. Remove the SIB [C] (2 screws, all connectors).
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Remove the lamp stabilizer [D] (2 connectors).
and
SM 6-5 A283/A284
LASER UNIT
6.2 LASER UNIT

WARNING
any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage
your eyes.
6.2.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below.
A283/A284 6-6 SM
LASER UNIT
6.2.2 LASER UNIT
[C]
[A]
[B]
A284R201.WMF
[F]
[E] [D]
Replacement
Adjustment
A284R202.WMF
and
WARNING
this procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
1. Remove the front cover [A] (2 pins).

2. Remove the shield glass [B].
3. Remove the inner cover [C] (2 screws, 1 connector - mechanical counter).
4. Remove the shield plate [D] and grounding wire [E] (1 screw each).
5. Remove the laser unit [F] (2 screws, 5 connectors, 1 flexible harness).
NOTE: 1) When disconnecting the harnesses from the LD unit, hold on to the
LD unit.
2) When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD unit.
SM 6-7 A283/A284
LASER UNIT Rev. 08/2000
6.2.3 LASER BEAM PITCH ADJUSTMENT

After replacing the LD unit, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. There are two
laser beam pitch adjustment procedures: one for 400 dpi, and one for 600 dpi.
These adjustments use the following SP modes.
• SP2-109-1: LD Beam Pitch Adjustment – 400 dpi
• SP2-109-3: LD Initial Setting – 400 dpi
•
⇒
SP2-109-4: LD Initial Setting – 600 dpi
• SP2-110, no. 1: Image Resolution Change – 400 dpi
• SP2-902-3, no.16: Test Pattern Printing – Cross Stitch
1. Do SP 2-109-8.
2. Input the value “144” into SP2-109-1.
3. Perform SP2-109-3.
⇒4. Print out 400 dpi test pattern A3 (11x17), change SP2-110 to 1 and print out the
cross stitch test pattern using SP2-902-3 no. 16. For 600 dpi, set SP2-110 to 8.
5. Write the value of SP2-109-1 on the test pattern (in this case “144”).
6. Change the value of SP2-109-1 and print another test pattern, repeating steps
2 to 4. Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2-109-1 (e.g. “48”, “96”,
“192”, “240”).
7. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, the image
looks like a black vertical strip pattern.
NOTE: As an example, if the pattern made with the value “192” has less
obvious strips than the other print outs, the correct value is near “192”.
8. Adjust the laser beam pitch position until the thin lines are of uniform thickness
(no striping effect should appear on the printout), doing steps 1, 2, and 3 (in
step 1, input a value which is estimated to be correct, then do steps 2 and 3,
then if necessary go back to step 1 and try another value).
9. After adjusting the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi, adjust the laser beam pitch for
600 dpi, using the same procedure as for 400 dpi (use the SP modes for 600
dpi). The laser beam pitch for 600 dpi should be 24 ~ 48 more than for 400 dpi.
Feed Direction Feed Direction
A284R512.WMF A284R513.WMF
Adjustment not complete Adjustment complete
A283/A284 6-8 SM
COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING
6.3 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

NOTE: 1) You need to perform these adjustment(s) after replacing any of the
following parts:
• Scanner Wire
• Lens Block/SBU Assembly
• Scanner Drive Motor
• Polygon Mirror Motor
• Paper Side Fence
• Memory All Clear
2) For more details about accessing SP modes, refer to section 4.
6.3.1 PRINTING
NOTE: 1) Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you
start these adjustments.
2) Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-902-3, No.10) to print the test
pattern for the following procedures.
3) Set SP 2-902-3 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. Check the leading edge registration, and adjust it using SP1-001.
The specification is: 3 ± 2mm.
2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode Specification B
1st paper feed SP1-002-1
2nd paper feed SP1-002-2
Replacement
A
Adjustment
3rd paper feed
SP1-002-3 and
(Optional PFU tray 1)
4th paper feed 2 ± 1.5 mm
SP1-002-4
(Optional PFU tray 2)
Duplex SP1-002-5
By-pass feed SP1-002-6
LCT SP1-002-7 A284R506.WMF
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
SM 6-9 A283/A284
Blank Margin
NOTE: If the leading edge/side-to-side registration can not be adjusted within the
specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins, and adjust them
using the following SP modes.
SP mode Specification D
Trailing edge SP2-101-2 2 ± 2 mm
Right edge SP2-101-4 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm C
Leading edge SP2-101-1 3 ± 2 mm
Left edge SP2-101-3 2 ± 1.5 mm
Trailing edge (duplex SP2-101-5 2 ± 2 mm
copy, 2nd side)
Left edge (duplex SP2-101-6 2 ± 1.5 mm A
copy, 2nd side)
Right edge (duplex SP2-101-7 2 +2.5/-1.5 mm B
copy, 2nd side) A284R507.WMF
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
Main Scan Magnification

1. Print the single-dot grid pattern (SP2-902-3, no.5).
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-909-1 if
necessary. The specification is ±1%.
A283/A284 6-10 SM
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram is printed while adjusting the printing
registration or the printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
NOTE: The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side
registration for each paper tray station.
[C]
[B]
Turn
clockwise
[D] [A]
Turn
counterclockwise
1. Check the trimming area pattern image (SP2-902-3, No.10) whether a

parallelogram image appears or not, as shown. If it appears, do the following.
2. Remove the laser unit [A] (see Replacement and Adjustment - Laser Unit).
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Remove the bracket [B] (2 screws).
4. Install the adjusting cam [C] (P/N: A2309003). and
5. Secure the adjustment bracket [D] using the two screws which were used for
the bracket [B]. However, do not tighten the screws at this time.
6. Adjusts the laser unit position by turning the adjusting cam. (Refer to the above
illustration for the relationship between the image and the cam rotation
direction).
7. Tighten the adjustment bracket.
8. Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If it is still the same, repeat
steps 6 to 8.
SM 6-11 A283/A284
6.3.2 SCANNING
NOTE: 1) Perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and

the blank margin adjustment, before doing the following scanner
adjustments.
2) Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the
following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode A
Leading Edge SP4-010
Side-to-side SP4-011

B: Side-to-side Registration B
A284R508.WMF
Magnification
NOTE: Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment.
Sub Scan Magnification
A
A: Main Scan Magnification
A284R510.WMF
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio, and adjust it using the following SP mode if
necessary. The specification is ±1%.
SP mode
Sub Scan Magnification SP4-008
A283/A284 6-12 SM
Scanner Skew Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if skew is caused by the scanner (not the printer) while
adjusting the scanner registration and magnification.
NOTE: 1) In machines with an ADF, do the following procedure after doing all
ADF image adjustments on the following page.
2) The specification is 1.2 mm / 200 mm.
[A]
L2 L1
[B]
TEST CHART OS-A-3

[C]
A284R114.WMF
A284R516.WMF
1. Place the OS-A3 test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of
the feed stations.
2. Measure the distance from the leading edge of the 10th line at both upper
corners on the test chart (L1 and L2 in the above right illustration).
3. If the difference between the two positions is greater than 0.3 mm, do the
following steps.
4. Remove the screws that secure the scanner unit and lift up the scanner,
Replacement
Adjustment
holding the grip [A].
and
5. Put spacer(s) [B] at the front or rear of the scanner plate [C], depending on the
skew image.
• If the distance at the right side is longer than at the left side, add the
spacer(s) to the front side of the scanner plate.
• If the distance at the left side is longer than at the right side, add the
spacer(s) to the rear side of the scanner plate.
Difference No. of spacers
0.3 mm ~ 0.6 mm 1
0.6 mm ~ 0.8 mm 2
0.8 mm ~ 1.1 mm 3
6. Make a copy again using the test chart to check the skew.
7. If there is still some skew, redo steps 5 and 6.
8. If the skew has been corrected, secure the scanner unit (2 screws).
SM 6-13 A283/A284
6.3.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
NOTE: Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the
feed stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode
Side-to-side Registration SP6-006-1
Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) SP6-006-2
Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: front) SP6-006-3
Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: rear) SP6-006-4
A283/A284 6-14 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
7.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent the machine from being damaged, Enter SP mode, then turn the
the SC can only be reset by a service main power switch off and on.
A
representative (see the note below). The
copier cannot be operated at all.
The SC can be reset by turning the main Turn the operation switch or
power switch off and on if the SC was caused main power switch off and on.
B by incorrect sensor detection. A level B’ SC can only be reset
by turning the main power
switch off and on.
The copier can be operated as usual except Turn the operation switch off
C
for the unit related to the service call. and on.
The SC history is updated. The machine can The SC will not displayed. All
D be operated as usual. that happens is that the SC
history is updated.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
3) When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does
not indicate the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after
leaving the SP mode. This does not apply to Level B’ codes.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 7-1 A283/A284
7.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC101: Exposure Lamp Error
Definition [B]
The standard white level was not detected properly when scanning the white
plate.
Possible Cause
• Exposure lamp defective
• Lamp stabilizer defective
• Exposure lamp connector defective
• Dirty standard white plate
• Dirty scanner mirror or scanner mirror out of position
• SBU board defective
• SBU connector defective
• Lens block out of position
• SIB defective
SC120: Scanner Home Position Error 1

Definition [B’]
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition during
initialization or copying.
Possible Causes
• Scanner home position sensor defective
• Scanner drive motor defective
• SIB defective
• Scanner home position sensor connector defective
• Scanner drive motor connector defective
SC121: Scanner Home Position Error 2

Definition [B’]
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition during
initialization or copying.
Possible Causes
• Scanner home position sensor defective
• Scanner drive motor defective
• SIB defective
• Scanner home position sensor connector defective
• Scanner drive motor connector defective
A283/A284 7-2 SM
SC302: Charge Roller Current Leak

Definition [B]
A charge roller current leak signal is detected.
Possible Causes
• Charge roller damaged
• High voltage supply board defective
• Poor PCU connection
SC 304: Charge Roller Current Correction Error

Definition [B]
The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum
charge roller bias (-2000V) is applied to the roller.
Possible Causes
• ID sensor defective
SC320: Polygon Motor Error

Definition [B’]
The polygon motor does not reach its operating speed within 20 seconds after
the polygon motor on signal, or the lock signal is still activated for more than 20
seconds after the polygon motor off signal.
Possible Causes
• Polygon motor defective
• Poor connection between the polygon motor driver and the BICU board
• BICU board defective
SC321: No Laser Writing Signal (F-gate) Error 1

Definition [B]
The laser writing signal (F-GATE) does not go to LOW for more than 15
seconds after the copy paper reaches the registration sensor.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection of the fax controller or printer controller
• Fax controller or printer controller defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 7-3 A283/A284
SC322: 1st Laser Synchronization Error

Definition[B’]
The 1st laser synchronization signal cannot be detected by the main scan
synchronization detector board even if the laser diodes are activated.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the laser synchronization detector board and the
LD unit.
• Laser synchronization detector board out of position
• Laser synchronization detector board defective
• LD unit defective
SC323: LD Drive Current Over

Definition [B’]
The LD drive board applies more than 110 mA to the LD.
Possible Causes
• LD unit defective (not enough power, due to aging)
• Poor connection between the LD unit and the BICU board
• BICU defective
SC326: 2nd Laser Synchronization Error

Definition [B’]
The 2nd laser synchronization signal cannot be detected by the main scan
synchronization detector board even if the laser diodes are activated.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the laser synchronization detector board and the
LD unit.
• Laser synchronization detector board out of position
• Laser synchronization detector board defective
• LD unit defective
SC327: LD Unit Home Position Error 1

Definition [B’]
The LD unit home position sensor does not detect an on condition when the LD
unit moves to its home position.
Possible Causes
• LD unit home position sensor defective
• LD positioning motor defective
• LD unit movement blocked because of incorrect connector routing
A283/A284 7-4 SM
SC328: LD Unit Home Position Rrror 2

Definition- [B’]
The LD unit home position sensor does not detect an off condition when the LD
unit moves from its home position.
Possible Causes
• LD unit home position sensor defective
• LD positioning motor defective
SC329: Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment Error

Definition [B]
The LD unit home position sensor does not detect an on condition while
changing the LD unit position for correcting the LD position or changing the dpi.
Possible Causes
• The laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109-3 and 4) was not done after
replacing the NVRAM or doing an NVRAM clear.
• The laser beam pitch adjustment (SP2-109-1 ~ 4) was not done after
replacing the LD unit.
SC350-1: ID Sensor Error 1

Definition [B]
One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected twice
consecutively when checking the ID sensor pattern.
1) Vsp ≥ 2.5V
2) Vsg ≤ 2.5V
3) Vsp = 0V
4) Vsg = 0V
Possible Causes
• ID sensor connector defective
• Poor ID sensor connector connection
• I/O board (IOB) defective
shooting
Trouble-
• Dirty ID sensor
• Defect at ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum
SM 7-5 A283/A284

Definition [B]
The ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V and the PWM signal input to the ID
sensor is 0 when checking the ID sensor pattern.
Possible Causes
• Dirty ID sensor
• Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum

Definition [B]
The ID sensor pattern edge voltage is detected to be not 2.5V twice
consecutively during an 800 ms interval.
Possible Causes
• Dirty ID sensor

Definition [B]
One of the following ID sensor output voltages is detected at ID sensor
initialization.
1) Vsg < 4.0V when the maximum PWM input (255) is applied to the ID sensor.
2) Vsg ≥ 4.0V when the minimum PWM input (0) is applied to the ID sensor.
Possible Causes
• Dirty ID sensor
A283/A284 7-6 SM

Definition [B]
Vsg falls out of the adjustment target (4.0 ± 0.2V) during Vsg checking.
Possible Causes
• Dirty ID sensor
SC360: Hard Disk Drive Error 1

Definition [B]
The machine does not detect the connection signal from the HDD.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the HDD and HDD controller board
• The ac power connector to the HDD is disconnected.
• HDD defective
• HDD controller board defective
• BICU defective
SC361: Hard Disk Drive Error 2

Definition [B]
The image data stored in the HDD cannot be output properly.
Possible Causes
• When this SC occurs only once, this problem will be solved after turning the
main power switch off and on.
• When this SC occurs while performing SP4-911-1 (HDD media check), it can
be cured by doing SP4-911-2 (HDD formatting).
• HDD defective
SC362: IMAC (Image Compression IC) Error

shooting
Trouble-
Definition [B]
An error occurs during image processing in the IMAC, which handles image
compression and image data transmission.
Possible Causes
• BICU defective
• HDD controller board defective
SM 7-7 A283/A284
SC365: Image Storage Address Error

Definition [B]
The BICU receives an image data output request signal for data that is not
stored in memory.
Possible Causes
• BICU defective
SC390-1: TD Sensor Error 1

Definition [B]
The TD sensor output voltage is less than 0.5V or more than 5.0V 10
consecutively during copying.
Possible Causes
• TD sensor abnormal
• Poor connection between the TD sensor and the I/O board (IOB)
SC390-2: TD Sensor Error 2

Definition [B]
The TD sensor output voltage is less than 1.8V or more than 4.8V during TD
sensor initial setting.
Possible Causes
• TD sensor abnormal
• No developer in the development unit
SC391: Development Bias Leak

Definition [B]
A development bias leak signal is detected.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the development bias terminal and the high voltage
supply board
SC401-1: Transfer Roller Leak Error

Definition [B]
A transfer roller current leak signal is detected.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the transfer current terminal and the high voltage
supply board
A283/A284 7-8 SM
SC401-2: Transfer Roller Open Error

Definition [B]
The transfer roller current feedback signal is not detected.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the transfer current terminal and the high voltage
supply board
• Poor PCU connection
SC403: Transfer Belt Position Sensor Error

Definition [B]
The transfer belt position sensor does not activate even if the transfer belt
clutch has rotated once.
Possible Causes
• Main motor/drive malfunction
• Transfer belt position sensor defective
• Poor transfer belt position sensor connection
SC 405: Transfer Belt Error

Definition [B]
The transfer belt does not move away from the drum during ID sensor pattern
checking.
Possible Causes
• Main motor/drive malfunction
• Transfer belt position sensor defective
• Poor transfer belt position sensor connection
SC440: Main Motor Lock

Definition [B]
A main motor lock signal is not detected within 2 seconds after the main motor
turns on.
Possible Causes
• Too much load on the drive mechanism
shooting
Trouble-
• Main motor defective
SM 7-9 A283/A284
SC490: Exhaust Fan Motor Lock

Definition [B]
An exhaust fan motor lock signal is not detected within 5 seconds after the
exhaust fan motor turns on.
Possible Causes
• Exhaust fan motor defective
• Poor fan motor connector connection
SC492: Cooling Fan Motor Lock

Definition [B]
A cooling fan motor lock signal is not detected within 5 seconds after the
cooling fan motor turns on.
Possible Causes
• Cooling fan motor defective
SC493: Bridge Unit Cooling Fan Lock

Definition [B]
A bridge unit cooling fan motor lock signal is not detected within 5 seconds
after the bridge unit cooling fan motor turns on.
Possible Causes
• Bridge unit cooling fan motor defective
SC501-1: 1st Tray Lift Malfunction 1

Definition [C]
The paper upper limit sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been
on for 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
• 1st tray upper limit sensor defective
• Tray lift motor defective
• Poor tray lift motor connection
A283/A284 7-10 SM
SC501-2: 1st Tray Lift Malfunction 2

Definition [C]
If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed
height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the paper
upper limit sensor should de-activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom
plate starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively,
this SC will be generated.
Possible Causes
• 1st tray upper limit sensor defective
• Too much paper in the tray
SC502-1: 2nd Tray Lift Malfunction 1

Definition [C]
on for 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
• 2nd tray upper limit sensor defective
SC502-2: 2nd Tray Lift Malfunction 2

Definition [C]
Possible Causes
• 2nd tray upper limit sensor defective
SC503-1: 3rd Tray Lift Malfunction 1 (Optional Paper Tray Unit)

shooting
Trouble-
Definition [C]
on for 13 seconds.
Possible Causes
• 3rd tray upper limit sensor defective
SM 7-11 A283/A284
SC503-2: 3rd Tray Lift Malfunction 2 (Optional Paper Tray Unit)

Definition [C]
Possible Causes
• 3rd tray upper limit sensor defective
SC504-1: 4th Tray Lift Malfunction 1 (Optional Paper Tray Unit)

Definition [C]
on for 13 seconds.
Possible Causes
• 4th tray upper limit sensor defective
SC504-2: 4th Tray Lift Malfunction 2 (Optional Paper Tray Unit)

Definition [C]
Possible Causes
• 4th tray upper limit sensor defective
SC506: Paper Tray Unit Main Motor Lock (Optional Paper Tray)
Definition [C]
A main motor lock signal is detected for more than 0.5 s during rotation.
Possible Causes
• Paper tray unit main motor defective
• Poor motor connector connection
A283/A284 7-12 SM
SC507: LCT Main Motor Lock (Optional LCT)

Definition [C]
A main motor lock signal is detected for more than 0.5 s during rotation.
Possible Causes
• LCT main motor defective
SC510-1: LCT Tray Malfunction 1

Definition [C]
1) The LCT lift sensor does not activate for more than 18 seconds after the
LCT lift motor turned on.
2) The LCT lower limit sensor does not activate for more than 18 seconds after
the LCT lift motor turned on.
3) The LCT lift sensor is already activated when the LCT lift motor turns on.
Possible Causes
• LCT lift motor defective
• Pick-up solenoid defective
• Poor pick-up solenoid connector connection
• Paper end sensor defective
• LCT lift sensor defective
• LCT lower limit sensor defective
SC510-2: LCT Tray Malfunction-2

Definition [C]
1) During paper lifting, the LCT lift sensor does not activate for more than 1.5
seconds after the paper end sensor turned on. If this condition occurs four
times consecutively, this SC will be generated.
2) During paper lifting, after the top of the paper reaches the upper limit
position, the paper is lowered until the LCT lift sensor is de-activated. At this
time, the LCT lift sensor does not de-activate for more than 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
• LCT lift motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
• Pick-up solenoid defective

• Poor pick-up solenoid connector connection
• Paper end sensor defective
• Too much paper in the LCT
• Paper is not properly loaded in the LCT
SM 7-13 A283/A284
SC541: Fusing Thermistor Open

Definition [A]
The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor was below 7°C for 16
seconds.
Possible Causes
• Fusing thermistor defective or out of position
• Poor thermistor terminal connection
SC542: Fusing Temperature Warming-up Error

Definition [A]
The fusing temperature does not reach the fusing standby temperature within
125 seconds after the main power switch is turned on.
Possible Causes
• Fusing thermistor defective or out of position
• Fusing lamp open
• Fusing thermofuse open
• BICU defective
• Power supply board defective
• Poor fusing unit connection
SC543: Fusing Overheat Error 1

Definition [A]
A fusing temperature of over 231°C is detected for 5 seconds by the fusing
thermistor.
Possible Causes
• Fusing thermistor defective
• BICU defective
SC545: Fusing Overheat Error 2

Definition [A]
The fusing lamp stays on at full power for 30 seconds while in the stand-by
condition after warming-up is completed.
Possible Causes
• Fusing thermistor out of position
A283/A284 7-14 SM
SC546-1: Fusing Ready Temperature Malfunction - 1

Definition [A]
After warming-up is completed, the fusing temperature continuously fluctuates
between 40°C over and 40°C below the stand-by temperature.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the thermistor and the harness
SC546-2: Fusing Ready Temperature Malfunction - 2

Definition [A]
After warming-up is completed, the fusing temperature fluctuates between
40°C over and 40°C below the stand-by temperature 5 or more times per
minutes.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the thermistor and the harness
SC547: Zero Cross Signal Malfunction

Definition [A]
Zero cross signals are not detected within a certain period within 500 ms after
the main power switch has been turned on.
Possible Causes
• Power supply board defective
• Noise on the ac power line
SC548: Fusing Unit Installation Error

Definition [A]
The machine cannot detect the fusing unit when the front cover and right cover
are closed.
Possible Causes
• Fusing unit is not installed
shooting
Trouble-
SM 7-15 A283/A284
SC599: 1-Bin Tray Motor Lock (Optional 1-Bin Tray Unit)

Definition [C]
A 1-bin tray motor lock signal is not detected for more than 0.3 seconds during
rotation.
Possible Causes
• 1-bin tray motor defective
SC601: Communication Error between BICU and Scanner Unit

Definition [B’]
The BICU cannot communicate with the BIS board properly.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the SIB and SIFB boards.
• Poor connection between the SIFB and BICU boards.
• SIB board defective
• SIFB board defective
SC602: Communication Error between BICU and HDD Control Board

Definition [B’]
The BICU cannot communicate with the HDD control board properly.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and HDD control board
• HDD control board defective
SC620-1: Communication Error between BICU and ADF 1

Definition [B’]
The BICU cannot receive a response signal three times when a communication
error has occurred.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and ADF main board
• ADF main board defective
A283/A284 7-16 SM

Definition [B’]
The BICU receives a “Break” signal from the ADF main board.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and ADF main board

Definition [B’]
The BICU sends a command to the ADF main board which does not operate
an ADF function.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and the ADF main board
SC621: Communication Error between BICU and Finisher

Definition [B’]
The BICU cannot communicate with the finisher properly.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and the finisher main board
• Finisher main board defective
SC623: Communication Error between BICU and Paper Tray Unit

Definition [B’]
The BICU cannot communicate with the paper tray unit properly.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and the paper tray unit main board
• Paper tray unit main board defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 7-17 A283/A284
SC624: Communication Error between BICU and LCT

Definition [B’]
The BICU cannot communicate with the LCT properly.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between the BICU board and the LCT main board
• LCT main board defective
SC630: CSS (RSS) Communication Error between Line Adapter and CSS
Center [D]
• Japan Only
SC700: ADF Original Pick-up Malfunction

Definition [B’]
The original stopper H.P sensor does not activate three times consecutively
after the pick-up motor has turned on.
Possible Causes
• Original stopper H.P sensor defective
• Pick-up motor defective
• Timing belt out of position
SC701: ADF Original Pick-up Malfunction

Definition [B’]
The original pick-up H.P sensor does not activate three times consecutively
after the pick-up motor has turned on.
Possible Causes
• Original pick-up H.P sensor defective
• Pick-up motor defective
A283/A284 7-18 SM
SC722: Finisher Jogger Motor Error

Definition [B’]
1) The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains de-activated for a certain time when
returning to home position.
2) The finisher jogger H.P sensor remains activated for a certain time when
moving away from home position.
Possible Causes
• Jogger H.P sensor defective
• Jogger motor defective
SC724: Finisher Staple Hammer Motor Error

Definition [B’]
Stapling does not finish for more than 600 ms after the staple hammer motor
turned on.
Possible Causes
• Staple hammer motor defective
• Staple jam
SC725: Finisher Stack Feed-out Motor Error

Definition [B’]
The stack feed-out belt H.P sensor does not activate within a certain time after
the stack feed-out motor turned on.
Possible Causes
• Stack feed-out H.P sensor defective
• Stack feed-out motor defective
SC726: Finisher Shift/Lift Motor Error

Definition [B’]
1) Tray shift does not finish within a certain time after the shift motor turned on.
2) The stack height sensor does not activate within a certain time after the shift
tray lift motor turned on.
Possible Causes
• Shift motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
• Shift tray lift motor defective
SM 7-19 A283/A284
SC727: Finisher Stapler Rotation Motor Error

Definition [B’]
1) Stapler rotation does not finish within a certain time after the staple rotation
motor turned on.
2) The stapler does not return to its home position within a certain time after
stapling finished.
Possible Causes
• Stapler rotation motor defective
• Poor stapler rotation motor connection
SC729: Finisher Punch Motor Error

Definition [B’]
The punch H.P sensor does not activate within a certain time after the punch
motor turned on.
Possible Causes
• Punch motor defective
• Punch H.P sensor defective
• Poor punch motor connection
SC730: Finisher Stapler Position Motor Error

Definition [B’]
1) The stapler does not return to its home position within a certain time after the
stapler motor turned on.
2) The stapler H.P sensor does not activate within a certain time after the
stapler motor turned on.
Possible Causes
• Stapler motor defective
• Stapler H.P sensor defective
• Poor stapler motor connection
SC900: Electrical Total Counter Error

Definition [A]
The value of the total counter has already exceeded 9,999,999
Possible Causes
• NVRAM defective
A283/A284 7-20 SM
SC951: F-gate Signal Error 2

Definition [B’]
When the IPU has already received the F-gate signal, the IPU receives another
F-gate signal.
Possible Causes
• BICU defective
SC954: Printer Image Setting Error

Definition [B’]
The settings that are required for image processing using the printer controller
are not sent from the IPU.
Possible Causes
• Software defective
SC955: Memory Setting Error

Definition [B’]
The settings that are required for image processing using the memory are not
sent from the IPU.
Possible Causes
SC959: Printer Setting ID Error

Definition [B’]
The ID that is required for image processing using the printer is not sent from
the IPU.
Possible Causes
SC960: Printer Return ID Error

Definition [B’]
The ID that is sent from the printer controller after finishing the printout is
incorrect.
shooting
Trouble-
Possible Causes
SM 7-21 A283/A284
SC961: Printer Ready ID Error

Definition [B’]
The ID that is sent from the printer controller in the printer controller printing
ready condition is incorrect.
Possible Causes
SC962: Memory Setting ID Error

Definition [B’]
The ID that is sent from the memory when the IPU sent the memory ready
signal is incorrect.
Possible Causes
SC963: Memory Finishing ID Error

Definition [B’]
The ID that is sent from the memory when the IPU sent the memory finish
signal is incorrect.
Possible Causes
SC964: Printer Ready Error

Definition [B’]
The print ready signal is not generated for more than 17 seconds after the IPU
received the print start signal.
Possible Causes
SC980: HDD Access Error

Definition [B’]
Incorrect parameter sent from the BICU to the MSU.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between BICU and MSU.
A283/A284 7-22 SM
SC981: HDD Response Error

Definition [B’]
The HDD control board does not generate any response when the IPU sends a
read/write signal to the MSU.
Possible Causes
• Poor connection between BICU and MSU
• HDD defective
SC982: HDD Construction Error

Definition [B’]
1) The HDD has been installed without the electric sort kit (SIMM memory).
2) A HDD that does not have the correct specifications has been installed.
Possible Causes
• Hard disk defective
• Incorrect hard disk type
• The electric sort kit is not installed
SC990: Software Performance Error

Definition [B’]
The software performs an unexpected function.
Possible Causes
• When this SC occurs, the file name, address, and data will be stored in the
NVRAM. These data can be checked by using SP 7-901.
• Note the above data and the situation in which this SC occurs. Then report
the data and conditions to your technical control center.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 7-23 A283/A284
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

7.2.1 SENSORS
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
Scanner Home 505-5 Open SC121 is displayed.
Position (S1) (SIB) Shorted SC120 is displayed.
Platen Cover (S2) 505-8 Open APS and ARE do not function properly.
(SIB) Shorted No symptom.
Original Width The CPU cannot detect the original size
(S3) 501-A3, 4 Open properly. APS and ARE do not function
(SIB) correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-1 The CPU cannot detect the original size
(S4) 501-A8, 9 Open properly. APS and ARE do not function
(SIB) correctly.
Shorted
Original Length-2 The CPU cannot detect the original size
(S5) 501-A13 Open properly. APS and ARE do not function
(SIB) correctly.
Shorted
LD Unit Home SC328 is displayed when the laser beam
Open
Position (S6) 220-2 pitch is changed.
(IOB) SC327 is displayed when the laser beam
Shorted
pitch is changed.
Toner Density The add toner indicator blinks even if
204-3 Open
(TD) (S7) there is toner in the development unit.
(IOB)
Shorted SC390-01 is displayed.
Paper Exit (S8) The Paper Jam indicator will light
Open
203-B2 whenever a copy is made.
(IOB) The Paper Jam indicator lights even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
Registration (S9) The Paper Jam indicator lights even if
Open
207-B2 there is no paper.
(IOB) The Paper Jam indicator will light
Shorted
whenever a copy is made.
Image Density 219-5 Open SC350-03 is displayed after copying.
(ID) (S10) (IOB) Shorted SC350-01 is displayed after copying.
Upper Paper Add Paper is displayed even if there is
Height (S11) 235-2 Open paper. If this condition occurred four
(PFB) times, SC501-02 will be displayed.
Shorted SC501-01 is displayed.
Lower Paper Add Paper is displayed even if there is
Height (S12) Open paper. If this condition occurred four
236-2 times, SC502-02 will be displayed.
(PFB) SC502-01 is displayed.
Shorted
A283/A284 7-24 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
Component
(Symbol)
Upper Paper End The Paper End indicator lights even if
Open
(S13) paper is placed in the upper paper tray.
235-8
(PFB) The Paper End indicator does not light
Shorted even if there is no paper in the upper
paper tray.
Lower Paper End The Paper End indicator lights even if
Open
(S14) paper is placed in the lower paper tray.
236-8
(PFB) The Paper End indicator does not light
Shorted even if there is no paper in the lower
paper tray.
Upper Relay The Paper Jam indicator will light
Open
(S15) 235-5 whenever a copy is made.
(PFB) The Paper Jam indicator lights even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
Lower Relay The Paper Jam indicator will light
Open
(S16) 236-5 whenever a copy is made.
(PFB) The Paper Jam indicator lights even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
Upper Tray (S17) Add Paper indicated even if there is
239-1 Open
paper.
(PFB)
Shorted Add Paper indicated when the tray is set.
Lower Tray (S18) Add Paper indicated even if there is
239-3 Open
paper.
(PFB)
Shorted Add Paper indicated when the tray is set.
Transfer Belt 203-A8 Open No symptom
Position (S19) (IOB) Shorted SC403 is displayed
7.2.2 SWITCHES
Component
(Symbol)
Right Lower Doors/Covers Open is displayed even if
Open
Cover (SW1) 232-3 the right lower cover is closed.
(PFB) The LCD goes blank when the lower
Shorted
cover is opened.
Main (SW3) 102-1~4 Open The machine does not turn on.
shooting
Trouble-
(PSU) Shorted The machine does not turn off.

Front Cover Doors/Covers Open is displayed even if
Open
Safety (SW4) 219-11 the front cover is closed.
(IOB) Doors/Covers Open is not displayed
Shorted
even if the front cover is opened.
SM 7-25 A283/A284
BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
7.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating Symptom when turning on the main
Fuse
115 V 210 ~ 230 V power switch
Power Supply Board
FU1 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250 V “Doors/Covers Open” is displayed
“Doors/Covers Open” for the finisher is
FU2 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250 V
displayed
FU3 4 A/125 V 4 A/250 V Paper end condition
FU4 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250 V SC121 is displayed
One of SC302, or SC403, or SC405 is
FU5 6.3 A/125 V 6.3 A/250 V
displayed
FU101 15 A/125 V --- No response
FU102 8 A/125 V 5 A/250 V No response
Normal operation (optional heaters do not
FU103 2 A/125 V 1 A/250 V
work)
A283/A284 7-26 SM
SCANNER KIT
B359
The B359 scanner kit option has a network interface, but there is
no SCSI interface.
Both hardware and software are completely different from the
A695 scanner option for the A230/A231/A232.
Therefore, the only comparison with the A695 in this manual is
the specification table, which compares the B359 with the A695.
.
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 SCANNER CONTROL BOARD
B359 A695
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution: 600 dpi 400 dpi
Available Scanning Main scan/Sub scan Main scan/Sub scan
Resolution Range: Book Mode Binary Processing:
Binary processing: 100 ~ 1600 dpi (in 1 dpi steps)
100 ~ 2400 dpi (in 1 dpi step) Grayscale Processing:
Grayscale Processing: 100 ~ 400 dpi (in 1 dpi steps)
100 ~ 600 dpi (in 1 dpi step)
ADF Mode
Binary processing:
Grayscale Processing:
8 bits/pixel 8 bits/pixel 8 bits/pixel
Scanning Speed: 0.8 s/200 dpi 4 s/200 dpi
(A4 lengthwise, Binary, Book (A4 lengthwise, Binary, Book
mode, MMR Compression) mode)
Scanning 30 spm for TWAIN Simplex mode (ADF):
Throughput: (A283/A284) (A230/A231): 19 ppm/200 dpi
(local peer-to-peer scanning) (A4 lengthwise, Binary)
33 spm for Delivery mode (A232): 21 ppm/200 dpi
(A283/A284) (A4 lengthwise, Binary)
(network scanning to a server) Duplex mode (ARDF):
(A4 lengthwise, Binary, ADF (A230/A231): 17 ppm/200 dpi
mode, MMR Compression) (A4 lengthwise, Binary)
(A232): 18 ppm/200 dpi
(A4 lengthwise, Binary)
Interface: Network interface x 1 SCSI-2, high density
Ethernet (100 base-TX/10 base-T Interface Connector:
for TCP/IP) 50 pin, half-pitch (x 1)
Compression MH, MR, MMR
Method: (Binary Picture Processing)
JPEG (Grayscale Processing)
Video Memory 9 MB (Standard – 4 MB for image 2 MB
Capacity: storage, 5MB for a work area)
1 DRAM SIMM slot (16 MB or 32
MB)
Up to 36 MB (4MB + 32 MB)
Power: DC 5 V, 3 A DC 5 V, 2 A
(from the main machine) (from the main machine)
Scanner
B359
Kit
SM 8-1 B359
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.2 DRAM SIMM

Number of Pins: 72 pins
Access Speed: 60 ns or faster
Capacity: 16 or 32 MB
Parity: Any setting is OK
Type: EDO required
B359 8-2 SM
SOFTWARE
1.2 SOFTWARE
1.2.1 SCANNER DRIVERS
The following scanner drivers are included on the CD-ROM.
• Network TWAIN Driver for Windows 95/98/NT4.0/NT3.51
1.2.2 SCANNER UTILITIES

The following scanner utilities are included on the CD-ROM.
• Scan Router for Windows 95/98/NT4.0
• Aficio Manager for Admin/Client (Windows 95/98/2000/NT4.0)
1.2.3 SCANNER UTILITY (OPTION)

• Scan Router Professional (Windows NT4.0 and service pack 4)
Scanner
B359
Kit
SM 8-3 B359
HARDWARE OVERVIEW
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW
BICU MB
SCANNER CONTROL - Network Interface Circuit -

BOARD
DRAM SRAM
- Image Input Circuit - (2 MB)
EEPROM MAC
FIFO AM79C971
(256 kB)
CPU
ASIC
UPD705101GM
UPD65842 ASIC Bridge
(33.3 MHz)
DISCII AG1001V
PHY
ICS1892
RJ45
Flash CPU Flash

DRAM
ROM (16 MB)
MC68340VP ROM
(2 MB) (25.166 MHz) (2 MB)
DRAM Flash
SIMM Memory Network
Slot Card
Slot
A844D500.WMF
The scanner controller contains image input and network interface circuits.
The image data from the BICU is compressed in the image input circuit, then the
data goes to the network through the network interface circuit.
Each circuit has a CPU and flash memory IC. The functions of each major
component are as follows.
B359 8-4 SM
HARDWARE OVERVIEW
1. Image input circuit

CPU: UPD705101GM
• Sequence control for the image input circuit
• Clock/time control
• DMA control
ASIC: UPD65842
• Stores the image data from the BICU board in the main machine into the
buffer memory (DRAM)
• Address control when recalling the data from the memory
• DMA control for the network interface circuit
DRAM:
Compresses and stores the image data from the main machine (Total 16 MB.
9MB for work area, 4MB for buffer area, 3 MB for the working program)
Flash ROM:
Contains the scanner controller program and stores the UP/SP settings for
the scanner (2 MB)
2. Network interface circuit

CPU: MC58340VP
• Sequence control for the network interface circuit
• Clock/time control
• DMA control
ASIC (DISCII):
• Bus interface between the image input circuit and network interface circuit
Bridge: AG1001V
This is an ISA-PCI bridge; it corrects the timing and decodes the commands
between the ISA bus and the PCI bus.
MAC: AM79C971
This is a LAN controller; it covers the same functions as the Data Link Layer
of the OSI model.
PHY:
This device covers the same functions as the Physical Layer of the OSI
model.
Flash ROM:
Contains the program for the network interface (2 MB)
Scanner
B359
Kit
EEPROM:
Contains UP/SP settings for the network interface
SM 8-5 B359
SCANNER FUNCTIONS
2.2 SCANNER FUNCTIONS

2.2.1 SELF DIAGNOSTICS
Every time the main power switch has just been turned on, the scanner board
performs the self diagnostics and the following items will be done automatically.
• SRAM read/write test
• Flash ROM read test
• Battery test
• Initializes the network interface circuit
• Application software for scanner controller test
• Connection test between the scanner board and the main body
If an error is detected, an appropriate error message or condition will be generated
(refer to the Troubleshooting section).
2.2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING IN THE SCANNER CONTROLLER

The image processing for scanner mode is done in the IPU chip on the BICU
board. However, the following processes are done in the scanner controller.
• Image compression
• Sub-scan magnification
Also, the scanner controller has a gamma table and dither matrix for scanner
mode. When the user selects the image mode using the scanner driver, the
appropriate gamma table and dither matrix are downloaded to the BICU board.
Then the IPU chip does the image processing using these tables or matrixes.
Image Compression
The image compression method for binary picture processing uses MH, MR, or
MMR, depending on scanner SP mode 002. Grayscale processing uses JPEG.
This is done by the software.
Sub-scan Magnification
Usually, the sub-scan magnification is done by changing the scanner motor speed.
However, when the amount of data being transferred is high (e.g., low resolution in
grayscale processing mode), the scanner controller deletes every other line.
B359 8-6 SM
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[D]
[E]
[C]
[A] [B] B358I503.WMF
B359I502.WMF
[H]
[I]
[F]
[G]
B359I507.WMF B359I505.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: If either the Printer Controller Type 450e or Fax Option Type 450e has
been installed, skip steps 1 through 8.
1. Remove the connector cover [A], rear cover [B] (4 screws), and left cover [C] (4
screws).
2. Remove the cutout [D] in the left cover.
3. Remove the HDD [E] (4 screws, 2 connectors).
4. Remove the bracket [F] (1 screw).
5. Remove the plate [G] from the expansion box (4 screws).
6. Connect the cable [H] to the expansion box [I], then install the expansion box (4
Scanner
B359
screws).
Kit
7. Reinstall the HDD.
SM 8-7 B359
8. Reinstall the left, rear, and connector covers.
[C]
[A]
B359I503.WMF
[D]
[B]
B359I510.WMF
[E]
B359I601.WMF
Scanner Controller Installation

NOTE: If either the Scanner Option Type 450e or Fax Option Type 450e has been
installed, perform step 9. If neither have been installed, skip step 9.
9. Remove plate [A] (4 screws).
10. Attach the guide plate [B] to the scanner controller board (3 screws).
11. Short TB4 [C] on the scanner board with the jumper [D].
12. If requested by the customer, install the optional SIMM memory [E] on the
scanner board.
B359 8-8 SM
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
B359I509.WMF
B359I512.WMF
[I] [J]
[H] Copy
Sc
an
[F]
ne
r
Printer/Scanner
[G]
B359I511.WMF B359I513.WMF
13. Install the scanner controller board [A] in the third slot from the right of the
expansion box [B].
If the ISDN Option Type 450 has not been installed, skip steps 14 through 16.
14. Slide out the ISDN board [C].
15. Thread the ISDN modular cable [D] through the opening [E] in the scanner
board, as shown.
16. Insert the scanner board and ISDN board into the expansion box at the same
time.
17. Remove the cutout [F] in the plate [G] and file down any sharp edges. Reinstall
the plate.
18. Remove the bottom cap [H] of the operation panel.
NOTE: If both Printer Controller Type 450e and Fax Option Type 450e have
not been installed, also remove the top cap of the operation panel.
19. Install the Printer key [I] on the operation panel and attach the Scanner label
Scanner
[J] to the Printer key as shown.

B359
Kit
NOTE: If both Scanner Option Type 450e and Fax Option Type 450e have not
been installed, install the Copy key on the operation panel as well (see
the illustration).
SM 8-9 B359
[A]
B359I514.WMF
20. Turn the machine on. If SC4003 occurs, perform the following procedure to
clear the SC condition:
NOTE: SC4003 indicates that the battery is worn out. Even if TB4 has been
shorted with the jumper, the battery level will be low the first time the
machine is turned on after the scanner controller board is installed.
This SC condition will not occur about 30 minutes after TB4 has been
shorted.
1) Enter SP mode ( → → → → F), pressing F for more than 3
seconds.
2) Select 4 (Scanner SP mode).
3) Press the Next button 4 times to access SP005 (Error Log Indication).
4) Exit the SP mode.
5) Turn the machine off and on. If SC4003 still occurs, check the jumper
position.
21. Make sure that the parallel cable is not connected to the printer controller and
check the setting of the following copier SP mode (enter SP mode and select
1):
• SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting – select the
correct one.
22. Attach the core [A] to the STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable, then connect the
cable to the scanner controller.
NOTE: The STP cord should be coiled twice inside the core as shown.
23. If the customer wishes to use the machine as a delivery fax, perform the
following.
1) Install the Fax Option Type 450e (A874) and PC Fax Expander (B368).
2) Enter the Fax SP mode and check that bit 0 of System Switch 1C is at “1”.
3) Set bit 6 of System Switch 1F to “1”.
4) Set bits 0 and 1 of User Parameter Switch 31 to “1” depending on the
delivery fax function (refer to the ScanRouter Professional Operation
Instructions Scanner & Fax Reference Type 450e for more detail).
B359 8-10 SM
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4. SERVICE TABLE
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM ACCESS PROCEDURE
The service program access procedure, such as “Entering Service Program (SP)
Mode” and “Exiting SP Mode” is the same as for copier and fax, as follows.
Entering SP mode
# → → → → F (hold it for more than 3 seconds.)
Exiting SP mode
Press the “Back” and “Exit” keys until the standby mode display appears.
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
NOTE: 1) In the Function column, comments are in italics.

2) In the Settings column, the default value is in bold letters.
No. Function Setting

001 FTP Port Number Changes the FTP port number. 00000 ~ 65536
After changing this value, do the 1/step
following: 3670
1. Run the Registry Editor.
2. Access
/HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOF
TWARE/Ricoh/NetworkScanner
3. Change the value of PortNo to
this SP mode’s value.
002 Compression Type Selects the compression type for 1: MH
binary picture processing. 2: MR
3: MMR
003 Software Version Displays the software version.
004 Program Number Displays the program’s part
number.
005 Error Log Display Displays the error logging data
Check this data when SC4005
occurs. Then inform it to the
service center.
006 Scan Data Reset Resets all scanner data (UP and
SP modes) except for the network
interface data (UP-Network-1 ~ 8)
Scanner
B359
Kit
Press “1” three times to reset.

007 All Data Reset Resets all UP and SP settings
SM 8-11 B359
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE Rev. 09/2000
No. Function Setting

008 NIC Data Reset Resets all network interface data
(UP-Network-1 ~ 8)
009 Density Adjustment 1 Adjusts the image density for each 0 ~ 255
image density level which can be 1/step
selected with UP mode (UP-Scan- 40
010 Density Adjustment 2 Density) 0 ~ 255
1/step
70
011 Density Adjustment 3 0 ~ 255
1/step
100
1/step
130
1/step
160
1/step
190
1/step
220
016 ROM Disk Format Initializes the flash ROM.
Press “1” three times to initialize.
⇒ 017 Trimming Adjusts the scanning margins for 0~5
both main and sub-scan directions. 1 mm/step
The larger the value, the wider the 0
margin
B359 8-12 SM
DOWNLOADING NEW SOFTWARE
4.2 DOWNLOADING NEW SOFTWARE

4.2.1 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURE
The software for the scanner controller contains the system software, application
software, and network interface software. The new software can be downloaded
from a flash memory card.
[B]
[A]
B359M500.WMF
1. Prepare a flash memory card that has been programmed with the latest
software.
2. Turn off the machine and disconnect the Ethernet (STP) cable from the
scanner controller.
3. Remove the cover [A], and insert the flash memory card [B] into the slot so that
the “A” side of the card faces the front of the machine.
4. Turn the machine on and press the Scanner Mode key.
5. Press the INSTALL key on the display in reply to the message. Software
download will take several minutes.
6. Make sure that the machine displays the scanner SP mode, then after new
software has been downloaded successfully, turn off the machine, remove the
card, connect the Ethernet cable, and turn the machine back on.
Scanner
B359
Kit
SM 8-13 B359
DOWNLOADING NEW SOFTWARE
4.2.2 ERROR MESSAGES DURING THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

If downloading failed, one of the following error messages appears. At this time,
press the “CONFIRM” bottom in the display to re-try the download.
Message Action
SYS Erasing Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX Re-try the download. If the download fails
SYS Writing Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX again, replace the scanner controller.
SYS Verify Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX
APL Erasing Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX
APL Writing Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX
APL Verify Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX
NIC board is not equipped
NIC Initialization failed. CODE:XXXX
NIC Download mode is disable
NIC Writing Failed ADDR:XXXXXXXX
NIC Host Service Error CODE:XXXX Re-try the download. If the download fails
again, replace the scanner controller.
Check whether the STP cable is
disconnected. If it is connected, disconnect
the cable and re-try the downloading.
B359 8-14 SM
PRECAUTION

5.1 PRECAUTION
CAUTION
Lithium Battery
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
5.2 NOTE FOR REPLACING THE SCANNER

CONTROLLER BOARD
The scanner controller does not have a configuration report and cannot
upload/download settings to an IC card. So, before replacing the scanner controller
board, check all UP mode and SP mode settings. After replacing the board, re-
input these settings.
Scanner
B359
Kit
SM 8-15 B359
SERVICE CALL CONDITION
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITION
The scanner controller board automatically performs the self diagnostics whenever
the main power switch is turned on. If an error is detected, it displays an error
message on the LCD. Turn the main switch off and on to reset the SC condition.
6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC code Error Items Conditions Action
DRAM Error • SIMM defective Replace or re-install the
• A SIMM type other than SIMM
16MB or 32MB SIMM is
SC4001
installed
• Standard SRAM Replace the scanner
defective controller board
Flash ROM The machine cannot scan Defective firmware; try to
Error download the software. If
SC4002
the download fails, replace
the scanner controller.
Battery Error • The battery has run out Replace the scanner
controller board
SC4003
• The jumper TB4 is at the Change the jumper position
off position
NIC Error NIC circuit defective Replace the scanner
SC4004
controller board
Application Logical error Turn the main switch off
Error and on, check the error log
SC4005
data (SP005), then inform it
to the service center.
B359 8-16 SM
LEDS
6.2 LEDS
B359T500.WMF
LED No. Color Status Condition

Lit The network interface circuit is working properly.
LED1 Yellow
Off The network interface circuit does not work.
The scanner controller board is connected to the
Lit
network properly.
LED2 Green
The scanner controller board is not connected to the
Off
network.
Lit 100 Base-TX
LED3 Green
Off 10 Base-T
Lit + 5V is supplied
Off + 5V is not supplied
LED5 Red
Communication error between the scanner controller
Blinking
board and BICU.
Scanner
B359
Kit
SM 8-17 B359
FIRMWARE HISTORY Rev. 11/2002
⇒6.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY

6.3.1 B359 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
B359 SCANNER OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

FIRMWARE SERIAL FIRMWARE
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION
LEVEL NUMBER VERSION
• 1st Mass Production A8775810 E 1st Mass 3.0.1
Production
• The firmware was modified so that it can A8775810 F February 2000 4.0.0
be used with the scanner controller for Production
A283/A284
• The machine sometimes scans part of the

exposure glass scale and edge of the
original. To prevent this, a new scanner
SP mode has been added (SP017,
Trimming Margin Adjustment).
• Note: After installing the firmware,

Scanner SP006 (Scan Data Reset) must
be performed.
• The machine stalls when the memory full
condition is reached.
• When Scanner Auto Clear is enabled: A8775810 G March 2000 4.0.3
If an ADF jam occurs during a scanning Production
job initiated before the Scanner Auto
Clear timer expires, the scanner settings
are reset to default.
• Improvement: A8775810 H November 2000 4.0.4
An MTF filter is used in Text Mode to Production
improve the quality of the scanned
image.
B359 8-18 SM
FAX UNIT
A874
This manual explains the fax unit, as well as the following.

Y EXFUNC board - Fax Function Expander (Machine Code: A892)
Y Handset (Machine Code: A646)
Y PCFE board - PC Fax Expander (Machine Code: B368)
Y ISDN kit (Machine Code: A816)
Y Stamp (Machine Code: A813)
Y (EXMEM board – Expansion Memory)
Lithium Batteries
CAUTION
The danger of explosion exists if batteries on the FCU and EXFUNC boards
are incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Information
Overall
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Type Memory Capacity
Desktop type transceiver
ECM: 128 Kbytes
Circuit
SAF:
PSTN, PABX, ISDN
Standard: 2 Mbytes (160 pages)
Connection
With optional memory board (EXFUNC +
Direct couple
EXMEM) :
Original Size (Book) 30 Mbytes (3000 pages)
Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
(Slerexe letter)
Original Size (ADF)
Compression
Length: 128 – 432 mm [5.0 – 47.2 ins]
MH, MR, MMR
Width: 105 – 297 mm [4.1 – 11.7 ins]
JBIG (EXFUNC is required)
Thickness: 40 – 128 g/m2 [10 – 34 lbs]
(MMR only with ECM and G4)
Scanning Method SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and/or
Flat bed, with CCD raw data
Scan Width Protocol
210 mm [8.3 ins] ± 1% (A4) Group 3 with ECM
216 mm [8.5 ins] ± 1% (8.5" x 11") Group 4 (ISDN unit required)
256 mm [10.1 ins] ± 1% (B4) Modulation
279 mm [11.0 ins] ± 1% (11" x 17") V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),
297 mm [11.7 ins] ± 1% (A3) V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)
Resolutions Data Rate (bps)
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (G3 only) G3:
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (G3 only) 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
8 x 15.4 lines/mm (G3 only) 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800
16 x 15.4 lines/mm (G3 only) /2400, Automatic fallback
200 x 100 dpi G4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps
200 x 200 dpi
400 x 400 dpi I/O Rate
With ECM: 0 ms/line
Note: Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
To use the 8 x 15.4 lines/mm, 16 x 15.4
lines/mm and 400 x 400 dpi resolutions, an Transmission Time
optional EXMEM board is required. G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3
ECM using memory for an ITU-T #1 test
document (Slerexe letter) at 8 x 3.85 l/mm
resolution
G4 (option): 3 s at 64 kbps; Measured with
an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter)
at 200 x 200 dpi resolution
SM 1-1 A874
FEATURES
1.2 FEATURES
1.2.1 FEATURES LIST
KEY: Communication Features - User
O = Used, X = Not Used, Selectable
A = Optional EXMEM board required 90° Image Rotation before tx O
B = Optional EXFUNC board required Action as a transfer X
C = Optional PCFE board required broadcaster
D = Optional ISDN unit required AI Redial (last ten numbers) O
E = Optional STAMP unit required Answering machine interface X
Authorized Reception O
Auto Document O
Video Processing Features Automatic dialing O
Automatic image density O (pulse or DTMF)
selection Automatic Voice Message X
Contrast O Batch Transmission O
Halftone O Book Original tx O
(Basic & Error Diffusion)
Broadcasting O
JBIG compression B
Chain Dialing O
MTF O
Communication Record Display O
Reduction before tx O
Confidential ID Override O
Scanning Resolution – O
Confidential Reception O
Standard
Confidential Transmission O
Scanning Resolution – Detail O
Create Margin Transmission O
Scanning Resolution – Fine A
Direct Fax Number Entry O
Scanning Resolution – A
Superfine Economy Transmission O
Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpi O Fax on demand X
when printing Forwarding O
Free Polling O
Groups (Standard: 9 groups) O
Communication Features – Hold X
Automatic ID Transmission O
Automatic fallback O Immediate Redialing O
Automatic redialing O Immediate Transmission O
(Memory tx only)
ISDN D
Dual Access O
Keystroke Programs O
Length Reduction O
Memory transmission O
Resolutions available for
Multi-step Transfer O
reception
Detail O Non-standard original size O
Fine A transmission
Superfine A OMR X
Substitute reception O On Hook Dial O
V34 communication O Ordering Toner X
Page Count O
Page separation mark O
Parallel memory transmission O
A874 1-2 SM
FEATURES
Communication Features - User Communication Features -
Information
Selectable Service Selectable
Overall
Partial Image Area Scanning X Protection against wrong O
Personal Codes O connection
Polling Reception O Short Preamble X
Polling Transmission O
Polling tx file lifetime in the SAF O
Other User Features
Quick Dial O
(Standard: 56 stations) Area code prefix X
Reception modes (Fax, Tel) O Center mark O
Remote control features X Checkered mark O
Remote Transfer X Clearing a memory file O
Restricted Access O Clearing a polling file O
Secured Polling O Clock O
Secured Polling with Stored ID O Confidential ID O
Override Counters O
Send Later O Daylight Saving Time O
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID O Destination Check X
Silent ringing detection X Direct entry of names O
Specified Image area X Energy Saver O
Speed Dial O File Retention Time O
(Standard: 100 stations) File Retransmission O
Stamp E Function Programs (F1 – F5) O
Telephone Directory O Hard Disk Filing System X
Tonal Signal Transmission O ID Code O
Transfer Request O Label Insertion ("To xxx") O
Transmission Deadline (TRD) X Language Selection SP
Turnaround Polling X mode
Two in one O Memory Lock O
Voice Request X Modifying a memory file (tx) O
(immed. tx only) Multi Sort Document Reception X
Own telephone number O
Print density control X
Communication Features - RDS on/off O
Service Selectable Reception Mode Switching X
AI Short Protocol O Timer
Auto-reduction override option O Reception time printing O
Busy tone detection O Remaining memory indicator O
Cable Equalizer O Reverse Order Printing O
Closed Network O RTI, TTI, CSI O
Continuous Polling Reception O Service Report Transmission O
Dedicated tx parameters O Speaker volume control O
ECM O Specified Cassette Selection O
EFC X Substitute reception on/off O
Inch-mm conversion before tx O Telephone line type O
Length Reduction O Toner Saving Mode X
Page retransmission times O TTI/CIL on/off O
SM 1-3 A874
FEATURES
Other User Features Service Mode Features

User Function Keys (5 keys) O Country code O
User Parameters O DTMF tone test O
Wild Cards O Echo countermeasure O
Effective term of service calls O
Error code display O
Reports - Automatic Excessive jam alarm O
Charge Control Report X File Transfer (all files) O
Communication Failure Report O LCD contrast adjustment SP
Confidential File Report O mode
Error Report O Line error mark O
Fax On Demand Report X Memory file printout (all files) O
File Clear Report O Modem Software Download X
File Reserve Report O Modem test (includeV.34 / V.8) O
Journal O NCU parameters O
Polling Result Report O Periodic service call O
Power Failure Report O PM Call O
Transfer Result Report O Printing all communication O
Transmission Result Report O records kept in memory
Protocol dump list O
RAM display/rewrite O
Reports - User-initiated
RAM dump O
Authorized Reception List O
RAM test O
Charge Control Report X
RDS
File List O - RAM read/write O
Forwarding List O - Dial data transfer O
Group List O (Quick/Speed)
Hard Disk File List X - Software transfer O
Journal O Ringer test O
Personal Code List O ROM version display (FCU) SP
Program List O mode
Quick Dial Label O Serial number O
Quick Dial List O Service monitor report O
Specified Cassette Selection X Service station number O
List Software Upload/Download O
Speed Dial List O SRAM data backup/restore O
Transmission Status Report X System parameter list O
User Function List X Technical data on the Journal O
User Parameter List O
Service Mode Features

Back-to-back test X
Bit switch programming O
Cable equalizer O
Comm. parameter display O
Counter check SP
mode
A874 1-4 SM
FEATURES
1.2.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
Information
Overall
The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item will
change after the optional function upgrade card is installed.
With optional boards

Item Standard
(EXFUNC + EXMEM)
Maximum number of memory files 200 1000
Maximum number of destinations
256 500
per file
300 2000
overall
Maximum number of pages overall 400 3000
Number of Quick Dials 56 56
Number of Speed Dials 100 1000
Number of Groups 9 30
256 500
per Group
100 1000
dialed from the ten-key pad overall
Maximum number of programs 56 56
(programmed in 56 (programmed in 56
Quick Dial keys) Quick Dial keys)
Maximum number of Auto 6 18
Documents (programmed in 6 (programmed in 18
Quick Dial keys) Quick Dial keys)
Maximum number of communication
records for the Journal stored in the 100 900
memory
Maximum number of addresses
specified for features such as
30 50
Authorized Reception and Specified
Cassette Selection
Maximum number of user function
5 5
keys
Maximum number of personal codes 20 50
SM 1-5 A874
OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL
1.3 OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

1.3.1 SYSTEM CONTROL
ISDN
FCU
SRAM Flash ROM
(128kB) (3MB)
CPU BUS
FACE
V.34 MODEM
CPU (RU30) DCR VIF BiCU
Analog Circuit
DMA BUS
DRAM
NCU
(8MB)
Monitor
Speaker EXFUNC EXMEM
Board Board
(512kB) (32MB)
Bus Interface
Parallel Interface
A874V500.WMF
A874 1-6 SM
OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an NCU.
Information
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with
Overall
the base copier's main board, the BiCU. The NCU switches the analog line
between the fax unit and the external telephone.
Fax Options
1. EXFUNC board: JBIG compression becomes available. In addition, this
expands the system's SRAM capacity to hold programmed telephone numbers,
communication records, etc.
2. PC fax expander: Class 2 fax communication from a PC and local printing from
a PC fax application become available (PC fax application required). Also, local
scanning from the machine’s scanner using TWAIN API becomes available
(CFM Twain driver required).
3. ISDN unit: This allows the fax unit to communicate over an ISDN (Integrated
Services Digital Network) line.
4. EXMEM board: This expands the SAF memory capacity. Also, this expands the
page memory capacity to enable 400 dpi communications.)
1.3.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL

The FCU power is supplied from the base copier's BiCU (+24V, +12V, -12V, and
+5V). Refer to the base copier's service manual for details.
1.3.3 MEMORY BACK-UP

The system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM on the FCU and the
EXFUNC board are backed up by batteries (long-term backup), in case the base
copier's main switch is turned off.
The SAF memory (DRAM) on the FCU and the EXMEM board are backed up by
rechargeable batteries for 1 hour.
SM 1-7 A874
VIDEO DATA PATH
1.4 VIDEO DATA PATH

1.4.1 TRANSMISSION
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Immediate Tx
Memory Tx Auto Shading
Auto Shading Gamma Correction
Gamma Correction MTF
MTF Graduation Processing
Graduation Processing
BiCU Main Scan Reduction
Main Scan Reduction - 400 to 200 dpi
- 400 to 200 dpi - Inch-mm Conversion
Thresholding - A3 to B4, A3 to A4, B4 to A4
Thresholding
FACE
(VIF)
Memory Tx
Memory Tx
without image Immediate Tx
with Image Rotation
rotation
FACE FACE
FACE
(DCMMR)
Page Memory
Page Memory
(Rotation)
FACE FACE
(DCMMR) (DCR)
Compression
SAF Memory
Decompression JBIG
Compression Compression
(Main Scan Reduction)
EXFUNC board
FACE
QM-CODER
(DCR)
(Optional)
Modem
FCU
NCU CiG4 CiG4
Analog G3 ISDN G3 ISDN G4
A874V501.WMF
A874 1-8 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission
Information
Overall
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch
format. The BiCU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BiCU uses the MTF and thresholding
parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR
or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the
image is rotated in page memory before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-
compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. Either the NCU
or CiG4 (optional) transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the
receiving terminal. The BiCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the BiCU uses the MTF and thresholding
parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for
transmission. Either the NCU or CiG4 (optional) transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
• Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the FACE (DCR) to the EXFUNC board for JBIG compression. Then either
the NCU or CiG4 (ISDN G3) transmits the data to the line.
• Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes
from the page memory to the EXFUNC board for JBIG compression. Then either
the NCU or CiG4 (ISDN G3) transmits the data to the line.
Adjustments
• Line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN or ISDN): System switch 0A bit 6
SM 1-9 A874
VIDEO DATA PATH
1.4.2 RECEPTION
Analog G3 ISDN G3 ISDN G4
NCU CiG4 CiG4
FCU
Modem
SAF Memory
EXFUNC Board
FACE QM-CODER FACE
Decompression
(DCR) (Optional) (DCR)
Image Rotation
Page Memory Error Check
JBIG
compression
FACE
(VIF)
BiCU
Printer
A874V502.WMF
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line or an ISDN line
to the SAF memory. (The data goes to the FACE at the same time, and is checked
for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image
rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is
transferred to the BiCU.
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN, the data is sent to the
EXFUNC board for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory,
and transferred to the BiCU.
A874 1-10 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
1.4.3 PC FAX COMMUNICATION
Information
Overall
Direct transmission
FCU
SAF
DCR
DIU Modem NCU
IBM Compatible
A895V503.WMF
The host computer sends commands and image data to the machine through the
DIU during transmission.
NOTE: 1) Group dials programmed in the machine cannot be used.
2) T.30 optional protocols (e.g., BFT) are not supported by class 2 fax
communication.
3) ISDN G4 numbers programmed in quick or speed dials cannot be used.
4) If ISDN is selected for G3 communication (system switch 0A, bit 6), the
G3 numbers must have been programmed in quick or speed dials.
Memory transmission
FCU
SAF
DCR
DIU Modem NCU
IBM Compatible
A895V504.WMF
The host computer sends destination number(s) and image data to the machine
through the DIU during transmission. The machine stores the image in the SAF
memory, then makes a fax transmission.
NOTE: 1) If the memory overflows while storing the first page into SAF memory,
the machine does not start the transmission.
2) If the memory overflows while storing the second or subsequent page
into SAF memory, the machine transmits all the successfully stored
pages.
3) When fax numbers programmed in the machine’s quick or speed dials
are specified using the PC fax application, all the specified numbers
must have been programmed in the fax machine.
4) T.30 optional protocols (e.g., BFT) are not supported by class 2 fax
communication.
SM 1-11 A874
VIDEO DATA PATH
Direct reception
FCU
SAF
DCR
DIU Modem NCU
IBM Compatible
A895V505.WMF
The machine transfers received image data directly to the host PC without storing it
into SAF memory.
NOTE: 1) If the host PC is not ready to receive a fax message, the machine
receives the message into SAF memory.
2) Even if the SAF memory is full, the machine starts fax reception.
However, the machine will not continue reception if the host computer is
not ready to receive a message.
3) The “Number of rings to answer” parameter in the PC fax application
must not exceed 4.
Memory reception
FCU
SAF
DCR
DIU Modem NCU
IBM Compatible
A895V506.WMF
The machine receives a fax message in the SAF memory, then transfers data to
the host computer after the reception has finished. The machine prints the received
message after transferring data to the host if user parameter 21 – bits 1 and 2 are
set to “1: Print”.
NOTE: 1) If an error occurs due to cable disconnection, the PC fax application
must be restarted to receive the message.
2) Memory reception is not possible when forwarding is enabled.
3) Manual reception from the PC fax application is not supported.
4) The “Number of rings to answer” parameter in the PC fax application
must not exceed 4.
Adjustments
• PC transmission mode (direct or memory): User parameter 20 (14H), bit 0
• Line for PC memory transmission (PSTN/ISDN G4): User parameter 20 (14H),
bit 5
• PC fax reception mode (direct/memory): User parameter 21 (15H), bits 1 and 2
A874 1-12 SM
VIDEO DATA PATH
1.4.4 SCANNING AND PRINTING
Information
Overall
SCANNING
Scanner
Application
FCU
Page Memory
Twain Driver
Serial Port DIU DCR
IBM Compatible
A895V507.WMF
The machine scans an original into page memory, then transfers the data to the
host PC. The data is sent to the application through the CFM Twain driver.
NOTE: The maximum resolution is 200 x 200 dpi.
PRINTING
Printer Engine
FCU
Page Memory
DIU DCR SAF
IBM Compatible
A895V508.WMF
The machine receives print data into SAF memory as fax image data, then prints it
after all the data has been transferred from the host PC.
The destination number “0000” informed from the host PC identifies a print job.
NOTE: 1) If SAF memory runs out while receiving print data, the machine prints up
to the successfully received data.
2) The machine cannot receive print data while printing a message from
the SAF memory. The data will be received after printing.
3) If a fax destination is specified together with the print destination “0000”,
the destinations specified after “0000” will be delayed until the machine
prints all pages in the message.
SM 1-13 A874
AUTOMATIC SERVICE CALLS
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 AUTOMATIC SERVICE CALLS
2.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
The fax unit makes an automatic service call when the base copier’s BiCU
Descriptions
generates any SC code except for those stored in the following RAM.
Detailed
NOTE: The service station’s fax number has to be programmed in advance, or the
machine cannot make a service call.
Exceptions
Address (H) Definition Default SC code
680DC8 1st SC code - High byte (BCD) 03 329
1st SC code - Low byte (BCD) Laser beam pitch
680DC9 29 adjustment error
680DCA 2nd SC code - High byte (BCD) 03 361
680DCB 2nd SC code - Low byte (BCD) 61 Hard disk drive error 2
680DCC 3rd SC code - High byte (BCD) 03 365
3rd SC code - Low byte (BCD) Image storage address
680DCD 65 error
680DCE 4th SC code - High byte (BCD) 05 548
4th SC code - Low byte (BCD) Fusing unit installation
680DCF 48 error
680DD0 5th SC code - High byte (BCD) 06 630
5th SC code - Low byte (BCD) CSS communication error
680DD1 30 Japan only
680DD2 6th SC code - High byte (BCD) 09 9AA
680DD3 6th SC code - Low byte (BCD) AA From 900 to 999
680DD4 7th SC code - High byte (BCD)
to to Not Programmed
FF(H)
680DEF 20th SC code - Low byte (BCD)
To add additional SC codes, program them in the blank addresses.

Wild Cards
This function allows “A” or “a”, to be used as a wild card instead of numbers from 0
to 9. For example, “1AA” or “1aa” means all the SC codes from 100 to 199, and
“39A” or “39a” means all the SC codes from 390 to 399.
The fax unit cannot make an automatic service call when a Fax SC code condition
has occurred. Refer to the Troubleshooting section for Fax SC code details.
Manual Service Call
If the service station needs a report, the user can make a service call manually, by
changing bit 7 of User Parameter 14 (0E) to “1”.
SM 2-1 A874
A sample auto service report
* * * Auto Service Report (Date and Time) * * *
Problem Reason of the call - "SC Code" or "PM Call"

S C Latest 10 copier's SC codes
J A M BJ A M 2FEED 0000000000
Total print counter
Paper Feed Station
Jam Location
Service Monitor Report Contents
System Parameter List Contents
A874D500.WMF
A874 2-2 SM
2.1.2 PERIODIC SERVICE CALL

The periodic service call notifies the service station of the machine’s condition. The
call is made at a time interval programmed in the following RAM addresses:
Parameters Address (H)

Call interval: 01 through 15 months (BCD)
6803A1
Descriptions
00: Periodic service call disabled
Detailed
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD) 6803A4
Date and time of the next call
Hour: 01 through 24 (BCD) 6803A5
To change these settings after programming, change the call interval. The machine
then automatically changes the remaining parameters by referring to the interval
and the current date and time.
2.1.3 PM CALL
If PM alarm is enabled with the base copier’s SP mode and PM call is enabled with
system switch 01, the machine will make an automatic service call when the base
copier’s PM counter reaches the PM interval.
Cross reference
• PM service call on/off: System switch 01, bit 0
• PM alarm setting: SP mode 5-501 (default: 150K)
2.1.4 EFFECTIVE TERM OF SERVICE CALLS

If a time limit for the effectiveness of service calls is programmed, the machine
stops making automatic service calls after the time limit.
Program the time limit at the following addresses. This function is disabled when all
of these addresses are 00(H).

Year: last two digits of the year (BCD) 6803AB
Month: 01 through 12 (BCD) 6803AC
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD) 6803AD
SM 2-3 A874
SCANNING FEATURES
2.2 SCANNING FEATURES

2.2.1 CREATE MARGIN TRANSMISSION
R R
Original Transmitted Image : Margin
A874D501.WMF
When this function is enabled, the scanner is able to reduce the image of the
original. This allows the person at the other end to file the printout without losing
any of the data to punch holes.
The machine adds a margin to the bottom and left borders of the image so that the
transmitted page is the same size as the original.
Cross reference
• Reduction ratio - System switch 06 bits 0 to 7
Default setting is 93% (71 to 99%)
NOTE: 1) This function is only possible during memory transmission.

2) “Create margin transmission” and “Image rotation before transmission”
are not compatible. (Create margin transmission is given priority)
3) The sample image on reports is also reduced and contains the margin.
4) Both the main and sub scan directions use the same magnification ratio.
A874 2-4 SM
PRINTING FEATURES
2.3 PRINTING FEATURES

2.3.1 REDUCTION FOR JOURNAL PRINTING
The machine reduces the size of the journal and adds a margin to the bottom and
left edges of the journal.
This function allows the customer to add punch holes without losing any part of the
Descriptions
image.
Detailed
Cross Reference
• Reduction for journal printing on/off - Printer switch 07 bit 0
Default setting is 0 (Disabled)
2.3.2 JOURNAL LINE TYPE SORT PRINTING

When an optional G4 unit is installed, the machine can print the journal arranged
by type of fax line.
Cross Reference
• Journal arrangement by fax line on/off - User parameter switch 19 (13H) bit 1
Default setting is 0 (Disabled)
SM 2-5 A874
PRINTING FEATURES
2.3.3 PRINTING LISTS & REPORTS ON A5/HLT SIZE PAPER

This function allows the customer to print lists & reports on A5/HLT size paper
under the following conditions.
Conditions:
• User parameter switch 19 (13H) bit 5 = 1 (enables the function)
• There is A5/HLT size paper in the machine
• No more than 58 lines on the list/report
• The report/list is only one page (not multi-page)
NOTE: Under these conditions, the following lists/reports will be printed out on
A5/HLT size paper.
• Auto Document List • Polling RX Result Report

( Communication Failure Report ( Polling Transmission Clear Report
• Confidential file Report • Power Failure Report
• Error Report • Quick Dial List
• Group Dial List • Sender/Authorized Reception List
• Immediate TX Result Report • Sender/Forwarding List
• Keystroke Program List • Specified Sender List
( Memory Storage Report • Speed Dial List
( Memory TX Result Report ( Transfer Result Report
• Personal Code List • TX File List
• Poling RX Reserve Report
( : When printing these 5 reports, A5/HLT cannot be used if a sample of the image
is included in the report (user parameter switch 04 bit 7).
A874 2-6 SM
PRINTING FEATURES
2.3.4 REDUCTION OF THE SAMPLE IMAGE ON REPORTS

This function reduces the sample image on reports to 50%.
Cross Reference
• Reduction of sample image on reports on/off - User parameter switch 19 (13H)
Descriptions
bit 4
Detailed
The default setting is 1 (Enabled)
NOTE: When the value of user parameter switch 19 (13H) bit 4 is 0, the machine
uses the setting of printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4
Printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4
Bit 4 Bit 3 Settings
0 0 The upper half only, no reduction
0 1 50% reduction in sub scan only
1 0 Same size (no reduction, output separated in to two pages)
1 1 Not used
The diagram shows the protocol used by this model acting as the transmitting
terminal.
SM 2-7 A874
LINE TYPE CHANGE
2.4 LINE TYPE CHANGE

When the machine is initially used only with the PSTN, the line type programmed
with phone numbers in Quick Dials and Speed Dials is stored as PSTN G3.
Later, if the line connection is changed so that G3 is to be used only with the ISDN,
the communication port for all stored Quick and Speed Dials must be changed to
ISDN G3.
This feature allows the communication mode and port to be changed for all stored
numbers at once.
Procedure:
1) Change the data in the following RAM addresses.
68E8E4 (H) - Current line type setting.
68E8E5(H) – New line type setting.
NOTE: The default setting for the above addresses are FF(H).
2) Turn the main switch off and on.
Then, the machine checks all phone numbers stored in Quick Dials, Speed
Dials, AI Redial, and Forwarding Stations. If the communication mode and
the port setting for a number is the same as specified for the “current setting”
in the above address, the machine changes these to the “new setting”.
3) After this procedure, the data programmed automatically returns to FF(H).
Setting:
These settings can be used only when an optional G3 and/or G4 unit is installed in
the machine.
Bit 0 and 1: Communication mode
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 G3
0 1 G4
Other settings - Not used
Bit 2 to 4: Communication port
Bit 4 3 2 Setting
0 0 0 PSTN
0 1 1 ISDN
Bit 5 to 7: Not used
Allowable settings are as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
00H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G3 (PSTN)
0DH 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 G4 (ISDN)
Example:
If you wish to change the port setting from PSTN to ISDN,
1. Change the data in address 68E8E4(H) to 00(H) (0000 0000)
2. Change the data in address 68E8E5(H) to 0D(H) (00001101)
A874 2-8 SM
LINE TYPE CHANGE
NOTE: 1) Do not use this procedure if there are any files stored in the memory
awaiting transmission.
2) Quick/Speed Dial addresses containing an F-code (i.e., for
communications that will use SEP/SUB/PWD/SID) cannot be converted
to ISDN G4.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 2-9 A874
PCBS
2.5 PCBS
2.5.1 FCU
ISDN
FCU
SRAM Flash ROM
(128 kB) (3 MB)
CPU BUS
FACE
V.34 MODEM
CPU (RU30) DCR VIF BiCU
Analog Circuit
DMA BUS
DRAM
NCU
(8 MB)
EXFUNC EXMEM
Monitor
Board Board Bus Interface
Speaker
(512 kB) (32 MB) Parallel Interface
A874D502.WMF
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface
to the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.
A874 2-10 SM
PCBS
FACE (Fax Application Control Engine)

• CPU
• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
• DMA control
• Clock generation
• DRAM backup control
Descriptions
• Ringing signal/tone detection
Detailed
• Video and command interface to the BiCU (VIF)
Modem (Rockwell R288F)

• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
ROM
• 3MB (16 Mbit) flash ROM for system software storage
DRAM
• The 8 MB of DRAM is shared between SAF memory, ECM buffer, page
memory, working memory, line buffer, and so on.
• The SAF memory (2MB) is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
SRAM
• The 128 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a
lithium battery.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off
SW2 Reset switch, to reboot the FCU board
Determines which firmware the machine boots from. If the switch is OFF,
SW3 the firmware on the FCU inside the machine is used. If the switch is ON, the
firmware on the flash memory card or external FCU is used.
SM 2-11 A874
PCBS
2.5.2 NCU (US)
JP7
Surge OHDI SW.

TIP Protection DB1
TRXD
Noise CML
Over- Filter Relay L-
RING current DC Loop Transformer
Protection Surge
Protection
JP8
Current
Sensor
NCU OHDISW
CMLSW
Hook0
Hook1
ExRing
T1 Ring
Noise Detection
Filter Circuit
T2
A874D503.WMF
Jumpers
Item Description
JP7 These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is connected to a dry
JP8 line.
DB1 Also remove DB1 when the machine is connected to a dry line.
A874 2-12 SM
PCBS
2.5.3 EXFUNC BOARD
EXFUNC BOARD
SRAM QM-CODER_1 QM-CODER_2
Descriptions
Detailed
FCU Interfac e
DMA BUS
PAL_1
PAL_2
A874D505.WMF
The EXFUNC board allows JBIG compression and some additional features
become available. In addition, this board expands the SRAM capacity.
QM Coder
• 2 QM coders for JBIG compression and decompression.
PAL (PALCE16V8H-15PC)
• 2 PALs make a strobe control signal. This is used for DMA selection.
SRAM
• 512KB SRAM for telephone numbers and other user parameters.
Lithium battery
• Backs up the SRAM.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the backup battery on/off
SM 2-13 A874
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1.1 FAX UNIT
NOTE: To install the fax unit, the Expansion Box Type 450e is required.
The following procedure is written on the premise that the Expansion Box
has not been installed.
[C] [F]
[D] [E]
Installation
[A]
[B]
A874I001.WMF
A874I503.WMF
[I]
[G]
[H]
A693I121.WMF A874I002.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws) and the left side cover [B] (4 screws).
2. Cut away the covers [C] and [D], as shown.
3. Remove the expansion box cover [E], then install the bracket [F] (1 screw) as
shown.
NOTE: The bracket [F] is contained in the fax unit.
4. Remove the bracket [G] as shown.
5. Connect the harness [H] to CN355 on the expansion box, then install the
expansion box [I] (4 screws) so that the CN350 fits in CN304 [L] on the BiCU.
NOTE: Use a magnetic screwdriver so as not to drop any screws inside the
machine.
SM 3-1 A874
[M]
[J]
[L]
[F] [O]
[N]
[K]
[N]
[P]
[K]
A874I502.WMF
6. Set the locking support [J] and the edge saddle [K], then install the
NCU/Speaker assembly [L] (2 screws).
7. Set the modular jacks [M] to the bracket [F] as indicated on the bracket. Then
run the modular cable [N] through the clamp [O] and attach the clamp [O] onto
the machine as shown.
8. Connect the modular cable [N] and the harness [P] to the NCU. Then the
harness [P] must run through the edge saddle [K] as shown.
A874 3-2 SM
[W]
[U] [V]
[S]
[T]
Installation
[R]
[Q]
[a]
[b]
[X]
[Z]
[T]
[Y]
9. Replace the left side cover (4 screws) and the rear cover (4 screws). Then turn
on the battery switch (SW1) on the FCU [Q] then insert it into the right-most slot
of the expansion box. Connect the harnesses [R] to the FCU [Q] (CN328 and
CN330). After that install the bracket [S] (4 screws) as shown.
10. Remove the operation panel [T], then remove parts [U], [V], and [W].
11. Install part [X], then connect the harnesses [Y] and [Z] to the operation panel as
shown.
12. Replace the operation panel [T], then install the parts [a] and [b] as shown.
SM 3-3 A874
[f]
[d]
[c] [e]
A693I516.WMF
[g]
A693I511.WMF
13. Affix the serial number label [c], the LINE/TEL label [d] and the appropriate
approval label [e] on the rear cover. Then install the bracket [f].
14. Affix the Super G3 label [g] on the front cover.
15. Connect the telephone line to the “LINE” jack at the rear of the machine.
16. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
17. Press the ‘Fax’ key and check the facsimile LED lights.
At this time, the display reads: SC1201 - Functional problem with the fax. Data
should be initialized.
NOTE: This is not a functional problem. The machine shows this message only
when the fax unit is first installed. If the same message appears at the
next power-on, check whether the battery switch (SW1) on the FCU
has been turned on.
18. Press “Yes” to initialize the fax unit.
A874 3-4 SM
19. Set up and program the items required for fax communications as shown
below. If the user function keys (F1, F2, F3, F4, and F5) need to be
programmed, affix the blank labels above the proper keys.
The default settings of the user function keys are as follows:

• F1: Start Manual Rx
• F2: TEL Mode
• F3: Tx File Status
• F4: Not programmed
NOTE: Be sure to set the clock (date and time).

20. Program the serial number into the fax unit (service function 10). The serial
Installation
number can be found on the serial number label (attached to the machine in
step 13).
SM 3-5 A874
3.1.2 ISDN UNIT
[B]
[A]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[G]
A816I501.WMF
[E] A816I507.WMF
A816I505.WMF
1. Remove the FCU from the expansion box.

2. Clip the ISDN modular jack [A] to the bracket [B], then connect the cable to the
connector [C] on the CiG4 board [D].
3. Attach the bracket [B] to the CiG4 board [D] (2 screws), then set the metal core
[E] on the cable as shown. Be sure to slide the metal core [E] in between the
bracket and the CiG4 board as shown.
4. Attach the FCU [F] to the bracket (2 screws), then connect FCU and CiG4
using the relay board [G].
A874 3-6 SM
[K]
[J]
[N]
[L]
Installation
[I]
[H]
A816I508.WMF [M]
A816I506.WMF
5. Insert the FCU/CiG4 assembly [H] into the expansion box, connect the harness
[I], and then slide the assembly into the box to the bottom.
6. Open the ISDN modular jack window [J] on the bracket [K], then install the
bracket [K] onto the application rack.
7. Affix the contained ‘G4’ label onto the function key (F4) space.
After G4 unit installation, this key is dedicated to switching between G3 and G4
communication modes. (note the user function key assignment, below)
Function keys with G4 unit
• F1: Start Manual Rx
• F2: Tx File Status
• F3: TEL Mode
• F4: G3/G4 Communication Mode Selection
8. Make two turns on the ISDN cable [L] and attach the metal core [M] so that the
cable goes into the core three times. Then, connect the cable to the ISDN jack
[N]. If an analog telephone line has been removed before installation, re-
connect it to the NCU.
9. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch. Then enter the service mode.
10. Set bit 2 of communication switch 16 to “1.” Then turn the machine off and on.
After that enter the service mode again.
NOTE: This procedure is for A283/A284 models only.
11. Print the system parameter list and ensure that “G4” is listed as an option.
SM 3-7 A874
12. Set up and program the items required for ISDN communications.
After setting up the ISDN parameters, be sure to turn the main switch off and
on.
[E]
[A] [F]
[D]
[B]
[C]
A892I511.WMF
[G]
A892I512.WMF
3.1.3 FAX FUNCTION
CAUTION
Before installing this option, do the following:
1. Print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-
programmed items, and the system parameter list.
2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer
buffer.
3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone
line, and the STP cable.
1. Remove the bracket [A] and disconnect the harness [B] as shown.
2. Remove the FCU assembly [C] as shown.
3. Install the locking support [D].
4. Install the FAX function upgrade board [E].
5. Turn on the battery switch [F].
NOTE: If installing the FAX unit at the same time, be sure to turn on the FCU
board battery switch [G].
6. Re-install the FCU assembly into the expansion box.
A874 3-8 SM

8. Press the “Fax” key and ensure the Fax LED lights.
At this time, the following message appears;
“SC1207 - Adding FAX Feature Expander causes data loss. Turn main power
switch off remove it to avoid loss. To continue press “Yes”.
9. Press “Yes” to initialize the SRAM.
NOTE: Whenever installing the FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE board at the first
time, the machine displays SC1207, but this is not a problem.
10. Enter the service mode, and set bit 7 of system switch 1E to “1”.
11. Print the system parameter list and make sure that “EXFUNC” is listed as an
option. Also check that the memory indicator shows “100%” in standby mode.
Installation
12. Connect the telephone cable to the NCU.
SM 3-9 A874
3.1.4 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 450E
[A]
[G]
[B]
[E]
B368I501.WMF [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[H]
B368I502.WMF
1. Remove the bracket [A] (4 screws) and disconnect the harness [B], then
remove the FCU assembly [C] from the expansion box.
NOTE: If the ISDN unit was already installed, go to “with the ISDN unit” section
on the next page.
• Without the ISDN unit

2. Connect the harness [D] to the DIU [E] (RS232C interface).
NOTE: The white connector must be connected to the DIU board.
3. Attach the bracket [F] enclosed in the PC-Fax Expander to the DIU [E] (2
screws).
4. Attach the FCU [G] to the bracket [F] (2 screws).
5. Connect the harness [D] to the CN326 on the FCU [G] as shown.
NOTE: The blue connector must be connected to the FCU board.
6. Remove 2 hexagonal screws [H] from the DIU [G].
Go to step 7 on page 3-12.
A874 3-10 SM
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
Installation
[D]
[F]
[G]
B368I503.WMF
• With the ISDN unit

NOTE: The bracket which is contained in the PC-Fax Expander is not used.
2. Disconnect the interface board [A], then remove the FCU [B] from the assembly
as shown.
3. Connect the harness [C] to the DIU [D], then attach the DIU [D] to the bracket
[E] as shown.
NOTE: The white connector must be connected to the DIU board.
4. Make sure that the harness [C] is between the ISDN board [F] and the FCU [B],
then replace the FCU [B] as shown.
5. Connect the harness [C] to the CN326 on the FCU [B], then replace the
interface board [A] as shown.
NOTE: Make sure not to pinch the harness [C] between the FCU [B] and the
interface board [A] when connecting it.
The blue connector must be connected to the FCU board.
6. Remove the 2 hexagonal screws [G] from the DIU [D].
SM 3-11 A874
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B368I504.WMF
7. Insert the FCU and DIU assembly [A] into the expansion box; connect the
harness [B] and slide the assembly into bottom of the box.
8. Open the RS232C connector window [C] on the bracket [D], then replace the
bracket [D] onto the expansion box.
9. Tighten the 2 hexagonal screws [E] as shown.
11. Enter the service mode, and set bit 0 of system switch 1C to “1”, then turn off
and on the main switch.
12. Print the system parameter list. If “TR29” appears in the “option” section of the
system parameter list, go head. Otherwise, check the cable connection.
13. Follow the instructions in the Operator’s manual to connect the machine to a
host computer and how to set up the machine and the computer, if required.
NOTE: 1) A “Straight – through” shielded serial cable is required, but it is not
enclosed.
2) One end of the serial cable must have DB25 male connection to
connect to the DIU.
A874 3-12 SM
3.1.5 STAMP UNIT
CAUTION
Before installing an optional unit, do the following:
1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.
2. Be sure to check the memory indicator shows “100%” in standby mode.
3. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter
list.
4. Switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power cord and the
telephone line.
Installation
NOTE: A document feeder and a fax unit are required to use this option.
[B]
[A]
[E]
[C] [D]
A813I500.WMF
[F]
A813I501.WMF
1. Remove the ADF front [A] (2 screws) and rear [B] (2 screws) covers.
2. Cut away the covers [C] and [D], as shown.
3. Remove two springs [E] and the cover [F] (3 screws, 2 harnesses).
SM 3-13 A874
[H]
4. Install the stamp unit [G] (3
screws, 3 harnesses) as shown.
Then connect the harness [H] to
CN270 on the DF control board.
5. Install the pulley [I], then loop
the timing belt [J] as shown.
NOTE: Before installing the
pulley, first loosen the
idler gear screw [K] [G]
6. Adjust the tension of the timing
belt, as shown in the callout.
Then tighten the idler gear
[I]
screw [K].
7. Turn on the DIP switch 4 on the [J]
DF control board. [K]
8. Replace the ADF front (2
screws) and rear (2 screws) A813I502.WMF
covers.
[L] [N]
9. Lift up the document feeder and
install the covers [L] (1 screw)
and [M] (1 screw).
10. Install the stamper [N] into the
stamp unit.
[M] A813I503.WMF
A874 3-14 SM
[O]
[P]
[Q]
Installation
A813I504.WMF
A813I505.WMF
11. Affix the spacers [O] and [P] to the ADF external tray holder, as shown.
12. Affix the guide [Q] to the tray, as shown.
NOTE: ADF external tray is included in the ADF, not in this option.
13. Change the “ADF original ejection” setting to the “ADF External Tray” using
system setting in the “User Tools” menu.
After the stamp unit has been installed, the F5 key is dedicated to switching the
stamper on and off. (note the user function key assignment, below)
Function keys with Stamp unit
• F1 Start Manual Rx
• F2 Tx File Status
• F3 TEL Mode
• F4 Not programmed
• F5 Stamper on/off
NOTE: Stamp is not possible if “ADF Tray” is selected.
SM 3-15 A874
3.1.6 HANDSET
[C] [D] [A]
[F]
[B]
[E]
A644I501.WMF
[G]
[H]
A644I503.WMF
1. Prick the screw holes on the right side of scanner rear cover as shown in [A].
2. Install the bracket [B] (3 screws).
NOTE: The screws are self-threading.
3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. Install the cradle on the
bracket [B] (2 screws), then replace the label [C].
4. Affix the wire clamps [E], as shown.
5. Install the handset [F] as shown. Run the handset cable through the clamps [E],
then connect it to the “TEL” jack [G] at the rear of the machine.
6. Hook the curled cord onto the hook [H] of the bracket.
A874 3-16 SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS
4.1.1 HOW TO ENTER AND EXIT THE FAX SERVICE MODE
To Enter Fax Service Mode:
1. Ensure that the machine is in standby
mode.
2. Press , then hold down F for
more than 3 seconds.
The SP mode main menu appears.
A874M501.BMP
3. Press / to enter the fax service mode.
To Exit Fax Service Mode:
Service
Tables
1. Press or “PrevMenu” until the SP mode A874M502.BMP
main menu appears.
2. Press the key.
4.1.2 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 01)
1. Enter the fax service mode.

2. Press - ..
3. Press one of the following numbers, as
required:
. – System bit switches
A874M503.BMP
/ – Scanner bit switches
0 – Printer bit switches
1 – Communication bit switches
2 – G3 bit switches
3 – G4 internal switches
4 – G4 parameter switches
NOTE: An optional G4 interface is required to access the G4 internal and G4

parameter bit switches.
SM 4-1 A874
Example:
1. Press ..
2. Scroll through the bit switches.
To increment the bit switch number:
press “↓ Switch”.
A874M504.BMP
To decrement the bit switch number:
press “↑ Switch”.
Example:
To display bit switch 03:
Press “↓ Switch” 3 times.
3. Adjust the bit switch.
Example:
To change the value of bit 7, press 7.
4. To adjust more bit switches, go to step 2.
To finish, press “OK” then “PrevMenu”. A874M505.BMP
5. Exit the service mode.

NOTE: After changing any of the G4 bit switches, be sure to turn the main power
switch off and back on to activate the new settings.
4.1.3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LISTS (FUNCTION 02)

2. Press - /.
3. Press ..
4. Press E.
A874M506.BMP
NOTE: Pages 5 and 6 of the system parameter list are for designer use only.
However some information may be useful for service technicians. See the
next page.
A874 4-2 SM
- An example of the system parameter list (pages 5 and 6) -
* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) * * *

1)TTI 1
2)TTI 2
And later is information for a design.
REST ENTRY DATA

TMP DIAL:1005 One key:30 Speed key:1000 PRG JOB:32 PRG DIAL:2000
Rest Job file:1003(max:1004) Rest Dial file:2002(max:2002)
Resouece
Free:0x0FFEFDFF Bad:0x0000001D CCU:0x00 [P1|XX|XX|XX|S|p|H]
SAF CAPACITY
100%(Rest block:0x1E00)
Receive
Now status 0x00 OK
CCU TX ERROR
* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) * * *
Service
Tables
1)TTI 1
2)TTI 2
Task Status
ID TASK PRI STS ISP START SP PC
00 idle 20 RDY 0x00800A5E 0x00004530 0x00800A5E 0x00004530
01 : : : : : : :
A874M600.WMF
REST ENTRY DATA

TEMP DIAL: Remaining number of destinations that can be programmed at the
ten-key pad.
One key: Remaining number of destinations that can be programmed as
Quick Dials
Speed key: Remaining number of destinations that can be programmed as
Speed Dials
PRG JOB: Remaining number of keystroke programs that can be
programmed
PRG DIAL: Remaining number of destinations that can be used in keystroke
programs.
Rest Job file: Number of remaining job files that can be used.
Rest Dial file: Number of remaining destinations that can be used.
SM 4-3 A874
4.1.4 FCU ROM VERSION DISPLAY (FUNCTION 02)

2. Press - / then /.
3. Exit the service mode. A874M507.BMP

NOTE: The check-sum value displayed is
calculated in 16-bit little endian format.
4.1.5 MODEM PROGRAM VERSION DISPLAY (FUNCTION 02)

2. Press - / then 0.

A874M508.BMP
4.1.6 ERROR CODE DISPLAY (FUNCTION 03)

2. Press - 0.
3. Press either Prev. or Next to scroll through
the error codes.
A874M009.TIF
4.1.7 SERVICE MONITOR REPORT (FUNCTION 04)

2. Press - 1 then E.
A874M510.BMP
A874 4-4 SM
4.1.8 G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST (FUNCTION 05)

2. Press - 2.
3. Press . then E.
4.1.9 G4 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST (FUNCTION 05)

NOTE: An optional G4 interface is required to print the G4 protocol dump list.
2. Press - 2.
Service
Tables
3. Press /. A874M511.BMP
4. Press one of the following numbers as

required:
. – D + Bch
/ – Dch
0 – Bch1 Link A874M512.BMP
1 – Dch Link
2 – D + Bch2
3 – Bch1 Link
A874M513.BMP
SM 4-5 A874
4.1.10 PC PROTOCOL DUMPLIST (FUNCTION 05)

NOTE: An optional PC fax expander board (PCFE) is required to print the PC
protocol dump list.
2. Press - 2.
A874M511.BMP
3. Press 0 then E.
4.1.11 RAM DISPLAY AND REWRITE (FUNCTION 06)

2. Press - 3.
3. Press ..
A874M515.BMP
4. Enter the start address of the RAM area to

be displayed, then press “OK”.
A874M516.BMP
5. Move the cursor to the target address using

the arrow keys, then enter a new value (0-9:
Ten-key pad, A-F: Quick Dial keys).
6. To scroll through the RAM addresses: Press
A874M517.BMP
“Prev”. or “Next”.
To jump to an another address: Press “OK”, and go back to step 3.
A874 4-6 SM
4.1.12 NCU PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 06)

2. Press - 3.
3. Press /.
A874M515.BMP
4. Move the cursor to the target parameter

using the arrow keys, then enter a new value
at the ten-key pad.
A874M518.BMP
4.1.13 RAM DUMP (FUNCTION 06)
Service
Tables
2. Press - 3.
3. Press one of the following numbers as
required:
0 – G3 memory dump list
1 – G4 memory dump list A874M515.BMP
NOTE: An optional G4 interface is required

to print the G4 memory dump list.
4. Enter the first four digits of the start and end
addresses, then press “OK”
Example: Start at 680000, end at 6801FF
3 5 - - 3 5 - . “OK”
A874M519.BMP
5. Press E.
A874M520.BMP
SM 4-7 A874
4.1.14 RAM CLEAR (FUNCTION 07)

2. Press - 4.
A874M521.BMP
3. Press one of the following numbers, as required:

. Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM,
files in the SAF memory, and the clock.
/ Erases all the files stored in the SAF memory.
0 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
1 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM,
and files in the SAF memory.
4. The machine automatically returns to standby mode after self-initialization.
4.1.15 FCU REBOOT

To initialize the fax unit without erasing files or resetting the bit switches, do one of
the following:
• Hold down the “Speed Dial” key for more than 10 s, while the machine is in
facsimile mode. This initializes the fax unit only.
• Remove the rear cover and press SW2 on the FCU. This initializes the fax unit
only.
• Turn off the main power and operation switches and turn them back on. This
initializes the whole machine.
• Hold down the 7 and 8 keys for more than 10 s. This initializes the whole
machine.
4.1.16 SERVICE STATION FAX NUMBER (FUNCTION 09)

2. Press - 6.
3. Enter the fax number of the service station that
will receive Automatic Service Calls from this
machine. To use a G4 number, press the “F4”
key.
A874M522.BMP
4. Press “OK”.
A874 4-8 SM
4.1.17 SERIAL NUMBER (FUNCTION 10)

2. Press . -.
3. Enter the fax unit’s serial number at the
keypad, then press “OK”.
4.1.18 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 11)

2. Press . ..
A874M524.BMP
Service
Tables
3. Press one of the following numbers:
.– Modem test (analog line)
0– Modem test (ISDN line [IG3 CCU])
NOTE: An optional ISDN interface is
required to test a modem on an A874M525.BMP
ISDN line.
4. Press . (Modem).
5. Choose a modem signal type at the keypad,
then press E.
To stop, press F.
SM 4-9 A874
4.1.19 V.34 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 11)
1. Enter the service mode.

2. Press . . then press one of the following numbers:
.– Modem test (analog line)
0– Modem test (ISDN line [IG3 CCU])
NOTE: An optional ISDN interface is required to test a modem on an ISDN
line.
1– Modem test (analog line) is selected
0– Modem test (ISDN line [IG3 CCU]) is
selected
NOTE: An optional ISDN interface is
required to test a modem on an ISDN A874M527.BMP
line.
4. Select a symbol rate and a data rate, then
press OK.
. – Select a symbol rate
A874M528.BMP
/ – Select a data rate

5. Press E to start the test.
To stop the test, press F.
4.1.20 DTMF TEST (FUNCTION 11)

2. Press . ..
.– DTMF test (analog line)
0– DTMF test (ISDN line)
NOTE: A G4 interface is required to test A874M524.BMP
DTMF tones on an ISDN line.
4. Press /.
5. Choose a DTMF signal type at the keypad, A874M525.BMP
then press E.
A874M530.BMP
A874 4-10 SM
4.1.21 RINGER TEST (FUNCTION 11)

2. Press . ..
A874M524.BMP
3. Press ..
A874M525.BMP
4. Press 0 then E.
A874M531.BMP
Service
Tables
4.1.22 MEMORY TEST (FUNCTION 11)

2. Press . ..
3. Press /.
. – SRAM test
/ – DRAM test
5. Press E to start the test. A874M532.BMP

If the test is successful, the display shows
“OK”.
If the test is unsuccessful, the display
shows “NG”.
A874M533.BMP
SM 4-11 A874
4.1.23 DIU TEST (FUNCTION 11)

2. Press . ..
A874M524.BMP
3. Press 1.
A874M534.BMP
4. Press / then E.
A874M535.BMP
4.1.24 FILE PRINTOUT (FUNCTION 13)

2. Press . 0 then E.
The machine prints all the files stored in the
SAF memory, including confidential
messages.
NOTE: Do not use this function, unless the A874M536.BMP
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
A874 4-12 SM
4.1.25 JOURNAL PRINTOUT (FUNCTION 14)

2. Press . 1.
3. Either:
Choose All - The machine prints all the
communication records on the report. The
maximum is 100 records, or 900 records if A874M537.BMP
the optional EXFUNC board is installed.
Specify a date - The machine prints all
communication records after the specified
date.
4. Press E.
4.1.26 USAGE LOG PRINTOUT (FUNCTION 15)
Service
Tables
The following functions are for designer use only. However, list 5 (SC history) may
be useful.
2. Press . 2.
3. Press the number, then press E.
2 – SC history
A874M538.BMP
4.1.27 DATA TRANSFER (FUNCTION 16)

This function allows ROM and SRAM data transfer between the FCU inside the
machine and an external flash memory card or FCU. Refer to the following sections
for details.
• Section 6.4.1 - FCU ROM download from a flash memory card

• Section 6.4.2 - FCU ROM upload to a flash memory card
• Section 6.4.3 - SRAM backup to a flash memory card
• Section 6.3.3 - SRAM restore from a flash memory card backup
• Section 6.3.2 – SRAM restore from FCU
SM 4-13 A874
BIT SWITCHES
4.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,
as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner
that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other
areas, such as Japan.
NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the
System Parameter List printed by the machine.
The switches that have been changed from A230/A231/A232 are marked
“*”.
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 Technical data printout on the 1: Instead of the personal name, the following
Journal data are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled communication.
1: Enabled
e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04
(1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
Note:
EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.
The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records and
ECM reception records.
Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N
by -16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change the setting.
A874 4-14 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 00
4 * Line error marks on received If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left
pages edge of the page at any place where a line error
0: Disabled occurred in the data. Such errors are caused by a
1: Enabled noisy line, for example.
5 G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
0: Disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication
each communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
1: On reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Amount of protocol dump data Change this bit to 1 if you want to have a protocol
in one protocol dump list dump list of the last communication only.
printout operation If bit 6 is turned on, the machine prints a protocol
0: Up to the limit of the dump list for the last communication only,
memory area for protocol regardless of this bit setting.
Service
Tables
dumping If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only
1: Last communication only printed if there was an error during the
communication.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression MMR: MMR compression
mode MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM
SM 4-15 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/line
Note:
“40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short
protocol.
G4 Communication Parameters
Compression MMR: MMR compression
mode MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
Resolution 21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
Transfer T: Transfer
- : Other
Confidential C: Confidential
- : Other
Other parameters The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the first
bit from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.
Bit 1 - Smoothing 0: Off, 1: On
(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)
Bit 2 - CIL printing 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 3 - Not used
Bit 4 - mm/inch conversion 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5 - Engine type 0: mm, 1: inches
Bit 6 - Document resolution unit 0: mm, 1: inches
System Switch 01
0 Automatic Service Call at PM This bit switch determines whether the machine
0: Disabled will send an Auto Service Call to the service
1: Enabled station when it is time for PM.
Cross reference
Auto service calls: Section 2.1
A874 4-16 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 02
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not
0: Depends on User be erased unless the communication is
Parameter 24 [18(H)] successful.
1: No limit
6 Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
7 Bit 7 6 Setting (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
0 0 Always disabled out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on
0 1 User selectable to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will
1 0 User selectable automatically be locked out again after a certain
1 1 Always enabled time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note
that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not
switch off until this time limit has expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
Service
Tables
System Switch 03
0 Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).
to temporarily switched on when
7 bits 6 and 7 of System Switch This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System
02 are set to “User selectable” Switch 02 are set to “User selectable”.
The default setting is 24 hours.
System Switch 04
3 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
parameters on Quick/Speed printed with the dedicated tx parameters (8 bytes
Dial Lists each).
0: Disabled The last 10 bytes of data are the programmed
1: Enabled dedicated tx parameters; 32 bytes of data are
printed (the other 22 bytes have no use for
service technicians).
SM 4-17 A874
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 04
5 Memory file transfer operation If the machine is unable to print fax messages
0: User level due to a mechanical problem, change this bit to 0
1: Service level to transfer all messages in the memory (including
confidential rx messages) to an another terminal.
Always reset this bit to 1 after transfer. However,
this bit can be left at 0, if the customer’s key-
operators want to transfer the files themselves.
Procedure
1. Enter service mode and change this bit to 0.
3. Enter the user tools, and select “Key-
operator settings”.
4. Choose “03” and specify a destination for the
machine to transfer all the files to.
5. Press “Start”.
6. After the machine transfers the memory files,
enter the service mode and reset this bit to 1.
Otherwise, anybody who knows how to enter
the key-operator mode can transfer
confidential messages.
6 G3 CSI/G4 Terminal ID 1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be
programming level programmed by a technician (in the user tools).
0: User level The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a
1: Service level Group 4 option is installed.
7 Telephone line type 1: Telephone line type selection (choosing tone
programming mode dial or pulse dial) can only be programmed by a
0: User level technician (in the user tools).
1: Service level
System Switch 05
2 Display of both RTI and CSI 1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of the
on the LCD protocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayed
0: Disabled after phase C.
1: Enabled
System Switch 06 *
0 Margin setting for Create 71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines the
to Margin Transmission reduction ratio when the user uses the Create
7 Margin Transmission feature.
Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)
A874 4-18 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 09
0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed on
the transmission result report transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Inclusion of communications 0: Communications that reached phase C
on the Journal when no image (message tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on
data was exchanged. the Journal.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Communications that reached phase A (call
setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
This will include telephone calls.
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after
failed communications.
3 Printing of the error code on 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
the error report
Service
0: No 1: Yes
Tables
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically
0: Disabled 1: Enabled printed after the power is switched on if a fax
message disappeared from the memory when the
power was turned off last.
6 Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when system
protocol dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a
1: Print only when there is a protocol dump list only for communications with
communication error errors.
7 Priority given to various types This bit determines which set of priorities the
of remote terminal ID when machine uses when listing remote terminal names
printing reports on reports.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > In G4 communication, G4_TID (Terminal ID) is
Tel. number used instead of RTI or CSI.
1: Dial label > Tel. number >
RTI > CSI Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the
Quick/Speed Dial number.
SM 4-19 A874
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0A
3 Continuous polling reception This feature allows a series of stations to be
0: Disabled 1: Enabled polled in a continuous cycle. This will continue
until the polling reception file is erased.
The dialing interval is the same as memory
transmission.
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
when the external telephone external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting
is off-hook when the external telephone is not by the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected
as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad
when the handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
6 Line used for G3 transmission If an ISDN unit has been installed, this bit
0: PSTN 1: ISDN determines whether G3 transmissions go out over
the PSTN or the ISDN.
7 Line used when the machine This bit switch has no effect if Communication
falls back to G3 from G4 if the Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.
other end is not a G4 machine
0: PSTN 1: ISDN
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E
3 Action when the external 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the
handset goes off-hook external handset is off-hook. However, memory tx
0: Manual tx and rx operation is not possible.
1: Memory tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when
(the display remains the the external handset is used, so that other people
same) can use the machine for memory tx operation.
Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with
this setting.
A874 4-20 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 0F
0 Country code for functional This country code determines the factory settings
to settings (Hex) of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it
7 has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and
00: France 11: USA communication parameter RAM addresses.
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK 13: Japan Cross reference
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong NCU country code: Function 06, parameter C.C.
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia
06: Denmark 17: NewZealand
07: Finland 18: Singapore
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia
09: Norway 1A: China
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 20: Turkey
0C: Portugal 21: Greece
0D: Holland
0E: Spain
0F: Israel
Service
Tables
System Switch 10
0 Threshold memory level for Threshold = N x 128 kbytes + 256 kbytes
to parallel memory transmission N can be between 00 - FF(H)
7 Default setting: 02(H) = 512 kbytes
System Switch 11
0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints
0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
data important (G3 transmissions).
1: Printed before the data
leading edge
1 TSI (G3) or CIL/TID (G4) Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) or CIL/TID
printing position (G4) overprints information that the customer
0: Superimposed on the page considers to be important.
data
1: Printed before the data G4: Europe model only
leading edge
2 Not used Do not change the factory setting.
3 * TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected with
0: The TTIs selected for each user switch 01 bit 6 is used for all destinations
Quick/Speed dial are used during broadcasting.
1: The same TTI is used for
all destinations
SM 4-21 A874
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 11
4 * Type of TTI used for 1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials
transmission using the ten- the destination using the ten-key pad. It is also
key pad used for polling transmission and manual
0: TTI_1 transmission using the handset.
1: TTI_2
5-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
7 Use of parallel memory This determines whether parallel transmission
transmission with G4 can be used with a G4 transmission or not.
transmission Note that this bit is only effective if Parallel
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Memory transmission is enabled (User Parameter
07 - bit 2).
System Switch 12
0 TTI/CIL printing position in the TTI/CIL: 08 to 64 (BCD) mm
to main scan direction Input even numbers only.
7 This setting determines the print start position for
CIL: Command Information the TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If
Line (Group 4) the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
overwrite the file number which is on the top right
of the page. On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved
over by more than 60 mm, it may overwrite the
page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 15
1 Going into the Night mode 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver
automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is
0: Enabled active even in the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled
2 Protocol dump data backup 1: The machine backs up the protocol dump data
0: Disabled for approximately one hour when the main switch
1: Enabled is turned off, in the same way as image data.
A874 4-22 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 16
0 * Parallel Broadcasting 1: When the G4 unit is installed, the machine
0: Disabled sends messages simultaneously using both
1: Enabled available ports (PSTN/ISDN) during broadcasting.

System Switch 19
0 Key acknowledgement tone This controls the volume of this tone when the
to volume adjustment machine is in fax mode (it has no effect on the tone
2 000 (Min.: OFF)-111 (Max.) when the machine is in copier or printer mode).
Default setting – 011
7 Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a
Service
Tables
0: Disabled form or letterhead which has a colored or printed
1: Enabled background, change this bit to “1”. “Special
Original” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,
“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.
Cross reference
Type of special original mode – Scanner switch
00 bit 0.
System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 4-23 A874
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1C
0 PC-Fax Expander option Change this bit to 1 when installing the PC-Fax
0: Not installed Expander.
1: Installed
1 To omit the PSTN access 1: The machine does not dial the PSTN access
code during a PC-Fax code programmed in the PC-Fax application
transmission during PC-Fax memory transmission.
0: Disabled This function becomes effective only when the PC
1: Enabled fax application dials using a Quick/Speed/Group
Dial stored in the fax machine.
The machine will not omit dialing the PSTN
access code when a destination number is
programmed manually.
3 Deleting the file when an error This function is effective for PC memory
occurs during PC data transmission.
storage to the SAF 0: The pages stored in the SAF will be transmitted
0: Not cleared from the machine.
1: Cleared 1: All data is cleared when an error occurs.
However, if the SAF memory becomes full during
data storage, the setting of system bit switch 1E
bit 1 determines how data is treated.
This function is also effective for PC printing using
the PCFE option for the fax board.
4 Resolution unit used for PC- This bit determines the resolution unit used for PC
Fax communication fax communication.
0: mm This is because the PC fax application cannot
1: inches automatically adjust the resolution unit.
This setting is also effective for PC scanning
using the PCFE option for the fax board.
7 PC protocol dump list output 1: This is only used for PC communication
after each PC communication troubleshooting.
0: Off Communications between the DIU (PCFE
1: On board) and a host PC are logged on the PC
dump list.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is
only printed if there was an error during the
communication.
PC scan and PC print jobs using the PCFE
option for the fax board are printed on the
Journal.
The Data-in LED turns on while data is
coming in and going out to the PC.
Be sure to reset this bit to “0” after a test.
System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
A874 4-24 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1E
0 Communication after the This setting is effective only when Automatic
Journal data storage area has Journal printout is enabled but the machine
become full cannot print the report (e.g., no paper).
0: Impossible 0: If the buffer memory of the communication
1: Possible records for the Journal has become full, fax
communications will become impossible, to
prevent overwriting the communication records
before the machine prints them out.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
are still possible. But the machine will overwrite
the oldest communication records.
Cross Reference
Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7
Number of communication records for the
Journal:
100 records (standard)
900 records (with the EXFUNC board
installed)
Service
Tables
1 Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during
has become full during scanning, the successfully scanned pages are
scanning transmitted.
0: The current page is erased. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
1: The entire file is erased. scanning, the file is erased and no pages are
transmitted.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory

transmission.
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
0: RTI 1: CSI displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 Action when authorized If authorized reception is enabled but the user has
reception is enabled but stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not machine will not be able to receive any fax
yet programmed messages.
If the customer wishes to receive messages from
0: All fax reception is disabled any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to
1: Faxes can be received if block messages from senders that do not include
the sender has an RTI or CSI an RTI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable
Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.
5 Address display priority in the 0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and the
AI redial mode telephone number information, the machine
0: RTI/CSI displays RTI/CSI.
1: Telephone number 1: The machine always displays the telephone
number.
SM 4-25 A874
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1E
6 Not used Do not change the setting
7 RAM initialization after the When the machine detects that an EXFUNC
optional EXFUNC board is board has been installed or removed, the
installed or removed machine shows the following message on the
0: Enabled display for the customer.
1: Disabled
“Adding/Removing FAX Feature Expander causes
data loss. Turn Main Power Switch off and
remove/replace it to avoid loss. To continue,
press Yes.”
If Yes is pressed, the machine initializes the RAM

to the “with” or “without card” configuration.
However, changing this bit to “1” disables this
initialization, even if Yes is pressed.
Change this bit to 1 after installing the EXFUNC

board.
0: When the above message is displayed, the

machine initializes the RAM if Yes is pressed. The
amount of data lost depends on whether the
board is in or out. To avoid losing data, the user
must switch off immediately and put the EXFUNC
board back in.
1: When the above message is displayed, the
machine does not initialize the RAM even if Yes is
pressed. However, the fax unit cannot be used
until the user switches off, puts the EXFUNC
board back in, then switches back on. No data is
lost.
A874 4-26 SM
BIT SWITCHES
System Switch 1F
1 Report printout after an 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
original jam during SAF overflows during scanning, a report will be
storage or if the SAF memory printed.
fills up Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not
0: Enabled want to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately
(G3 reception) after the machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message
1: After receiving all pages after the machine receives all the pages in the
4 Received fax print start timing memory.
(G4 reception)
0: After receiving each page
1: After receiving all pages
Service
Tables
7 Action when a fax SC has 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other
occurred than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit
0: Automatic reset automatically resets itself.
1: SC code display 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the
fax unit displays the SC code and stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”
SM 4-27 A874
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES

Scanner Switch 00
0 Type of special original mode This setting determines the scanner parameters
0: Monotone background used for special original mode.
1: Colored background 0: This setting is for originals with random
background of constant density, such as seen on
banknotes (faxing banknotes is not
recommended!).
1: This setting is for originals with background of
constant density, such as those made on colored
paper.
This switch becomes effective only when system
switch 19 bit 7 is set to 1.
4 OR processing (Text mode) 1: Each pair of scan lines goes through OR
0: Disabled processing before transmission.
1: Enabled
Scanner Switch 01
0 Scan density step value When scan density is adjusted manually away
to (Text mode) from the Normal setting, the threshold value for
4 binary picture processing changes for each step
from the value specified by Scanner Switch 02, by
the amount programmed here.
For example, with the default setting (14), the
threshold value changes as follows.
+3 (Darkest) : 77 (= 91 – 14)
+2 : 91 (= 105 – 14)
+1 : 105 (= 119 – 14)
0 (Normal) : 119 (Scanner Switch 02 setting)
-1 : 133 (= 119 + 14)
-2 : 147 (= 133 + 14)
-3 (Lightest) : 161 (= 147 + 14)
The value can be between 00 and 1F(H) [=
31(D)].
For smaller steps, input a lower value.
Scanner Switch 02
0 Binary picture processing: This setting determines the threshold value for
to Threshold for Text mode - binary picture processing in Text mode (when the
7 Normal setting (center scan density setting is at the center).
position) The value can be between 01 and FF. For a
darker threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 77(H) = 119(D)
A874 4-28 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Scanner Switch 03
0 Binary picture processing: This setting determines the threshold value for
to Threshold for Photo and binary picture processing in Text/Photo mode
7 Text/Photo mode - Normal (when the scan density setting is at the center).
setting (center position) The value can be between 01 and FF. For a
darker threshold, input a lower value.
Default setting: 23(H) = 35(D)
Scanner Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 06
0 MTF filter level (Text mode)
to The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower
3 value.
Default setting: 6
This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.
Service
4 MTF filter level (Text/Photo mode)
Tables
to The value can be between 0(Off) and F. For a weaker threshold, input a lower
7 value.
Default setting: 6
This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes.
Scanner Switch 07
0 Smoothing filter level (Photo The value can be between 0(Off) and 7. For a
to mode) weaker threshold, input a lower value.
2 Default setting: 2
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.

Scanner Switch 0A
0 Independent dot erase level The value can be between 0 (Off) and 4.
to (Text modes) For a higher threshold, input a higher value
2 (larger dots are erased).
Default setting: 2
This setting is independent from the threshold
setting specified by the copier SP modes.
SM 4-29 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Scanner Switch 0B *
0 Scan margin setting (top and bottom margin in book scan mode, and top margin in
to ADF mode)
3 The setting can be between 0 and F (H) (in mm).
Default setting: 3 mm
Scanner Switch 0C
0 Action when an original jam This bit is only effective when parallel memory tx
has occurred while scanning is disabled (user parameter 07 - bit 2).
the original into memory for If parallel memory tx is enabled, the machine
memory tx always erases the scanned pages when an
0: Continues scanning after original jam occurs. The machine then asks the
recovery user to retry from the first page, even if the
1: Stops scanning and erases parallel memory tx is not actually used.
all scanned pages for that job 0: The machine displays a message asking the
user to put the jammed page back into the original
stack, and continues scanning.
The message is displayed for the time period
specified by scanner switch 0E, bit 2.
1: The machine erases all the scanned pages and
asks the user to retry from the first page.
1 Setting when an original size When both bits are set to “0”, the machine
to cannot be recognized recognizes an original size depending on SP4-
2 Bit 2 1 Setting 303 in copier service mode.
0 0 Depending on
the copier’s setting
0 1 A5
1 0 A5
1 1 No original
6 Scan width used for a This bit is set at “1” when the country code is set
document set in the ADF to the US.
when the width is less than
230 mm.
0: A4 (210 mm)
1: LT (216 mm)
7 Sub-scan length correction 0: The machine regards originals as following
using ADF table.
0: Enabled 1: The original length data from the ADF sensor is
1: Dsabled used.
A874 4-30 SM
BIT SWITCHES
• Scanner Switch 0C bit 6 = 0

Before sub-scan length After sub-scan length correction
correction
Under 135mm 128mm (B6 short edge length)
136mm – 157mm 148mm (A5 short edge length)
158mm – 192mm 182mm (B6 long edge length)
193mm – 223mm 210mm (A4 short edge length)
267mm – 287mm 279mm (LT long edge length)
288mm – 307mm 297mm (A4 long edge length)
Over 426mm 432mm (DLT long edge length)
• Scanner Switch 0C bit 6 = 1

Before sub-scan length After sub-scan length correction
correction
Under 146mm 140mm (HLT short edge length)
193mm – 223mm 216mm (LT short edge length)
Service
Tables
267mm – 287mm 279mm (LT long edge length)
346mm – 366mm 356mm (LG long edge length)
Over 418mm 432mm (DLT long edge length)
Scanner Switch 0D
0 Scan magnification ratio fine tuning (main scan direction)
1  0 1   0 1
 = 0%, =− 1.5%, =+ 1.5%, =Do not use this setting
 0  0 1  1
The actual magnification ratio is the sum of the SP mode 4-008 setting and this
setting.
2 Scan magnification ratio fine tuning (sub scan direction)
3  0 1   0 1
 =0%, =− 1.5%, =+ 1.5%, =Do not use this setting
 0  0 1  1
The actual magnification ratio is the sum of the SP mode 4-101 setting and this
setting.
7 Scan width for A5 lengthwise 0: The machine scans the original as 210 mm
or B5 lengthwise originals (8.5") width. The transmitted image has a blank
0: 210 mm (8.5”) area on the right.
1: Original width 1: The machine scans 148 mm (A5) or 182 mm
(B5) and centers the scanned data on a 216 mm
width transmitted image.
SM 4-31 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Scanner Switch 0E
0 Wait time for the next page This bit determines how long the machine waits
when scanning a book original for the next page when scanning a book original
into memory for memory transmission. If this timer expires, the
0: 60 s machine transmits all the pages scanned so far
1: 30 s as one document.
Note: In immediate tx or parallel memory tx, the
wait time for the next page is 10 s.
1 Scan resolution unit This bit determines which resolution unit will be
(except standard resolution in used for scanning a fax message.
book scan mode)
0: mm Default setting: mm
1: inches
2 ADF jam alarm display time The bit is only effective when bit 0 of scanner bit
0: 60 s switch 0C is “0”.
1: 30 s This bit determines how long the machine
displays the ADF jam alarm after a jam occurred.
Scanner Switch 0F
0 Image rotation before This bit determines whether the machine rotates
transmission (A4/LT the scanned image by 90 degrees before
sideways) transmission.
0: Disabled If this bit is set at 1, A4 (LT) sideways images
1: Enabled (297 mm width in the protocol) will be transmitted
as A4 (LT) lengthwise images (216 mm width in
the protocol).
Refer to Image Rotation Before Transmission in
chapter 2 for more details.
1 Not used Do not change the setting
2 Image rotation before This bit determines whether the machine rotates
transmission (A5/HLT the scanned image by 90 degrees before
lengthwise) transmission.
0: Disabled If this bit is set at “1”, A5 (HLT) lengthwise images
1: Enabled will be transmitted as A4 (LT) width images (216
mm width in the protocol).
Refer to Image Rotation Before Transmission in
chapter 2 for more details.
A874 4-32 SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00
0 Page separation mark 0: No marks are printed.
0: Disabled 1: If a received page has to be printed out on two
1: Enabled sheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is
printed at the bottom right hand corner of the first
sheet, and a “2” inside a small box is printed at
the top right hand corner of the second sheet.
This helps the user to identify pages that have
been split.
1 Repetition of data when the 0: The next page continues from where the
received page is longer than previous page left off.
the printer paper 1: The final few mm of the previous page are
0: Disabled repeated at the top of the next page. The amount
1: Enabled of repeated data depends on printer switch 04,
bits 5 and 6.
See Sub Scan Reduction and Page Separation in
section 2 for details.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter
received fax messages 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
Service
Tables
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed
date and time at the bottom of each received
page.
Printer Switch 01
3 Maximum print width used in the setup protocol
4 0 1 0 1
=D o no t use this settin g 0 =A3 =A 4
0 1 =B 4 1
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer switch 01 is “1”.

6 Table selection of received When bit 7 is set to 1, this bit determines which
message width. table the machine uses to choose the paper width
0: Table 1 from. The paper width will be informed in the
1: Table 2 setup protocol (NSF/DIS).
7 Received message width 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine
restriction in the protocol of the print width depending on the paper size
signal to the sender available from the paper feed stations.
0: Disabled Refer to the tables on the next page.
1: Enabled 1: The machine informs the transmitting machine
of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits
3 and 4 above.
SM 4-33 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the
setup protocol
• Table 1 (Printer Switch 01 bit 6 = 0)
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width
• Table 2 (Printer Switch 01 bit 6 = 1)

Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A3 or DTL 297 mm width
B4 256 mm width
Others 216 mm width
Printer Switch 02
0 1st paper feed station usage 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
for fax printing messages and reports.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be
1 2nd paper feed station usage used for printing fax messages and reports.
for fax printing
0: Enabled Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed
1: Disabled station which has been specified by User
2 3rd paper feed station usage Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which is used for
for fax printing the Specified Cassette Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3 4th paper feed station usage
for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4 LCT usage for fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
A874 4-34 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 03
0 Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length
data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03,
1: Enabled bits 4 to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,
bits 0 to 4)
1-3 Not used Do not change the settings
4 Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above)
to
7 If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the length of copy paper, the
excess portion will not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer
than the length of copy paper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.
The value of x is determined by these four bits.
Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)

0 0
1 1
Service
Tables
and so on until
F 15
Default setting: 6 mm
Cross reference
Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0
Printer Switch 04
0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
to above.
4 <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
“N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm (default setting)
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
SM 4-35 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 04
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken
6 place.
 0 1   0 1
 =4 mm, =10 mm, =15 mm, = Not used
 0  0 1  1
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 06
0 Printing while a paper Refer to Just Size Printing in section 2 for details.
cassette is pulled out, when
the Just Size Printing feature Cross reference
is enabled. Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper
size selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
Printer Switch 07 *
0 Reduction for Journal printing 1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure that
0: Off there is enough space in the left margin for punch
1: On holes or staples.
4 List of destinations in the 1: Only destinations where communication failure
Communication Failure occurred are printed on the Communication
Report for broadcasting Failure Report.
0: All destinations
1: Only destinations where
communication failure
occurred

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
A874 4-36 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0E
0 Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the
0: Width received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all
the received lines without reduction is selected first.
1 Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is
printing A4 width fax data selected for printing A4 width fax data, when the
0: 8.5" x 11" size machine has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page
0: Enabled separation to print a received fax message, the
1: Disabled machine does not print the message (Substitute
Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
3 Printing the sample image “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
to on reports 100%, even if page separation occurs.
4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set
0 0 The upper half to “0” to enable this switch.
only Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
0 1 50% reduction
Service
this feature.
Tables
in sub-scan only
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken place.
1: Disabled Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F
0 Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine
to Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting receives halftone images from other
1 0 0 Disabled manufacturers fax machines frequently.
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2 Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax
0: Disabled messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
3 Binding direction for Duplex
printing
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
SM 4-37 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Printer Switch 0F
4 Printing fax messages in user 1: The machine holds the received fax messages
code mode until the machine exits the restricted access mode
0: Enabled (user code or key counter).
1: Disabled If the machine enters the restricted access mode
again while printing fax messages, the machine
stops printing the machine exits the mode again.
6 Wait timer for duplex printing
to
7
If the duplex unit is already being used for a copy or print job when the fax unit is
going to print a fax message in duplex mode, the fax unit waits until the duplex unit
becomes available. The time that the fax unit will wait can be specified, as shown
above. It the timer expires, the message is printed on single sides.
A874 4-38 SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00
0 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in receive mode to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the
1 Bit 1 0 Modes T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
2 Compression modes available These bits determine the compression capabilities
to in transmit mode to be used in the transmission and to be declared
3 Bit 3 2 Modes in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication
Service
Tables
Reception problems occur using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication
Transmission problems occur using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
1: Optional mode priority
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of
0: Disabled the other terminal does not match the ID code of
1: Enabled this terminal. This function is only available in
NSF/NSS mode.
SM 4-39 A874
BIT SWITCHES
0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all
0: Off 1: On communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression
are switched off automatically.
2 Wrong connection prevention (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line
to method without sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits
3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting of the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits
0 0 None of the dialed telephone number. This does not
0 1 8 digit CSI work when manually dialed.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,0) - The same as above, except that only the
1 1 CSI/RTI last 4 digits are compared.
(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line
without sending a fax message, if the other end
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
Note: This function does not work when dialing is

done from the external telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6 Maximum printable page The setting determined by these bits is informed
to length available to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
7 Bit 7 6 Setting protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 A3 (432 mm)
0 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the
0: Low 1: High received page than the threshold, the machine
will send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values depend on
the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpi 400 dpi
3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm
Low settings 6 12 24
High settings 12 24 48
1 Acceptable total error line If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
ratio acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other
0: 5% 1: 10% end.
A874 4-40 SM
BIT SWITCHES
2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3
reception
0: Deleted from memory
without printing
1: Printed
3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN
negative code (RTN or PIN) is is received.
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it
transmission receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if
ECM is being used.
7 Method of total error rate 0: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number
calculation of total lines by the number of error lines.
0: Normal method 1: Error rate is calculated by dividing the number
1: French PTT requirement of total plus error lines by the number of error
lines.
Service
Tables
0 Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.
to retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
7 memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

SM 4-41 A874
BIT SWITCHES
0 Dialing requirements: These switches are automatically set to the
Germany settings required by each country after the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled country code (System Switch 0F) is programmed.
1 Dialing requirements: Austria
2 Dialing requirements: Norway
3 Dialing requirements:
Denmark
4 Dialing requirements: France
Switzerland
USA
7 Carrier drop display This is an European PTT requirement.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled This bit is available only for the European models.
0 Fallback from G4 to G3 if the Also see system switch 0A bit 7.
other terminal is not a G4 Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4
terminal Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the
0: Disabled CPS code set (Cause Value set) that determines
1: Enabled G4 to G3 fallback.
3 * Fallback from G4 to G3 0: If a communication falls back from G4 to G3,
reflected in programmed the machine will always start transmission with
Quick/Speed dials G3 from the next communication.
0: Fallback enabled 1: The machine will always start to transmit with
1: Always start with G4 G4.
4 * Fallback from G4 to G3 when 1: Enable this switch only when G4
G4 communication fails on the communication errors occur because the
ISDN B-channel exchanger connects G4 calls to the PSTN.
0: Fallback disabled This problem occurs with some types of
1: Fallback enabled exchanger.
A874 4-42 SM
BIT SWITCHES

Communication Switch 0A
0 Point of resumption of 0: The transmission begins from the page where
memory transmission upon transmission failed the previous time.
redialing 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
0: From the error page normal memory transmission.
1: From page 1
7 Emergency calls using 999 If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to
0: Enabled 1: Disabled dial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT
requirement in the UK and some other countries.
Communication Switch 0B
0 Use of Economy These bits determine whether the machine uses
Service
Tables
Transmission during a the Economy Transmission feature when it is
Transfer operation to end carrying out a Transfer operation as a Transfer
receivers Station.
1 Use of Economy
Transmission during a
Transfer operation to the Next
Transfer Stations
2 Use of Label Insertion for the This bit determines whether the machine uses the
End Receivers in a Transfer Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out a
operation Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.
3 Conditions required for 0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the
Transfer Result Report machine will always send a Transfer Result
transmission Report back to the Requesting Station after
0: Always transmitted completing the Transfer Request, even if there
1: Only transmitted if there were no problems.
was an error 1: The machine will only send back a Transfer
Result Report if there were errors during
communication, meaning one or more of the End
Receivers could not be contacted.
4 Printout of the message when When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,
acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the
0: Disabled 1: Enabled fax message coming in from the Requesting
Terminal.
SM 4-43 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0B
5 Action when there is no fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the
number in the programmed machine compares the last N digits of the
Quick/Speed dials which requesting terminal’s own fax number with all the
meets the requesting Quick/Speed dials programmed in the machine.
terminal’s own fax number (N is the number programmed in communication
0: Transfer is disabled switch 0C.)
1: Transfer is enabled 0: If there is no matching number programmed in
the machine, the machine rejects the transfer
request.
1: Even if there is no matching number
programmed in the machine, the machine accepts
the transfer request. The result report will be
printed at the transfer terminal, but will not be sent
back to the requesting terminal.
Communication Switch 0C
0 Number of digits compared to 00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)
to find the requester’s fax After the machine receives a transfer request, the
4 number from the programmed machine compares the own telephone number
Quick/Speed Dials when sent from the Requesting Terminal with all
acting as a Transfer Station Quick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine,
starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of the
Speed Dials.
This number determines how many digits from the
end of the telephone numbers the machine
compares.
If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report
to the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machine
compared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, the
machine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick
Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and
Quick Dial 05 is programmed, the machine will
send the report to Quick 05.
Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits
A874 4-44 SM
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 0D
0 The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
to threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
7 detection (and therefore One page is about 24 kbytes.
reception into memory) is
disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E
0 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
to automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
Service
Tables
7 This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)
0 Memory transmission: 01 - FE (Hex) times
to Maximum number of dialing
7 attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)
0 Memory transmission: Interval 01 - FF (Hex) minutes
to between dialing attempts to
7 the same destination
SM 4-45 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)
0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in
transmission inch format are transmitted without conversion.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF
memory in mm format are transmitted without
conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF
memory, the fax unit always converts the data
into mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or

stored data in the SAF memory to the format
which was specified in the set-up protocol
(DIS/NSF) before transmission.
6 Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the
to which fax messages are factory settings.
7 received
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit The setting determined by these bits is informed
0 0 mm to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message
0 1 inch protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
1 0 mm and inch
(default)
1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 16 *
2 Optional ISDN unit Change this bit to 1 when installing the optional
0: Not installed ISDN unit.
1: Installed
6 ISDN Dual communication 1: The machine uses only one B channel for
0: Enabled communication. This enables a customer to
1: Disabled occupy another B channel for other purposes
such as internet communication.
A874 4-46 SM
BIT SWITCHES
0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker’s
0: Disabled machine using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal
1: Enabled is disabled.
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker’s
0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
0 Memory Lock for PSTN Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2 Memory Lock for ISDN Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires.
0: Disabled
Service
Tables
1: Enabled This function requires an optional G4 unit.

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E *
0 Extension access code (0 to If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to 7) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.
7 0: On Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit
1: Off 0 to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
SM 4-47 A874
BIT SWITCHES
Communication Switch 1F *
0 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1E.
to 9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit
1 0: On 0 to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit
1.)
A874 4-48 SM
BIT SWITCHES
4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through
1 communication (tx and rx) the communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in
0 0 Disabled the T.30 protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on
1 0 All the time all through the communication. Make sure that
1 1 Not used you reset these bits after testing.
2 Monitor speaker during 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
memory transmission transmission.
7 Back to back test Set this bit to 1 when you wish to do a back to
0: Disabled 1: Enabled back test.
115 V model: Be sure to connect jumpers JP5
and JP6 on the NCU before doing the test.
220 V model: Be sure to apply dc voltage
between wires L1 and L2 on the NCU.
Service
Tables
10 µF 1 0µF
FA X FA X
10 µF 10 µF
A874M601.WMF
Back-to-Back Connection:
The dc power supplies should be adjusted so that the line current to the NCU is
about 30mA.
G3 Switch 01
4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 CED/ANSam transmission Do not change this setting, unless the
0: Disabled communication problem is caused by the
1: Enabled CED/ANSam transmission.
SM 4-49 A874
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 02
0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send T.30-
1: Standard only standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
5 Use of modem rate history for 0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials
transmission using always start from the highest modem rate.
Quick/Speed Dials 1: The machine refers to the modem rate history
0: Disabled for communications with the same machine when
1: Enabled determining the most suitable rate for the current
communication.
6 AI short protocol Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
(transmission and reception) Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
G3 Switch 03
0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the
(Echo countermeasure) same DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
1: 2 the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
line.
1 V.8 protocol in manual 0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSam
reception when starting a manual reception.
0: Disabled 1: The machine sends ANSam during manual
1: Enabled reception.
2 V.8 protocol 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
0: Disabled Note:
1: Enabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always
bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4
kbps or lower.
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
A874 4-50 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 03
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)
0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
N Transmit ≤ NRe send
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back
Service
Tables
page after receiving a before sending the next page if a negative code is
negative code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6* V.8 protocol in manual 1: The machine detects either ANSam or CED
transmission during manual transmission.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
G3 Switch 04
0 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
to threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
3 below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
SM 4-51 A874
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 05
0 Initial Tx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) transmission.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you
0 0 1 1 7.2 k need to change this for specific receivers.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected,
0 1 1 0 14.4 k V.8 protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
4 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and
to 7.2 kbps. 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these
5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting speeds.
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
G3 Switch 06
0 Initial Rx modem rate These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) reception.
3 0 0 0 1 2.4 k
0 0 1 0 4.8 k Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 1 1 7.2 k during reception.
0 1 0 0 9.6 k
0 1 0 1 12.0 k If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected,
0 1 1 0 14.4 k V.8 protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 1 1 16.8 k
1 0 0 0 19.2 k Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 k V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0 k
1 0 1 1 26.4 k
1 1 0 0 28.8 k
1 1 0 1 31.2 k
1 1 1 0 33.6 k
A874 4-52 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 06
4 Modem types available for The setting of these bits is used to inform the
to reception transmitting terminal of the available modem type
7 Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting for the machine in receive mode.
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29 disabled manually.
V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, Cross reference
V.17/V.33 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,
V.17/V33,
V.34
G3 Switch 07
0 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
to (tx mode: Internal) higher frequencies because of the length of wire
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting between the modem and the telephone
Service
Tables
0 0 None exchange.
0 1 Low Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
1 0 Medium specific receivers.
1 1 High
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
of the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error
• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Note: This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
2 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
to (rx mode: Internal) higher frequencies because of the length of wire
0 0 None exchange.
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
1 1 High of the following symptoms occurs.
• Communication error with error codes such as
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM 4-53 A874
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 07
5 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “1”.
(V.34 rx mode; External)
6- Not used Do not change the settings.
7
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09
0 ISDN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
to (tx mode: Internal) higher frequencies because of the length of wire
0 0 None exchange.
0 1 Low Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
1 0 Medium specific receivers.
1 1 High
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
• Communication error

communications.
2 ISDN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
to (rx mode: Internal) higher frequencies because of the length of wire
0 0 None exchange.
0 1 Low
1 0 Medium Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
1 1 High of the following symptoms occurs.
0-20, 0-23, etc.

communications.
4 ISDN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5 ISDN cable equalizer Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
(V.34 rx mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A874 4-54 SM
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0A
0 Maximum allowable carrier These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop
1 drop during image data time.
reception Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
4 Maximum allowable frame This bit set the maximum interval between EOL
interval during image data (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval
reception. between ECM frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is
frequent.
5 Not used Do not change the settings.
6 Reconstruction time for the When the sending terminal is controlled by a
first line in receive mode computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data
Service
and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
Tables
recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this
bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to
send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should
come within 5 s of CFR.
G3 Switch 0B
0 Protocol requirements: The machine does not automatically reset these
Europe bits for each country after a country code (System
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Switch 0F) is programmed.
1 Protocol requirements: Spain Change the required bits manually at installation.
2 Protocol requirements:
Germany
3 Protocol requirements: France
4 PTT requirements: Germany
5 PTT requirements: France
7 DTS requirements : Germany Change this bit manually if required.
SM 4-55 A874
BIT SWITCHES
G3 Switch 0C
0 Pulse dialing method P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting dialed.
0 0 Normal(P=N)
0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)
1 0 Sweden
(N+1)
1 1 Not used
G3 Switch 0D *
2 Data rate threshold during The machine changes the modulation parameters
to V.34 reception in the MPh signal to lower the initial modem rate
5 Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting during V.34 reception. If this switch is set to
0 0 0 0 Normal “0111”, the machine lowers the initial speed one
0 1 1 1 Lower by step, for example, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.
one step This switch reduces transmission time if the
1 1 1 1 Lower by machine frequently sends PPR signals during
two steps V.34 reception.
6 Not used Do not change the settings.
7 B signal detection time for Change this switch only when there are
V.34 polling transmission communication errors during V.34 polling
0: 75 ms (default setting) transmission to a machine with a Panasonic
1: 65 ms modem.
G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0F
0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
off-hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax
communication communication, change this bit to “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A874 4-56 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
4.1 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units
that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The
factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by
RAM read/write (Function 06-1), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter
programming (Function 06-2); if Function 06-2 can be used, this will be indicated in
the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is
included in the Unit column.
Service
Tables
SM 4-57 A874
NCU PARAMETERS
Address Function Unit Remarks

680400 Country code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the
country code directly into this address,
or use the decimal value to program it
using Function 06-2 (parameter 00).
Country Decimal Hex

France 00 00
Germany 01 01
UK 02 02
Italy 03 03
Austria 04 04
Belgium 05 05
Denmark 06 06
Finland 07 07
Ireland 08 08
Norway 09 09
Sweden 10 0A
Switzerland 11 0B
Portugal 12 0C
Holland 13 0D
Spain 14 0E
Israel 15 0F
USA 17 11
Asia 18 12
Hong Kong 20 14
South Africa 21 15
Australia 22 16
New Zealand 23 17
Singapore 24 18
Malaysia 25 19
China 26 1A
Taiwan 27 1B
Greece 33 21
680401 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current detection is
680402 Line current wait time disabled.
680403 Line current drop detect time Line current is not
detected if 680401
contains FF.
A874 4-58 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

680404 PSTN dial tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses
limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
680405 PSTN dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
680406 PSTN dial tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses
680407 PSTN dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
680408 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680408 contains
680409 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) FF(H), the machine
68040A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) pauses for the pause
68040B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time (address 68040D /
time 68040E).
68040C PSTN dial tone permissible drop
Italy: See Note 2.
time
68040D PSTN wait interval (LOW)
68040E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
68040F PSTN ring-back tone detection 20 ms Detection is disabled if
Service
time this contains FF.
Tables
680410 PSTN ring-back tone off detection 20 ms
time
680411 PSTN detection time for silent 20 ms
period after ring-back tone
detected (LOW)
680412 PSTN detection time for silent 20 ms
period after ring-back tone
detected (HIGH)
680413 PSTN busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses
680414 PSTN busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
680415 PSTN busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses
680416 PSTN busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
680417 PABX dial tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses
680418 PABX dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
680419 PABX dial tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses
detection is disabled.
68041A PABX dial tone frequency lower
limit (low byte)
SM 4-59 A874
NCU PARAMETERS

68041B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68041B contains FF,
68041C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
68041D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680420
68041E PABX dial tone continuous tone / 680421).
time
68041F PABX dial tone permissible drop
time
680420 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680421 PABX wait interval (LOW)
680422 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses
680423 PABX ringback tone off detection 20 ms contain FF(H), tone
time detection is disabled.
680424 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms If both addresses
period after ringback tone detected contain FF(H), tone
(LOW) detection is disabled.
680425 PABX detection time for silent 20 ms
period after ringback tone detected
(HIGH)
680426 PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) If both addresses
680427 PABX busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
680428 PABX busy tone frequency lower Hz (BCD) If both addresses
680429 PABX busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
limit (low byte)
68042A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms
68042B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68042C Busy tone ON time: range 2
68042D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68042E Busy tone ON time: range 3
68042F Busy tone OFF time: range 3
680430 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680431 Busy tone OFF time: range 4
680432 Busy tone continuous tone
detection time
A874 4-60 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

680433 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-
ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
Bit 1 0
0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always
0 1 50% be kept at 0.
1 0 25%
1 1 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680434 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses
upper limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
680435 International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
upper limit (low byte)
680436 International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses
lower limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
680437 International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
lower limit (low byte)
Service
680438 International dial tone detection 20 ms If 680438 contains FF,
Tables
time the machine pauses for
680439 International dial tone reset time the pause time (68043D
(LOW) / 68043E).
68043A International dial tone reset time
(HIGH) Belgium: See Note 2.
68043B International dial tone continuous
tone time
68043C International dial tone permissible
drop time
68043D International dial wait interval
(HIGH)
68043E International dial wait interval
(LOW)
68043F Country dial tone upper frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses
limit (HIGH) contain FF(H), tone
680440 Country dial tone upper frequency detection is disabled.
limit (LOW)
680441 Country dial tone lower frequency If both addresses
limit (HIGH) contain FF(H), tone
680442 Country dial tone lower frequency detection is disabled.
limit (LOW)
SM 4-61 A874
NCU PARAMETERS

680443 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 680443 contains FF,
680444 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
680445 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) the pause time (680448
/ 680449).
680446 Country dial tone continuous tone
time
680447 Country dial tone permissible drop
time
680448 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
680449 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
68044A Time between opening or closing 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
the DO relay and opening the Function 06-2
OHDI relay (parameter 11).
68044B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
Function 06-2
(parameter 12).
68044C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.
Function 06-2
(parameter 13).
68044D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
closure and DO relay opening or Function 06-2
closing (parameter 14).
This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
68044E Minimum pause between dialed 20 ms See Note 3 and 8.
digits (pulse dial mode) Function 06-2
(parameter 15).
68044F Time waited when a pause is Function 06-2
entered at the operation panel (parameter 16). See
Note 3.
680450 DTMF tone on time 1 ms Function 06-2
(parameter 17).
680451 DTMF tone off time Function 06-2
(parameter 18).
680452 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 –3.5 Function 06-2
signals while dialing dBm (parameter 19).
See Note 5.
680453 Tone attenuation value difference -dBm x 0.5 Function 06-2
between high frequency tone and (parameter 20).
low frequency tone in DTMF The setting must be less
signals than –5dBm, and should
not exceed the setting
at 680452h above.
See Note 5.
680454 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation -N x 0.5 –3.5 Function 06-2
level after dialing dBm (parameter 21). See
Note 5.
A874 4-62 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

680455 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialing
680456 Not used Do not change the
settings.
680457 Time between 68044Dh (NCU 1 ms This parameter takes
parameter 14) and 68044Eh (NCU effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
setting.
680459 Grounding time (ground start 20 ms The Gs relay is closed
mode) for this interval.
68045A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open
for this interval.
68045B International dial access code BCD For a code of 100:
(High) 68045B - F1
68045C International dial access code 68045C - 00
(Low)
68045D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for
each pause input after
the PSTN access code.
Service
Tables
If this address contains
FF[H], the pause time
stored in address
68044F is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
68045E Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm
cadence detection enable flags 0 0 0 -25.0
0 0 1 -35.0
0 1 0 -30.0
1 0 0 -40.0
1 1 0 -49.0
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68045F Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680464
680465 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:
680466 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680465 - FF
680466 - F0
to settings.
680471
SM 4-63 A874
NCU PARAMETERS

680472 Acceptable ringing signal 1000/ N Function 06-2
frequency: range 1, upper limit (Hz). (parameter 02).
680473 Acceptable ringing signal Function 06-2
frequency: range 1, lower limit (parameter 03).
frequency: range 2, upper limit (parameter 04).
frequency: range 2, lower limit (parameter 05).
680476 Number or rings until a call is 1 Function 06-2
detected (parameter 06).
The setting must not be
zero.
680477 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note 4.
ring Function 06-2
(parameter 07).
680478 Minimum required length of the 20 ms Function 06-2
second and subsequent rings (parameter 06-2).
680479 Ringing signal detection reset time 20 ms Function 06-2
(LOW) (parameter 09).
68047A Ringing signal detection reset time Function 06-2
(HIGH) (parameter 10).
68047B Not used Do not change the
to settings.
680480
680481 Interval between dialing the last 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
digit and switching the Oh relay
over to the external telephone
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.
680482 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3 2 Setting
0 0 200 ms
0 1 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

to settings.
6804A0
A874 4-64 SM
NCU PARAMETERS

6804A1 Acceptable CED detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
6804A2 Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
frequency upper limit (low byte)
6804A3 Acceptable CED detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses
frequency lower limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
6804A4 Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
frequency lower limit (low byte)
6804A5 CED detection time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
± 20 ms
6804A6 Acceptable CNG detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
6804A7 Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
frequency upper limit (low byte)
6804A8 Acceptable CNG detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses
frequency lower limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone
6804A9 Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
frequency lower limit (low byte)
6804AA Not used Do not change the
Service
Tables
setting.
6804AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6804AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms
6804AD Number of CNG cycles required for The data is coded in the
detection same way as address
680433.
6804AE Not used Do not change the
settings.
6804AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz (BCD) If both addresses
(800Hz) detection frequency upper contain FF(H), tone
limit (high byte) detection is disabled.
6804B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
6804B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD) If both addresses
(800Hz) detection frequency lower contain FF(H), tone
limit (high byte) detection is disabled.
6804B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone
(800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
6804B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6804B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm Function 06-2
(parameter 01).
6804B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6804B4 - 0.5N 6804B5 –3.5 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6804B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6804B4 - 0.5N 6804B6 –3 (dB)
level See Note 7.
6804B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
SM 4-65 A874
NCU PARAMETERS

6804B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6804B7 - 0.5N 6804B8 (dB)
level
6804B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6804B7 - 0.5N 6804B9 (dB)
level
6804BA ISDN: Tx level from the modem - dBm The setting must be
between -12dBm and -
15dBm.
6804BB ISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6804BA - 0.5N 6804BB (dB)
level
6804BC ISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N 6804BA - 0.5N 6804BC (dB)
level
6804BD Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N
signal detection level) (dBm)
6804BE Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6804C6
6804C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.
Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6804C8 Not used Do not change the
to settings.
6804D9
6804DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
6804E0 Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s 1: Maximum wait time
bit 3 message 1: 30 s for post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can
be changed to 30 s.
Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
A874 4-66 SM
NCU PARAMETERS
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68045E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are
changed.
680408 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680438 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address
680433.
68040B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68043B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68040C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68043C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68044A to 68044F) are the values for 10
pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
Service
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time
Tables
specified by this parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680452/680454–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680455 dBm
Low frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680452/680454 + N680453) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680455 + N680453) dBm
NOTE: N680452, for example, means the value stored in address 680452(H)
6. 68044A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening.
68044D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing.
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI
short protocol) refer to the setting at 6804B5h. Tones which frequency is higher
than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6804B6h.
8. 68044A, 68044D, 68044E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the
sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68044A, 68044D, and
68044E.
SM 4-67 A874
DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
4.2 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable
parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience
problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and
adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be
described.
4.2.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
1. Make sure the machine is in “Facsimile” mode. Press “User Tools” key then
choose “Fax”.
2. Press ., then either choose “Registering Quick Dial” or “Registering Speed
Dial”.
Example: Change the Parameters in Quick Dial 10.
3. Press Quick Dial key 10.
NOTE: The selected Quick or Speed Dial must be programmed beforehand.
4. When the programmed dial number is displayed, press S - V - C using Quick
Dial keys, then press “Start”.
5. The settings for byte 0 are now displayed. Press a number from 0 to 7
corresponding to the bit that you wish to change.
Example: Change bit 7 to 1: Press 7
6. To scroll through the parameter bytes, either:
Select the next byte: press “↓ Switch”
or
Select the previous byte: press “↑ Switch” until the correct byte is displayed.
Then go back to step 5.
7. After the setting is changed, press OK.
8. To finish, press “User Tools”.
A874 4-68 SM
4.2.2 PARAMETERS
The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are
disabled.
Switch 01
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 02
0 Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal
to Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting often contains errors, the signal level may be
Service
Tables
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 0 1 -1 communications with that terminal until the results
0 0 0 1 0 -2 are better.
0 0 0 1 1 -3
0 0 1 0 0 -4 If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01
: setting is used.
:
0 1 1 1 1 -15 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled left.
5 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at
to Bit 7 6 5 Setting higher frequencies because of the length of wire
7 0 0 0 None between the modem and the telephone exchange
0 0 1 Low when calling the number stored in this
0 1 0 Medium Quick/Speed Dial.
0 1 1 High
1 1 1 Disabled Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the

left.
If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is

used.
SM 4-69 A874
Switch 03
0 Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always
to Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too
3 0 0 0 0 Not used high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using
0 0 0 1 2,400 these bits.
0 0 1 0 4,800
0 0 1 1 7,200 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit
0 1 0 0 9,600 4 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12,000
0 1 1 0 14,400 Note: Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 16,800 left.
1 0 0 0 19,200
1 0 0 1 21,600 If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 1 0 24,000 used.
1 0 1 1 26,400
1 1 0 0 28,800
1 1 0 1 31,200
1 1 1 0 33,600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used

6 AI short protocol Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile
0: Off Manual for details about AI Short Protocol.
1: Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 04
0 Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for
1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed
0 0 Inch-mm copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
conversion that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available
0 1 Inch only If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
2 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
to Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
3 0 0 First DIS or transmission. The machine will then wait for the
NSF second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
0 1 Second DIS or
NSF If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
1 0 Not used used.
1 1 Disabled
A874 4-70 SM
Switch 04
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always
0: Off end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34
protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
used.
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
in transmit mode informed to the other terminal during
0: MH only transmission.
1: Disabled If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is
used.
6 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
0 0 Off the (0, 0) setting.
0 1 On Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG
1 0 Not used compression are automatically disabled if ECM is
1 1 Disabled disabled.
Service
used.
Tables
Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 07 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required

0 Data rate If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting G4 parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1) is used.
3 0 0 0 0 64 kbps
0 0 0 1 56 kbps
1 1 1 1 Disabled

0 Link modulus If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of
to Bits 3 2 1 0 Setting G4 parameter switch 3 (bit 0) is used.
3 0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled
SM 4-71 A874

0 Layer 3 protocol If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of
3 0 0 0 0 ISO 8208
0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL
1 1 1 1 Disabled
4 Packet modulus If the setting is “Disabled”, the current setting of
7 0 0 0 0 Modulo 8
0 0 0 1 Modulo 128
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Switch 0A - Not used
A874 4-72 SM
SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
4.3 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION
Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)

680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680040 to 68004F(H) - Scanner bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
Service
Tables
6800C0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00)
Bit 0: Stamp home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 1 to 3: Scanning contrast home position
Bit 3 2 1 Setting
0 0 0 Automatic
0 0 1 Position 1 (Lightest)
0 1 0 Position 2
0 1 1 Position 3 (Medium)
1 0 0 Position 4
1 0 1 Position 5 (Darkest)
Bits 4 and 5: Scanning resolution home position
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 5 4 Setting
0 0 Standard
0 1 Detail
1 0 Superfine
1 1 Superfine
Bit 6: Transmission mode home position
0: Memory tx, 1: Immediate tx
Bit 7: Not used
SM 4-73 A874
6800C1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01)

Bit 0: Label insertion home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: ID transmission home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Automatic reduction (tx) home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 3 and 4: Scanning mode LED home position
Bit 4 3 Setting
0 0 Text
0 1 Text/ Photo
1 0 Photo
1 1 Special Original (See the note below)
Note: The “Special Original” setting is not explained in the Operator’s Manual,
because it can be selected only if System Switch 19 – bit 7 is set to “1”.
Bit 5: TTI print home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: TTI used for broadcasting; the TTI selected with this switch is used for all
destinations during broadcasting.
0: TTI_1, 1: TTI_2
Note: System Switch 11 bit 3 must be set to “1” to enable this switch.
Bit 7: Settings return to home position after scanning 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 7: Not used
6800C3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report
printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
A874 4-74 SM
6800C4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report

printout)
Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 1 to 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages
(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2 1 Setting
0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.
0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
1 1 The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Restricted Access using personal codes 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Allow document with mixed paper sizes in the ADF 0: No, 1: Yes
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Service
Tables
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: G3/G4 LED home position 0: G3, 1: G4
Bits 2 and 3: Not used
Bit 4: Quick dial label print format
0: Suitable for white paper, 1: Suitable for transparent paper
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission
0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left page
Bit 7: Not used
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature
are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature
are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
SM 4-75 A874
6800CA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)

Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
6800CB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the “Tone” mark over an ISDN line
0: UUI, 1: Tone
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit
6800CC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C)
6800CD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D)
Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 PSTN
0 1 Loop start
1 0 Ground start
1 1 Flash start
Bit 5: Action when receiving a SETUP signal containing no called number and the
G4 subscriber number was programmed in this machine.
0: Respond to the call, 1: Do not respond to the call
Bit 6: Action when the received HLC (Higher Level Capabilities) is Tel or BC
(Bearer Capabilities) is Speech.
0: Do not respond to the call, 1: Respond to the call
This switch determines which information transfer capabilities the machine can
accept when receiving a call.
1: When the received HLC is Tel (digital telephone) or BC is Speech (voice), the
machine responds to the call. In short, the machine receives every call.
This switch is useful for communication problems when the other terminal informs
the above transfer capabilities although it is a fax machine.
Bit 7: Not used
A874 4-76 SM
6800CE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)

Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Timer mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer
/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)
0: Off, 1: On
6800CF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2 1 0 Setting
0 0 1 1st paper feed station
0 1 0 2nd paper feed station
0 1 1 3rd paper feed station
1 0 0 4th paper feed station
1 0 1 LCT
Other settings Not used
Service
Tables
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800D0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size
paper is not available.
0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800D1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is
selected for broadcasting
0:Not needed, 1: Needed
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
SM 4-77 A874

Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheet
finisher)
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into PSTN and G4 (ISDN) communications
Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified
cassette selection feature becomes empty.
0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.
1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not
specified by this feature.
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx
0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-
scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports
0: Off, 1: On
Bits 6 and 7: Line type selection for printing out to the one-bin tray (messages
coming in on other lines do not go to the one-bin tray)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0 0 Disabled
0 1 PSTN
1 0 Not used
1 1 ISDN
A874 4-78 SM

Bit 0: PC transmission mode
0: Direct Tx, 1: Memory Tx
Bit 1: Addition of fax TTI during PC memory transmission
Bit 2: Checkered mark on printouts during PC printing
Bit 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Communication port for PC memory transmission
0: PSTN (the line used depends on bit 4), 1: ISDN G4
Bits 6 and 7: Buffer threshold for PC direct transmission
Keep this bit at “0,0” in most cases.
Bit 7 Bit 6 setting
0 0 Minimum (default)
0 1 :
1 0 :
1 1 Maximum
Service
Tables
SM 4-79 A874

Bit 0: PC fax reception 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bits 1 and 2: PC fax reception mode
Bit 2 Bit 1 Setting
0 0 Direct rx
0 1 Memory rx
1 0 Not used
1 1 Memory rx and print on the fax machine
Bit 3: Automatic reduction when the machine transfers data to the PC from the
machine. This switch is effective only for PC memory rx.
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 4 and 5: Scan density for the “Light” setting.
(This switch is effective only when a PC scanner application with the CMF-TWAIN
driver is used.)
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 Level 1 (default)
0 1 Level 1
1 0 Level 2
Other settings Level1
Bits 6 and 7: Scan density for the “Dark” setting.
(This switch is effective only when a PC scanner application with the CMF-TWAIN
driver is used.)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
0 0 Level 5 (default)
0 1 Level 4
1 0 Level 5
Other settings Level 5
6800D7(H) – User Parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17)
A874 4-80 SM

Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)
Bit 1 0 Setting
0 0 File retention impossible
0 1 24 hours
1 0 File retention impossible
1 1 72 hours
Bit 4: RDS operation
0: Not acceptable
1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
Note: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
Bit 7: Daylight saving time 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 26 (SWUSR_1A)
Bit 0: Not used
Service
Tables
Bit 1: PSTN Dialing type 0: Pulse dialing (10 pps), 1: Tone (DTMF) dialing
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 27 (SWUSR_1B)
PSTN-1 access code from behind a PABX
Access number Hex value to program (BCD)
0 F0
Ø Ø
0 F0
00 00
Ø Ø
99 99
6800DC(H) to 6800DF - User parameter switch 28 to 31 (SWUSR_1C to 1F)
6800E0 to 6800EF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches
(Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)
6800F0 to 68010F(H) - G4 Internal Switches
(Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)
680110 to 68011E(H) - Service station’s fax number (Service mode 09)
See 68027C(H) for the type of network used for this number.
SM 4-81 A874
68011F to 68012D(H) - Own fax PABX extension number

68012E to 68013C(H) - Own fax number (PSTN)
68013D to 68014B(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4)
68014C to 68015A(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3)
68015B to 680169(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3)
68016A to 680178(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4)
680179 to 680187(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4)
680188 to 68019B(H) - PSTN RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the
following note.
6801B0 to 6801EF(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following
note.
6801F0 to 680229(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
680230 to 680243(H) - PSTN CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
680258 to 68026B(H) - ISDN G3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68026C(H) - Number of PSTN CSI characters (Hex)
68026E(H) - Number of ISDN G3 CSI characters (Hex)
NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for
TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.
680270(H) - ID code (low - Hex)
680271(H) - ID code (high - Hex)
680272(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)
680273(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)
68027C(H) - Network type used for the service station number
0 0 (H) - PSTN
0 D (H) - G4
680280 to 680287(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680280(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),
02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680281(H) - Year (BCD)
680282(H) - Month (BCD)
680283(H) - Day (BCD)
680284(H) - Hour
680285(H) - Minute
680286(H) - Second
680287(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday
680294(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bits 0 to 2: EXMEM board 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: EXFUNC board 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
A874 4-82 SM

Bit 0: EXFUNC board 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: Not used 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6: ISDN unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 7: PC Fax Expander unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 0: Paper tray unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: Bypass Tray 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 2: LCT 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 3: Duplex unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 4: 1-bin sorter 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: Finisher 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6: Bridge unit 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 7: Not used

Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Document feeder 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 2: Not used
Service
Tables
Bit 3: Stamp unit
Bit 4: Copier Feature Expander
6802CC to 6802E3(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)
6802FD to 680300(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address
680301 to 680304(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address
680305 to 680309(H) - CiG4 board ROM information (Read only)
680305(H) - Suffix
680306(H) - Version (BCD)
680307(H) - Year (BCD)
680308(H) - Month (BCD)
680309(H) - Day (BCD)
680314 to 680319(H) - Modem ROM version (Read only)
680314(H) - Part number (low)
680315(H) - Part number (high)
680316(H) - Control (low)
680317(H) - Control (high)
680318(H) - DSP (low)
680319(H) - DSP (high)
68037E(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
68037F(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
68039A(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68039B(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68039C(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68039D(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68039E(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
SM 4-83 A874
6803A1 to 6803A5(H) - Periodic service call parameters

Call interval: 01 through 15 month(s) (BCD) 6803A1
00: Periodic service call disabled
Date and time of the next call Day: 01 through 31 (BCD) 6803A4
Hour: 01 through 24 (BCD) 6803A5
6803AB to 6803AD(H) - Effective term of automatic service calls

Year: last two digits of the year (BCD) 6803AB
Month: 01 through 12 (BCD) 6803AC
Day: 01 through 31 (BCD) 6803AD
680400 to 6804E0(H) - NCU parameters (Refer to section 4.3 for details)

680DC8 to 680DEF(H) - SC codes NOT for automatic service call
If the fax unit receives a copier engine SC code other than those programmed in
these addresses, the fax unit sends an automatic service call report to the
programmed service station.
Six SC codes have already been programmed at default, as shown in the table
below. Fourteen more SC codes can be programmed, if required (if an address
contains FF(H), a code is not programmed in it).
Program a SC code in four-digit BCD format as shown in the example below.
Example 1: SC code “329”
Address (High) - 03 (BCD)
Address (Low) - 29 (BCD)
Wildcard characters “a” or “A” can be used to specify a series of SC codes.
Example 2: SC code “900 to 999”
Address (High) – 09 (BCD)
Address (Low) – aa or AA (Hex)
Example 3: SC code “330 to 339”
Address (High) – 03 (BCD)
Address (Low) – 3a or 3A (Hex)
- Default settings -
High Address (H) Data (BCD) Low Address (L) Data (BCD) SC code
680DC8 03 680DC9 29 329
680DCA 03 680DCB 61 361
680DCC 03 680DCD 65 365
680DCE 05 680DCF 48 548
680DD0 06 680DD1 30 630
680DD2 09 680DD3 AA 900 to 999
680DD4 680DD5 Not Programmed
to FF(H) to FF(H)
680DEE 680DEF
A874 4-84 SM
68849C to 688B9B(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick Dial 01 - 56.

There are 32 bytes for each Quick Dial. Only the 23rd to 32nd bytes are used.
6884B2 to 6884BB(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 01
6884D2 to 6884DB(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 02
6884F2 to 6884FB(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 03
Ø
688B92 to 688B9B(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 56
688B9C to 68981B(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed Dial #00 - #99.
There are 32 bytes for each Speed Dial. Only the 23rd to 32nd bytes are used.
688BB2 to 688BBB(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #00
688BD2 to 688BDB(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #01
688BF2 to 688BFB(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #02
Ø
689812 to 68981B(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #99
68E8E4 to 68E8E5(H) - Line type change (refer to section 2 for more details)
68E8E4(H) - Current line type setting
68E8E5(H) - New line type settings
Service
Tables
SM 4-85 A874
69CA00 to 69CBFF(H) - Latest 64 error codes (Read only)

One error record consists of 8 bytes of data.
First error record start address – 69CA00(H)
Second error record start address – 69CA08(H)
Third error record start address – 69CA10(H)
:
64th error record start address – 69CBF8(H)
The format is as follows:
1st byte - Minute (BCD)
2nd byte - Hour (BCD)
3rd byte - Day (BCD)
4th byte - Month (BCD)
5th byte - Error code – low (BCD) [If the error code is 1-23, 23 is stored here.]
6th byte - Error code – high (BCD) [If the error code is 1-23, 01 is stored here.]
7th byte - Communication line (Hex)
PSTN: 00(H), PABX: 02(H), ISDN G3: 0C(H), ISDN G4: 0D(H)
8th byte - Not used
69E134 to 69E813(H) - Latest 20 error communication records (Read only)
One error communication record consists of 88 bytes. The format is as follows:
1st byte - Header
Bit 0: Communication result 0: OK, 1: NG
Bit 1: Document jam 1: Occurred
Bit 2: Power down 1: Occurred
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Technical data printout instead of personal codes 0: No, 1: Yes
Bit 5: Type of technical data 0: Rx level, 1: Measure of error rate
Bit 6: Error report 0: Not printed, 1: Printed
Bit 7: Data validity 0: Not valid, 1: Valid
2nd byte - Not used
3rd to 6th bytes - Date and time when the communication started
3rd byte - Month (BCD)
4th byte - Day (BCD)
5th byte - Hour (BCD)
6th byte - Minute (BCD)
7th and 8th bytes - Communication time
7th byte - Minutes (BCD)
8th byte - Seconds (BCD)
9th and 10th bytes - Number of pages transmitted or received
9th byte - Low byte (Hex)
10th byte - High byte (Hex)
A874 4-86 SM
11th and 12th bytes - Personal code or number of total/burst error lines
If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 0:
11th byte - Personal code (low - BCD)
12th byte - Personal code (high - BCD)
11th byte - Number of total error lines (Hex)
12th byte - Number of burst error lines (Hex)
13th byte - File number (low - Hex)
14th byte - File number (high - Hex)
15th and 16th bytes - Rx level or a measure of the error rate
15th byte - Rx level (low - Hex)
16th byte - Rx level (high - Hex)
15th byte - Measure of error rate (low - Hex)
16th byte - Measure of error rate (high - Hex)
17th byte - Final modem rate
Bits 0 to 3: Final modem speed
Service
Tables
 Bit 0  1   0 1   0 1   0 1 
               
 Bit1   0  1  1   0  0 1  1 
 Bit 2 = 0 : 2.4 k 0 : 4.8 k 0 : 7.2 k1 : 9.6 k1 : 12.0 k1 : 14.4 k1 : 16.8 k
               
 Bit 3   0   0 0  0  0  0 0
 Bit 0   0  1   0 1  0 1   0
               
 Bit1   0  0 1  1  0  0 1 
=
 Bit 2   0  : 19.2 k 0 : 21.6 k  0 : 24.0 k 0 : 26.4 k 1  : 28.8 k 1  : 31.2 k 1 : 33.6 k
               
 Bit 3  1  1  1  1  1  1  1 
Bits 4 to 6: Final modem type
 Bit 4  1  0 1   0 1 
           
 Bit 5   0  1  1   0  0
=
 Bit 6   0  :V.27ter 0 :V.290 :V.331  : V.17 (Long)1 :V.17 (Short)
           
 Bit 7   0  0 0  0  0
 Bit 4  1   0 1   0 1 
           
 Bit 5   0  V .34 1  V .34 1  V .34  0  V .34  0  V .34
 Bit 6 = 0 :2400 baud  0 :3000 baud  0 : 3200 baud 1 : 2800 baud 1 :3429 baud
           
 Bit 7  1  1  1  1  1 
18th to 20th byte - Not used
21st to 44th byte - Remote terminal’s ID (RTI, TSI or CSI) (ASCII)
SM 4-87 A874
45th byte - Communication mode #1

Bits 0 - 1: Network
 Bit 0  1   0
 = :PSTN  :ISDN
 Bit1   0  1 
Bit 2: Communication protocol 0: G3, 1: G4
Bit 3: ECM 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 4 to 7: Communication mode used
46th byte - Communication mode #2

Bit 0: Tx or Rx 0: Tx, 1: Rx
Bit 1: Reduction during Tx 0: Not reduced, 1: Reduced
Bit 2: Batch transmission 0: Not used, 1: Used
Bit 3: Send later transmission 0: Not used, 1: Used
Bit 4: Transmission from 0: ADF, 1: Memory
47th byte - Not used
48th byte - Number of errors during communication (Hex)
49th to 52nd byte - 1st error code and page number where the error occurred
49th byte - Page number where the error occurred (low - Hex)
50th byte - Page number where the error occurred (high - Hex)
51st byte - Error code (low - BCD)
52nd byte - Error code (high - BCD)
53rd to 56th byte - 2nd error code and page number where the error occurred
57th to 60th byte - 3rd error code and page number where the error occurred
61st to 64th byte - 4th error code and page number where the error occurred
65th to 68th byte - 5th error code and page number where the error occurred
69th to 72nd byte - 6th error code and page number where the error occurred
73rd to 76th byte - 7th error code and page number where the error occurred
81st to 84th byte - 9th error code and page number where the error occurred
A874 4-88 SM
7644F0 to 76B56F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed Dial #100 - #999, when
the optional EXFUNC board is installed.
There are 32 bytes for each Speed Dial. Only the 23rd to 32nd bytes are used.
764506 to 76450F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #100
Ø
76B566 to 76B56F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #999
Service
Tables
SM 4-89 A874
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
• Flash/SRAM data copy tool (P/N: A1939353)
• Flash Memory Card – 4MB (P/N: A2309352)
• Card Case (P/N: A2309351)
5.2 PM TABLE
No PM necessary for the fax option.
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 5-1 A874
PRECAUTION

6.1 PRECAUTION
CAUTION
Before starting disassembly, be sure to print all message files in the SAF
memory. Then, turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power
cord and telephone cable for safety.
Lithium Battery
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
6.2 NCU AND SPEAKER

NOTE: If the machine has an optional finisher and/or a mailbox installed, remove
it/them before starting the following procedure.
[C]
[A] [B]
Replacement
Adjustment
A874R502.WMF
A874R501.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover and the left side cover (4 screws each).
2. Remove the NCU/speaker assembly [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the NCU [B] (4 screws) and speaker [C] (2 screws) from the assembly.
SM 6-1 A874
FCU
6.3 FCU
6.3.1 REMOVAL
NOTE: If the machine has an optional finisher and/or a mailbox installed, remove
it/them before starting the following procedure.
[A]
[B]
A874R503.WMF
1. Remove the rear cover and the left side cover (4 screws each).
2. Remove the FCU bracket [A] (4 screws), then the FCU [B] (2 connectors).
3. Go to one of the following procedures:
• To restore SRAM data from the old FCU (if you do not have the latest data
backup) – Go to section 6.3.2.
• To restore SRAM data from a flash memory card backup – Go to section
6.3.3.
6.3.2 SRAM DATA RESTORE FROM FCU

Before restoring the SRAM data, install a new FCU and initialize the SRAM on the
new FCU using the following procedure.
1. Install a new FCU in the machine (see section 6.3.1)
NOTE: Do not install the EXFUNC and EXMEM yet, if they were present.
2. Turn on the machine. The machine displays “SC1201”.
NOTE: The machine always displays “SC1201” the first time the FCU is
installed. Please ignore it.
3. Press OK to initialize the SRAM.
Then, restore the SRAM using the following procedure.
A874 6-2 SM
FCU
4. Turn off the machine.

5. Connect the data copy tool [A] with the
old FCU [B] to the card slot as shown.
See the note below for the switch [A]
settings.
[B]
IMPORTANT: Support the old FCU

by hand from now until the end of the
download procedure
SW3: OFF
OFF
A874R506.WMF
NOTE: 1) The switch on the data copy tool must be OFF.

2) SW3 below the card slot must be OFF (lower position).
3) Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1) on the old FCU.
6. Turn on the machine, and enter the
fax service mode.
7. Press . 3 then /.
A874R511.BMP
8. Press ..
Replacement
Adjustment
A874R512.TIF
If the switch settings are correct,

the message on the right appears.
Then go to the next step.
A874R513.TIF
If the one of the switch settings is

wrong, or if the tool is not
connected correctly, the message
on the right appears. Then turn off
the machine and retry the
procedure. A874R514.BMP
SM 6-3 A874
FCU
9. Press “#” then !.

If data has been restored successfully,
the message on the right appears.
10. Turn off the main power switch then A874R515.TIF
disconnect the tools.

11. Install the EXFUNC and EXMEM if they were present.
12. Turn the machine back on.
13. Print the system parameter list to check if the previous settings have been
successfully recovered.
6.3.3 SRAM DATA RESTORE FROM FLASH CARD BACKUP

SRAM data can be copied to a flash memory card. For how to do this, refer to
section 6.4.3.
Before restoring the SRAM data, install a new FCU and initialize the SRAM on the
new FCU using the following procedure.
1. Install a new FCU in the machine (see section 6.3.1).
2. Turn on the machine. The machine displays “SC1201”.
NOTE: The machine always displays “SC1201” the first time the FCU is
installed. Please ignore it.
3. Press OK to initialize the SRAM.
Then, restore the SRAM using the

following procedure.
4. Turn off the machine. [A]
NOTE: If the EXFUNC board was
present; make sure that the
backup of EXFUNC and FCU
SRAM is available, then install
the EXFUNC.
If this backup is not available,
restore the data from the old
FCU. After restoring, connect
the EXSAF to the new FCU.
SW3: OFF
5. Connect the flash memory card [A] to A874R505.WMF
the card slot as shown.
See the note below for the switch settings.
NOTE: 1) SW3 below the card slot must be OFF (lower position).
2) If the switch setting is wrong, the fax function will not start up.
6. Turn on the machine, and enter the fax service mode.
A874 6-4 SM
FCU
A874R511.BMP
8. Press 0.
If the switch settings are correct, either of the messages below appears.
A874R517.BMP A874R516.BMP
Refer to the table below for which type of backup must be used, depending on
the presence of EXFUNC.
Type of backup
EXFUNC FCU SRAM FCU and EXFUNC SRAM
Not present OK Do not use.
Present Do not use. OK
9. Press either of the following:

. – Standard SRAM only
A874R518.BMP
/ – Standard SRAM and SRAM on

the EXFUNC.
Replacement
Adjustment
A874R519.BMP
10. Press “S” then !; a confirmation

message appears.
A874R520.BMP
11. Press Start to restore the SRAM.

If data has been restored
successfully, the message on the right
appears.
A874R521.BMP
SM 6-5 A874
FCU
12. Turn off the main power switch then disconnect the card.
14. Print the system parameter list to check if the previous settings have been
successfully recovered.
A874 6-6 SM
ROM UPDATE
6.4 ROM UPDATE

6.4.1 FCU ROM DOWNLOAD
This function updates the FCU ROM using a flash memory card.
NOTE: The flash memory card must be programmed with FCU ROM data as
explained in section 6.6.
1. Turn off the machine and remove the bracket [A].
[A] [B]
SW3: ON
A874R504.WMF
2. Connect the flash memory card [B] to the card slot as shown.
NOTE: SW3 below the card slot must be ON (upper position).
Replacement
3. Turn on the machine and enter the fax service mode.
4. Press . 3 then .. Adjustment
5. Press .. A874R522.BMP
If the switch setting is correct, the

message on the right appears.
A874R523.BMP
SM 6-7 A874
ROM UPDATE
If the switch setting is wrong, or if the

tool is not connected correctly, the
message on the right appears. Then
turn off the machine and retry the
procedure again.
A874R524.BMP
6. Press OK, then check the ROM

version.
If the card does not contain FCU ROM
data, “Please check flash card”
appears. Turn off the machine and
retry the procedure with the correct A874R525.BMP
card.
7. Press Start.
A874R526.BMP
After the machine updates the ROM

data, the message on the right
appears.
8. Turn off the main power switch then A874R527.BMP

disconnect the flash memory card.
10. Print the system parameter list to check if the new ROM version is printed.
A874 6-8 SM
ROM UPDATE
6.4.2 FCU ROM UPLOAD

This function makes a copy of the FCU ROM inside the machine onto a flash
memory card.
NOTE: This procedure erases the flash memory card completely before uploading
ROM data.
[A] [B]
SW3: OFF
A874R505.WMF

NOTE: SW3 below the card slot must be OFF (lower position).
4. Press . 3 then ..
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Press /.
If the switch setting is correct, the
message on the right appears.
If the switch setting is wrong, or if the

tool is not connected correctly, the
message on the right appears. Then
turn off the machine and retry the
procedure.
SM 6-9 A874
ROM UPDATE
6. Press OK, then check the ROM

version.
A874R529.BMP
7. Press Start.
A874R530.BMP
After the machine updates the ROM

data, the message on the right
appears.
A874R531.BMP
8. Turn off the main power switch then disconnect the flash memory card.
A874 6-10 SM
ROM UPDATE
6.4.3 SRAM BACKUP TO A FLASH MEMORY CARD

This function makes a backup copy of all the fax SRAM data onto a flash memory
card. If a computer based PC card writer system is available, the backup can be
saved as a computer file from the flash memory card.
If the EXSAF board is not installed, this function makes a backup copy of the
standard SRAM on the FCU.
If the EXSAF board is installed, this function makes a backup copy of the standard
SRAM and the SRAM on the optional EXSAF board.
NOTE: This procedure erases the flash memory card completely before uploading
SRAM data.
[A] [B]
SW3: OFF
A874R505.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
NOTE: SW3 below the card slot must be OFF (lower position).
SM 6-11 A874
ROM UPDATE
A874R511.BMP
5. Press /.
A874R533.BMP
6. Press Start.
A874R534.BMP
After the machine backs up the data to
the flash card, the message on the
right appears.
A874R535.BMP
7. Turn off the main power switch then

disconnect the flash memory card.
8. Turn the machine back on
The data in the flash card can be copied to a PC for safe keeping. This data can
then be uploaded from the PC to a flash memory card if the SRAM data has to be
restored later.
Refer to the SwapFTL manual for details.
A874 6-12 SM
DATA ADDRESS RANGES ON THE CARD
6.5 DATA ADDRESS RANGES ON THE CARD

The following sections show how ROM and RAM data must be programmed before
downloading, or how data is uploaded onto the 4MB flash memory card.
6.5.1 FCU AND BICU ROM DATA

[Hex] Copy only Fax only [Hex]
4MB 3FFFFF 3FFFFF
200000 200000
2MB
1FFFFF 1FFFFF
Fax
(FCU)
Copy
(BICU)
000000 000000
Start Address (Hex) 0 0

Length (Hex) 200000 300000
Size (kB) 2,000 (2MB) 3,000 (3MB)
A874R550.WMF
6.5.2 MODEM ROM AND SRAM DATA
SRAM SRAM
[Hex] [Hex]
(FCU) (FCU+EXSAF)
4MB 3FFFFF 3FFFFF
Replacement
Adjustment
200000 200000
2MB
1FFFFF 1FFFFF
0A0000 h
SRAM
020000 h (FCU+EXFUNC)
SRAM (FCU)
000000 000000
Start Address (Hex) 0 0

Length (Hex) 20000 A0000
Size (kB) 256 128+512
A874R551.WMF
SM 6-13 A874
TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to
fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the
error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00 DIS/NSF not detected • Check the line connection.
within 40 s of Start being • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
pressed • The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad
line.
0-01 DCN received • The other party is out of paper or has a
unexpectedly jammed printer.
• The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the • The other terminal is incompatible.
other end
0-04 CFR or FTT not received • Check the line connection.
after modem training • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
• Try changing the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• Replace the FCU or NCU.
• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
• If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may
be a bad line.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-05 Unsuccessful after modem • Check the line connection.
training at 2400 bps • Check the NCU - FCU connectors.
shooting
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable

Trouble-
equalizer.
• Check for line problems.
Cross reference
• See error code 0-04.
SM 7-1 A874
ERROR CODES

0-06 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
reply to DCS • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other end may be defective or
incompatible; try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
0-07 No post-message • Check the line connection.
response from the other • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
end after a page was sent • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
• The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
• Check for a bad line.
• The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or • Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
because there were too • Replace the NCU or FCU.
many errors
• The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
settings.
• The other end may have a defective
modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
• Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4
0-14 Non-standard post • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
message response code • Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
received sending to another machine.
• Noisy line: resend.
settings.
Cross reference
A874 7-2 SM
ERROR CODES

0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
capable of specific following functions, or the other terminal’s
functions. memory is full.
• Confidential rx
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected • Check the line connection.
after modem training in • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
confidential or transfer • Replace the NCU or FCU.
mode
settings.
• The other end may have disconnected, or it
may be defective; try calling another machine.
• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Cross reference
0-17 Communication was If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
interrupted by pressing the keeps occurring, replace the operation panel.
Stop key.
0-20 Facsimile data not received • Check the line connection.
within 6 s of retraining • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the
first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) • Check the connections between the FCU,
from the other end not NCU, & line.
received within 5 s of the • Check for line noise or other line problems.
previous EOL signal • Replace the NCU or FCU.
• The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
• Maximum interval between EOLs and between
shooting
Trouble-
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
SM 7-3 A874
ERROR CODES

0-22 The signal from the other • Check the line connection.
end was interrupted for • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
more than the acceptable • Replace the NCU or FCU.
modem carrier drop time
• Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms)
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier
drop time.
Cross reference
• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3
Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-23 Too many errors during • Check the line connection.
reception • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting
and/or rx error criteria.
Cross reference
• Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02,
bits 0 and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not • Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short • Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
protocol mode • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
• Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a • Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained • Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.
0-52 Polarity changed during • Check the line connection.
communication Retry communication.
0-70 The communication mode • The other terminal did not have a compatible
specified in CM/JM was not communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
available was a V.34 data modem and not a fax
(V.8 calling and called modem.)
terminal) • A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling rx was initiated from the
calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell • The calling terminal could not detect ANSam
back to T.30 mode, due to noise, etc.
because it could not detect • ANSam was too short to detect.
ANSam after sending CI. • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
A874 7-4 SM
ERROR CODES

0-75 The called terminal fell • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
back to T.30 mode, • Check the line connection and condition.
because it could not detect • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
a CM in response to
ANSam (ANSam timeout).
0-76 The calling terminal fell • The called terminal could not detect a CM due
back to T.30 mode, to noise, etc.
because it could not detect • Check the line connection and condition.
a JM in response to a CM • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
0-77 The called terminal fell • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due
back to T.30 mode, to noise, etc.
because it could not detect • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
a CJ in response to JM pass JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal Check for line noise or other line problems.
detected CI while waiting If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back
for a V.21 signal. to T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected • The guard timer expired while starting these
due to a timeout in V.34 phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or
phase 2 – line probing. low signal level can cause these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
due to a timeout in V.34 • Try making a call at a later time.
phase 3 – equalizer • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
training. dedicated tx parameters.
0-82 The line was disconnected • Try increasing the tx level.
due to a timeout in the • Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
V.34 phase 4 – control
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
channel start-up.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
0-83 The line was disconnected
due to a timeout in the • Try increasing the tx level.
V.34 control channel • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
restart sequence. error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
in V.34 phase 4 – control • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
channel start-up.
• The signal did not stop within 10 s.
shooting
0-85 The line was disconnected

Trouble-
due to abnormal signaling • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
in V.34 control channel • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
restart.
0-86 The line was disconnected • The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal • Ask the other party to contact the
requested a data rate manufacturer.
using MPh that was not
available in the currently
selected symbol rate.
SM 7-5 A874
ERROR CODES

0-87 The control channel started • The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary
primary channel. channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
2-10 The modem cannot enter • Replace the FCU.
tx mode
2-11 Only one V.21 connection • Replace the FCU.
flag was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.
2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Update the modem ROM.
• Replace the FCU.
2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding • Replace the FCU.
(cpu not ready)
2-23 JBIG compression or • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error • Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Replace the EXFUNC board if the error is
frequent.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction • JBIG data error
error (BIH error) • Check the sender’s JBIG function.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction • Update the FCU ROM.
error (Float marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction
error (End marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction
error (Timeout)
2-50 The machine resets itself • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
for a fatal FCU system the FCU.
error
2-51 The machine resets itself • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
because of a fatal the FCU.
communication error
3-00 G4 interface board reset • Replace the G4 interface board or FCU.
3-10 Disconnection during ISDN • Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.
G3 communication • The other terminal may have dialed a wrong
number.
3-11 Disconnection during ISDN • Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.
G4 communication
3-20 A CSA signal was received • The operator at the other terminal may have
during ISDN G4 interrupted the communication.
communication
A874 7-6 SM
ERROR CODES

3-21 A CSA signal was sent • The local operator has interrupted the
during ISDN G4 communication.
communication, because
the Stop key was pressed
3-30 Mismatched specifications • Check the receive capabilities requested from
(rx capability) the other terminal.
4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.
• Check the connection between FCU and NCU.
• Replace the FCU or the NCU.
4-10 Communication failed • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
because of an ID Code programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed • The machine at the other end may be
Network) or Tel. No./CSI defective.
mismatch (Protection
against Wrong
Connections)
5-00 Data construction not • Replace the FCU.
possible
5-01 Data reconstruction not
possible
5-10 DCR timer expired
5-20 Storage impossible • Temporary memory shortage.
because of a lack of • Test the SAF memory.
memory • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board
5-21 Memory overflow
5-22 Mode table overflow after • Wait for the messages which are currently in
the second page of a the memory to be sent or delete some files
scanned document from memory.
5-23 Print data error when • Test the SAF memory.
printing a substitute rx or • Ask the other end to resend the message.
confidential rx message • Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.
5-24 Memory overflow after the • Try using a lower resolution setting.
second page of a scanned • Wait for the messages which are currently in
document the memory to be sent or delete some files
from memory.
5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
shooting
Trouble-
during reception of • Replace the FCU or NCU.

facsimile data
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal
was received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was
received
SM 7-7 A874
ERROR CODES

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not • Check the line connection.
detected • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
• Check for a bad line or defective remote
terminal.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data • Check the line connection.
frame not received within • Check connections from the NCU to the FCU.
18 s of CFR, but there was • Check for a bad line or defective remote
no line fail terminal.
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding • Defective FCU.
error • The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN • The other end pressed Stop during
received in reply to communication.
PPS.NULL • The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still • Check for line noise.
received at the other end • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or
after all communication the dedicated tx parameter for that address).
attempts at 2400 bps • Check the line connection.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during • The other terminal may be defective or
high speed modem incompatible.
communication
6-22 The machine resets the • Check for line noise.
sequence because of an • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
abnormal handshake in the FCU.
V.34 control channel • Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped • Replace the FCU.
within 6 s
A874 7-8 SM
ERROR CODES

9-40 CRC error during PC fax • Check the serial interface and cable
communication connection between the PC.
9-41 Third failure during PC fax • Replace the DIU (PCFE board) or FCU.
communication
9-42 DCN received
unexpectedly during PC
fax communication
9-43 Frame received
unexpectedly during PC
fax communication
9-44 Response time over during
PC fax communication
9-45 Frame transmission error
during PC fax
communication
9-61 Memory overflow occurs Check the SAF.
during reception
22-00 Original length exceeded • Divide the original into more than one page.
the maximum scan length • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the scan resolution if possible.
• Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while • Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving • Delete unnecessary files from memory.
• Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machine’s printer is
busy or out of order.
• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to • The job started normally but did not finish
line disconnection at the normally; data may or may not have been
other end received fully.
• Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store • Update the ROM
received data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.
23-00 Data read timeout during • Restart the machine.
construction • Replace the FCU
24-xx •
25-00 The machine software • Update the ROM
shooting
Trouble-
resets itself after a fatal • Replace the FCU.

transmission error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU.
SM 7-9 A874
FAX SC CODES
7.2 FAX SC CODES

7.2.1 OVERVIEW
When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition other than SC1201 and SC1207,
it resets itself automatically (default setting). This initializes the FCU without
erasing files in the SAF memory or resetting the switches.
NOTE: For details on Fax SC Codes 1201 and 1207, refer to the following
sections.
If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to “1”, when the FCU detects a Fax SC
Code condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the fax
unit is initialized using one of the following methods:
• Hold down the “#” and “*” keys for more than 10 s.
• Turn off the main power switch and turn it back on.
• Remove the rear cover, and press SW2 on the FCU.
The fax unit cannot make automatic service calls in reaction to a Fax SC Code,
because the fax unit cannot make fax communications in fax SC code conditions.
7.2.2 SC1201
When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires a
complete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.
There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM
initialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).
The possible causes are:
• SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the FCU is at the “OFF” position
• SRAM on the FCU has a physical defect
• Flash memory card or data copy tool connection was loose
7.2.3 SC1207
This is the same as SC1201 except the error location is the SRAM on the EXFUNC
board.
The possible causes are:
• SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the EXFUNC board is at the “OFF”
position.
• SRAM on the EXFUNC has a physical defect.
• The EXFUNC connection was loose.
A874 7-10 SM
FAX SC CODES
7.2.4 FAX SC CODE TABLE

Suggested Sys Switch Sys Switch
SC Code Description
Action 1F bit 7 = 0 1F bit 7 = 1
1102 Handshake error with Initialize the fax Automatic SC Code
BiCU at start-up unit. reset display
1111 Command TX/RX error (See section
to/from the BiCU 7.2.1.for the
1112 Base copier’s engine was initialization
reset procedure)
1120 Interface module error
1201 Unrecoverable FCU - Refer to section SC Code
SRAM error 7.2.2. display
1207 Unrecoverable EXFUNC Refer to section SC Code
- SRAM error 7.2.3. display
1299 Software error Turn off and on Automatic
the main switch. reset
1301 Original size error Check the scanner
mechanism.
1302 Scanner parameter error Initialize the fax
unit.
1303 Software error Initialize the fax
1304 unit.
1305
1306
1308
1313
1314
1316
1318
1323
1324
1326
1328
1334
1338
1401 Command timeout error - Initialize the fax
after scanning unit.
1403 unit.
1404
1405 Command timeout error - Check the
shooting
Trouble-
during storage connection for the

FCU.
1406 Command timeout error - Initialize the fax
original feed out unit.
1601 unit.
SM 7-11 A874
FIRMWARE HISTORY Rev. 09/2000
⇒7.3 FIRMWARE HISTORY

7.3.1 A874 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
A874 FAX OPTION FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

Initial Production A2855581 A Initial Production 16.01
• When sending an original wider than the A2855581 B April ’00 18.00
maximum paper width of the receiving Production
machine (Auto-Reduction OFF / JBIG
compression), the machine reduces the
image to the smaller size but sends the
left most area of the image instead of the
central area.
• Even though the following bit switch
settings should disable the File Retention
function, the machine retains files for 24
hours:
User Parameter switch 24 (swusr_18):
(bit1, bit0) = (1, 0)
• When bit 4 of Communication switch07 is
1 (Fallback from G4 to G3 when G4
communication fails on the ISDN B-
channel is enabled) and a G4
communication error occurs on the ISDN
B-channel (ADF mode), the machine falls
back to G3 and resumes transmission
from the second page. This is because
the first page has already exited from the
ADF.
A874 7-12 SM
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A283/A284 - 001 05/30/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – 3235e/3245e
RICOH – AFICIO 350e/450e
SAVIN – 9935DPE/9945DPE
SUBJECT: ANGLE BRACKET & PUSH SWITCH

Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.
GENERAL:
!
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A283 and A284 Parts Catalogs.
PARTS
Delete item numbers
16, 17, and 104 in
this section.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A2325867 Angle Bracket – Push Switch 1-0 63 16
AW500022 Push Switch 1-0 63 17
A2323552 A2323561 Ball Bearing 8x22x7 1-1 57 24
 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 038ABW

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:
!
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
SERVICE
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
MANUAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.
• 3-45 Updated Information (Key Counter Installation)

• 4-5, 11 and 23 Updated Information (SP Mode Tables)
• 4-61 Additional Information (User Codes)
• 6-8 Updated Information (Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment)

Rev. 08/2000 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION
Installation
[A]
A284I967.WMF
[B]
A284I965.WMF
7. Connect the key counter connector [A] to CN211 on the I/O board.
8. Reinstall the covers.
9. Attach the double-sided tape to the key counter bracket.
10. Peel off the backing of the double-sided tape and attach the key counter
assembly [B] to the left side of the scanner unit, as shown.
NOTE: When attaching the key counter assembly, press the assembly against
the scanner cover strongly. Otherwise, the key counter assembly may
come off easily.
⇒11. Turn on the Key Counter Option under User Tools, #19 Management Settings,
#5 Key Counter and select YES.
SM 3-45 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-109* 1* Laser Beam Pitch Input the laser beam pitch value for 400 0 ~ 262
2* Laser Beam Pitch Input the laser beam pitch value for 600 0 ~ 284
Service
Tables
5* Laser Unit Auto. Input the interval value of the laser 0 ~ 65535
Adjustment Interval beam pitch automatic adjustment. 1/step
When the number of times that the 1000 times
resolution been changed reaches this
value, the laser unit position is
automatically corrected.
6 Current LD Unit Displays the current LD unit position
Position (number of pulses from home position).
If this is different from the value of 2-
109-1 or 2-109-2, LD unit positioning
has failed.
7 Laser Beam Pitch Displays how many times the LD unit
Change Counter position has been changed (how many
times the resolution has changed.)
When the laser beam pitch adjustment
is done, this counter is reset to “0”.
8 Beam Pitch Data Resets the values of SP2-109-6 and 1: Start
Reset SP2-109-7. Press “1” to reset.
After replacing the LD unit, this SP
⇒
mode must be done.
2-110 Image Resolution Select the Image Resolution. 0: 400 dpi
Change 8: 600 dpi
SM 4-5 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
2-914* 4* Process Control Adjusts the development bias used 0 ~ 300
Setting - Bδ when paper with a small width is fed 10 V/step
feed tray.
2-920 LD Off Check Factory use only. 0: On
1: Off
2-921* Shading Correction - Selects whether shading correction for 0: No
Printer printing is done or not. 1: Yes
2-960* Toner Overflow Select whether the toner overflow 0: No
Sensor sensor is activated or not. 1: Yes
# LD PWM Selection - Changes the LD power PWM control. A 1~5
2-969* Printer larger value causes a darker image. 1/step
Use this SP to adjust the image density 4
Service
Tables
for printing from a personal computer or
printing a received fax message.
2-971 Toner Full Sensor Displays total occurrence of connection
⇒ Counter errors for the toner overflow sensor.
This SP is for factory use only.
3-001* 1* ID Sensor PWM This SP mode is added to solve the 0 ~ 255
Setting following problem. 1/step
A SC condition occurs when ID Sensor 100
Initial Setting is not done after doing an
NVRAM Clear or replacing the
NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored at doing the ID
Sensor Initial Setting.
2* ID Sensor Initial Performs the ID sensor initial setting. 1: Start
Setting The ID sensor output for the bare drum
(VSG) is adjusted to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
This SP mode should be performed
after replacing or cleaning the ID
sensor or replacing the drum or doing
an NVRAM clear.
3-103* ID Sensor Output Displays the current VSG and VSP VSP = x.xx V
Display output. VSG = x.xx V
If the ID sensor does not detect the ID
pattern, “VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V” is
displayed and an SC code is
generated.
If the ID sensor does not detect the
bare area of the drum, “VSP = 0.0
V/VSG =0.0 V” is displayed and an SC
code is generated.
SM 4-11 A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
5-131* Paper Size Type Selects the paper size type (for 0: Japan
Selection originals and copy paper). 1: North
• After changing the value, turn the America
main power switch off and on. 2: Europe
• If the paper size type of the archive
files stored in the HDD is different,
abnormal copies will be made. In this
condition, perform SP5-822 and ask
the user to restore the archive files.
5-212* 3* Page No. position in Japanese version only. Do not -10 ~ 10
Duplex Mode change the value. 1 mm/step
(Horizontal) 0 mm
4* Page No. position in
Duplex Mode
(Vertical)
Service
Tables
SM 4-23 A283/A284
Rev. 08/2000 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
4.4.3 LEDS
BICU
Monitors whether the program is working normally or not. The LED
LED101
blinks in normal conditions.
LED102 Monitors +5VE. During the energy saver mode, this LED will blink.

4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1
A2309352 Flash Memory Card – 4MB 1
A2309351 Case – Flash Memory Card 1
Service
Tables
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs/set) 1
54209516 Test Chart – OS-A3 (10 pcs/Set) 1
A0299387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 87 1
A2849099 NVRAM – Minus Counter 1
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS
A0289300 Grease Barrierta JFE 5 5/2 1
52039501 Silicone Grease G-501 1
⇒4.6 USER CODES

The following is the procedure to set the machine for User Code mode:
1. Register at least one user code – User Tools, #2 Copy, #14
Management Settings, #3 Reg. User Code.
2. Turn on User Code Management – User Tools, #1 System,
#18 User Code Manage, set to YES.
SM 4-61 A283/A284
LASER UNIT Rev. 08/2000
6.2.3 LASER BEAM PITCH ADJUSTMENT

After replacing the LD unit, perform the laser beam pitch adjustment. There are two
laser beam pitch adjustment procedures: one for 400 dpi, and one for 600 dpi.
These adjustments use the following SP modes.
• SP2-109-3: LD Initial Setting – 400 dpi
•
⇒
SP2-109-4: LD Initial Setting – 600 dpi
• SP2-902-3, no.16: Test Pattern Printing – Cross Stitch
1. Do SP 2-109-8.
2. Input the value “144” into SP2-109-1.
3. Perform SP2-109-3.
⇒4. Print out 400 dpi test pattern A3 (11x17), change SP2-110 to 1 and print out the
cross stitch test pattern using SP2-902-3 no. 16. For 600 dpi, set SP2-110 to 8.
5. Write the value of SP2-109-1 on the test pattern (in this case “144”).
6. Change the value of SP2-109-1 and print another test pattern, repeating steps
2 to 4. Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2-109-1 (e.g. “48”, “96”,
“192”, “240”).
7. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, the image
looks like a black vertical strip pattern.
NOTE: As an example, if the pattern made with the value “192” has less
obvious strips than the other print outs, the correct value is near “192”.
8. Adjust the laser beam pitch position until the thin lines are of uniform thickness
(no striping effect should appear on the printout), doing steps 1, 2, and 3 (in
step 1, input a value which is estimated to be correct, then do steps 2 and 3,
then if necessary go back to step 1 and try another value).
9. After adjusting the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi, adjust the laser beam pitch for
600 dpi, using the same procedure as for 400 dpi (use the SP modes for 600
dpi). The laser beam pitch for 600 dpi should be 24 ~ 48 more than for 400 dpi.
Feed Direction Feed Direction
Adjustment not complete Adjustment complete
A283/A284 6-8 SM
Originally issued as A283/A284 – 011. Please disregard A283/A284 – 011.
BULLETIN NUMBER: A283/A284 – 003 10/12/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – 3235E/3245E
RICOH – AFICIO 350E/450E

!
GENERAL:
SERVICE
MANUAL
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
PAGES:
• iii and iv Updated Information (Table of Contents)

• 7-27 Updated information (Firmware History)

Rev. 10/2000

4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ...........................................................................4-61
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS .................................................................................4-61
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............................. 5-1
5.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................5-1

6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 6-1
6.1 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................6-1
6.1.4 SCANNER MOTOR..........................................................................6-4
6.2 LASER UNIT .............................................................................................6-6
6.2.2 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................6-7
6.3.1 PRINTING ........................................................................................6-9
6.3.2 SCANNING.....................................................................................6-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................7-1
7.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................7-24
7.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................7-25
7.4.1 A283/A284 BICU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY ............7-27
SCANNER KIT B359

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................8-1
1.1.1 SCANNER CONTROL BOARD........................................................8-1
1.1.2 DRAM SIMM.....................................................................................8-2
1.2 SOFTWARE ..............................................................................................8-3
SM iii A283/A284
Rev. 10/2000
1.2.1 SCANNER DRIVERS .......................................................................8-3

1.2.2 SCANNER UTILITIES ......................................................................8-3
1.2.3 SCANNER UTILITY (OPTION).........................................................8-3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 8-4

2.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .........................................................................8-4
2.2 SCANNER FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................8-6
2.2.1 SELF DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................8-6
2.2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING IN THE SCANNER CONTROLLER.............8-6
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE................................................... 8-7
4. SERVICE TABLE ...................................................................... 8-11

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................8-11
4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM ACCESS PROCEDURE .............................8-11
4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..........................................8-11
4.2 DOWNLOADING NEW SOFTWARE ......................................................8-13
4.2.1 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURE .....................................8-13
4.2.2 ERROR MESSAGES DURING THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD ...8-14
5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................... 8-15

5.1 PRECAUTION .........................................................................................8-15
5.2 NOTE FOR REPLACING THE SCANNER CONTROLLER BOARD.......8-15
6. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................. 8-16

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITION..................................................................8-16
6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................8-16
6.2 LEDS .......................................................................................................8-17
A283/A284 iv SM
Rev. 10/2000 FIRMWARE HISTORY
⇒ 7.4 FIRMWARE HISTORY

7.4.1 A283/A284 BICU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
A283/A284 BICU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

Initial Production A2845113 B First Mass 8.9
Production
Corrects the Following: A2845113 C May ’00 8.10
SC990/542 occur simultaneously Production
Symptom:
When the main power switch is turned ON or
the machine recovers from Energy Saver
Mode, an SC990 may occur before the
machine reaches standby-by temperature.
(This has a very low occurrence rate). If this
happens, an SC542 will be triggered.
SC542: Fusing Temperature Warm-Up Error
Correction:
Fusing temperature control turns off
whenever an SC990 occurs.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 7-27 A283/A284
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: EXIT TRAY

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
The following part correction is being issued for all A283 and 284 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A6804321 A6804331 Exit Tray 1 69 4

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: HARD DISK

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
The hard disk for the copier A283/A284 has been changed.
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
Continued…
 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 085ABW

Tech Service Bulletin No. A283/A284 – 005
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A6915879 A6915862 Hard Disk 1-1 0 63 24
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Hard disk
installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Gestetner 3235e H52006xxxxx
Ricoh AFICIO 350e H52006xxxxx
Savin 9935DPE H52006xxxxx
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
BULLETIN NUMBER: A283/A284 – 005 REISSUE ! 08/21/2001
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: HARD DISK

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
The hard disk for the A283/A284 copier has been changed.
Continued…
Copyright  2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 097ABW
Tech Service Bulletin No. A283/A284 – 005 REISSUE !
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
A6915879 A6915862 Hard Disk 1-1 0 63 24
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Hard disk
! MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: MAGNET – QUENCHING LAMP

!
PARTS
GENERAL:
To standardize the part with other models, the quenching lamp magnet number has been changed.
Continued…

Tech Service Bulletin No. A283/A284 –006
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
A2322373 A2673455 Magnet – Quenching Lamp 1-1 0/0 65 9
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Magnet –
Quenching Lamp installed during production

Gestetner 3245DPE H53009xxxxx
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: MAGNET – QUENCHING LAMP

!
PARTS
GENERAL:
To standardize the part with other models, the quenching lamp magnet number has been changed.
Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A283/A284 –006 REISSUE !
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
A2322373 A2673455 Magnet – Quenching Lamp 1-1 0/0 65 9
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Magnet –
Quenching Lamp installed during production.

Gestetner 3245DPE H53069xxxxx
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: PFB BOARD

GENERAL:
!
A counter electromotive force flows through the clutch drive circuits and causes the off timing of the clutch to
ELECTRICAL
be delayed. This can result in a paper jam.
A zener diode has been added to the drive circuits of the PFB board for the following clutches, preventing
any counter electromotive force from flowing through the circuits:
1. Relay clutch
2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
4. By-pass Tray Feed Clutch
Relay Clutch
Zener
Zener Diode Relay Clutch
Upper
UpperPaper
PaperFeed
Feed
Zener Diode LowerPaper

Lower PaperFeed
Feed
Zener
Bypass Tray Clutch

Bypass Tray Clutch
Zener Diode
Continued…

Page 2 of 2
: The following parts corrections are being issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
A2325130 A2325135 PFB Board 1-1 1 59 20
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style PFB
Board installed during production.

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: PFB BOARD

GENERAL:
!
A counter electromotive force flows through the clutch drive circuits and causes the off timing of the clutch to
ELECTRICAL
be delayed. This can result in a paper jam.
A zener diode has been added to the drive circuits of the PFB board for the following clutches, preventing
any counter electromotive force from flowing through the circuits:
1. Relay clutch
2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch
3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch
4. By-pass Tray Feed Clutch
Relay Clutch
Zener Diode
Zener Diode Relay Clutch
Upper
UpperPaper
PaperFeed
Feed
Clutch
Zener
Zener Diode
Lower Paper
Lower PaperFeed
Feed
Diode Clutch
Bypass Tray Clutch

Bypass Tray Clutch
Zener Diode
Continued…
Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
A2325130 A2325135 PFB Board 1-1 1 59 20
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style PFB

! Gestetner 3235e H52070xxxxx
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: SPUR
!
GENERAL:
PARTS
To prevent toner from adhering to the spur, the material of the spur has been changed.
REFERENCE
A2322374 B0042310 Spur 6 0 33 2
Continued…

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Spur

Ricoh Aficio 350e H52010xxxxx
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: SPUR
!
GENERAL:
PARTS
To prevent toner from adhering to the spur, the material of the spur has been changed.
REFERENCE
A2322374 B0042310 Spur 6 0 33 2
Continued…
Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Spur

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: COPY TRAY GUIDE

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
The edge of the Copy Tray Guide has been rounded to ensure that scratches or other minor injuries do not
occur.
!
MECHANICAL
REFERENCE
A2324498 A2844498 Copy Tray Guide 1 0 13 2
Continued…

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Copy Tray
Guide installed during production

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
RICOH – AFICIO 350E/450
SUBJECT: THERMOFUSE
GENERAL:
!
The A2324100 thermofuse has been discontinued and has been changed to A2314100. With this change,
PARTS
the Part Number for the fusing unit assembly has also been changed as shown below. The following parts
corrections are being issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
A2324100 A2314100 Thermofuse 1 0 47 8
A2327320 A2317320 Fusing Unit Ass’y (115V) 1 0 47 1
 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO095ABW

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: HARD DISK

GENERAL:
!
PARTS
The A6915860 hard disk for the mainframe copier has been changed to A6915861. It was then changed
again to A6915862 however, there are no functional changes. The following parts corrections are being
issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
A6915860 A6915862 Hard Disk 1-1 0 63 24

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: INNER COVERS

GENERAL:
!
PARTS
To facilitate parts standardization, the left inner cover and right upper inner cover have been changed to
A2841376 and A2841372.
REFERENCE
A2321375 A2841376 Left Inner Cover 1-1 0 13 12
A2321371 A2841372 Inner Cover – Right Upper 1-1 0 13 13

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: HOT ROLLER

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
Due to a vendor change the hot roller has been changed.
REFERENCE
AE011041 AE011059 Hot Roller 1-1 0 47 17
 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO095ABW

BULLETIN NUMBER: A283/A284 –
–014
014 08/06/2001
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: PHOTOINTERRUPTOR
!
GENERAL:
PARTS
To facilitate parts standardization, the photointerruptor (feeler) has been changed from AW020102 to
AW020126. The following parts corrections are being issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
AW020102 AW020126 Photointerruptor 1-1 0 55 9

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
SUBJECT: DEVELOPMENT UNIT

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
The parts listed below have been modified to facilitate the assembly process at the factory. However their
part numbers remain the same except for the development unit.
1. Sponge (AA153053, P45, #28): The material of the double-sided tape has been changed to facilitate
attachment, as the previous type tended to stretch and not stick well.
2 Decal (A2323066, P45, #31): The decal’s thickness has been reduced from 0.1 to 0.065mm to prevent it
from partially peeling off, as it tended to do since it was attached to a curved surface.
REFERENCE
A2327460 A2327459 Development Unit 1 0 45 1

APPLICABLE MODEL:
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
!
PARTS
GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
• UPDATE 1: Flexible Board – During board assembly, slack in the Flexible Board
high-voltage lines may cause these lines to get caught in between the
board and the base plate. To prevent this from occurring, the two lines
have been bound in 3 additional locations and the insulating material
has been strengthened. Please update your Parts Catalog with the
following information.
REFERENCE
A2845620 A2845621 Flexible Board 1 1 21 15
Continued…
Page 2 of 4
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Flexible

Gestetner 3235e H5216100834
Ricoh Aficio 350e H5216100876
Savin 9935DPE H5216100834
Savin 9945DPE H5316100001
• UPDATE 2: End Fence – The shape of the End Fence edge has been changed to
ensure the fence hooks pinch the proper location. This will prevent the
hooks from getting caught and breaking. The End Fence has also been
changed to a stronger material. Please update your Parts Catalog with
the following information.
REFERENCE
AF017020 AF017026 End Fence 1 1 29 6
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style End
Fence installed during production.

Savin 9935DPE H5206900001
Savin 9945DPE H5306900001
Continued…
Page 3 of 4
• UPDATE 3: Idler Gear – Bands of low image density may appear at 5 mm

intervals, especially noticeable with half-tones. Slight warping in the
gear created by the supporting tension of the ribs causes this to occur.
A new style Idler Gear has been created where, the gear ribs have
been removed to ensure the diameter remains consistent. Please
update your Parts Catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
AB017429 AB014189 Gear – 27Z 1 1 41 12
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Idler Gear

Savin 9935DPE H5207100001
Savin 9945DPE H5307100001
Continued…
Page 4 of 4
• UPDATE 4: Driven Roller & Guide Plate – To protect against heat deformation,
the materials for the Driven Roller and Guide Plate have been
changed. Please update your Parts Catalog with the following
information.
REFERENCE
AF040559 AF040575 Driven Roller – M9 2 1 43 16
A2324491 A2844491 Guide Plate – Fusing Unit 1 1 43 18
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A283/A284 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Driven
Roller and Guide Plate installed during production.

Savin 9935DPE H5207100001
Savin 9945DPE H5307100001
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SUBJECT: HARD DISK

GENERAL:
!
PARTS
The Hard Disk Drive has been changed because the old style Hard Disk Drive (P/N A6915862) has been
discontinued from production. The following part update is being issued for all A283/A284 Parts Catalogs.
REFERENCE
A6915862 A6915863 Hard Disk Drive 1 0 63 24
UNITS AFFECTED:
A283/A284 Serial Number cut-in was not available at time of publication.
APPLICABLE MODEL:
SUBJECT: CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING PAD/BRUSH

GENERAL:

PARTS
To increase the efficiency of cleaning the charge roller, a brush roller has replaced the charge roller-cleaning
pad. With the introduction of the charge cleaning brush, the following parts have been modified.
• Charge Unit Front Arm
• Charge Unit Rear Arm
• Pressure Spring
REFERENCE
A2322356 - Stepped Screw – M6 1-0 - 39 9
A2322298 - Bracket – Charge Cleaning 1-0 - 39 10
AA062301 - Tension Spring 1-0 - 39 11
A2322300 - Roller - Cleaning 1-0 - 39 12
A2322430 Cleaning Pad 1-0 - 39 13
G0652330 Brush Roller – Cleaning 0-1 3 39 13
A2322303 G0652321 Front Arm – Charge Unit 1-1 1 39 15
A2322305 G0652326 Rear Arm – Charge Unit 1-1 1 39 23
AA063561 AA063648 Pressure Spring 2-2 1 39 16
A2322403 G0652270 Receptacle – Charge Roller 1-1 3 37 17
NOTE 1: This only affects PCU Units ordered as service parts.
NOTE 2: PCU Units with Cleaning Pads and PCU Units with Cleaning Brushes can be used in all field
machines. However, the Cleaning Pad and Cleaning Brush are not interchangeable unless all
the related parts are replaced at the same time.
Continued…
Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Tech Service Bulletin No. A283/A284 - 018
Page 2 of 3
ITEMS DELETED FROM THE PARTS CATALOG
ITEMS ADDED TO THE PARTS CATALOG
Continued…
Page 3 of 4
CLEANING ROLLER BRUSH REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the Drum. (Refer to 6.3.2

on the service manual)
2. Remove the snap rings [A].
3. Remove the springs [B].
4. Remove the charge roller [C].
5. Remove the spring [D].
6. Remove the E-ring [E]
7. Remove the cover [F].
8. Remove the stud [G].
9. Remove the cleaning pad Ass’y
[H].
10. Remove the bushings [I], front

terminal [J] and rear terminal [K].
11. Install the front terminal [J], rear
terminal [K] and bushing [I] to the
new front [M] and rear arm [L].
12. Install the new front arm [L], the
rear arm [M], the stud [G], the new
brush roller [N] and the charge
roller [C]
13. Install the E-ring [E] and the snap
rings [A].
14. Install the new springs [P].
15. Put back the cover [F] and the

Drum.
Continued…
Page 4 of 4
Charge Roller Receptacle:
The Charge Cleaning Pad has been changed over to a Brush Roller. As a result, the Charge Cleaning
Bracket has been deleted. The Charge Roller Receptacle has been modified to reflect this change.
New
UNITS AFFECTED:
Available as service parts only.

APPLICABLE MODEL:
LANIER – 5435/5445
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
!
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• iii Updated Information (Table of Contents)

• 4-3 Updated Information (SP Modes)
• Remove page 7-27 from the A283/A284 Service Manual. The “Firmware History Section,” in the
A283/A284 Service Manual has been replaced by the A283/A284 Firmware History document released
on 08/28/2003.
Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Rev. 08/2003

4.5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ...........................................................................4-61
4.5.2 LUBRICANTS .................................................................................4-61
5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................... 5-1
5.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................5-1

6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 6-1
6.1 SCANNER UNIT........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.........................................................................6-1
6.1.4 SCANNER MOTOR..........................................................................6-4
6.2 LASER UNIT .............................................................................................6-6
6.2.2 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................6-7
6.3.1 PRINTING ........................................................................................6-9
6.3.2 SCANNING.....................................................................................6-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................7-1
7.2.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................7-24
7.2.2 SWITCHES.....................................................................................7-25
SCANNER KIT B359

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION......................................... 8-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................8-1
1.1.1 SCANNER CONTROL BOARD ........................................................8-1
1.1.2 DRAM SIMM.....................................................................................8-2
1.2 SOFTWARE ..............................................................................................8-3
SM iii A283/A284
Mode No.
1 and 2 3
1-105* 1* Fusing Temperature Adjusts the fusing temperature for 170 ~ 200 (40)
Adjustment paper fed from a paper tray. 150 ~ 180 (30)
(Paper Tray) 1°C/step
185°C (40)
165°C (30)
2* Fusing Temperature Adjusts the fusing temperature for 170 ~ 200 (40)
Adjustment paper fed from the by-pass feed unit. 160 ~ 190 (30)
(By-pass) 1°C/step
185°C (40)
175°C (30)
1-106 Fusing Temperature Displays the fusing temperature.
Display
1-109 Fusing Nip Band Checks the fusing nip band 1: Start
Check Refer to “Nip Band Width Adjustment” 0: Stop
for more details.
1-111* Paper Switch Back Adjusts the paper switch back timing +5 ~ –5
Timing Use this SP mode when paper often 1 mm/step
(Duplex) jams at the inverter gate in the duplex 0 mm
unit.
2-001* 1* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid –1000 ~ –2000
Service
Tables
Adjustment plate during copying. 10 V/step
(Copying) After replacing the drum or charge –1650 V (40)
roller, change this value to the default. –1630 V (30)
2* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the voltage applied to the 0 ~ 700
Adjustment (ID charge roller when making the VSDP ID 10 V/step
⇒ sensor pattern) sensor pattern (for charge roller voltage

correction). The actual charge roller
400 V
NOTE: Requires
BICU version 8.12
voltage is this value plus the value of or newer.
SP2-001-1.
Do not adjust.
2-005* 1* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the lower threshold value for 0.1 ~ 1.0
(Lower threshold) When the value of VSP/VSG is greater 0.85
voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from –
500 to –530).
2* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the upper threshold value for 0.1 ~ 1.0
(Upper threshold) When the value of VSP/VSG is greater 0.90
voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute
value).
3* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the lower limit value for charge –1000 ~ –2000
Correction 3 roller voltage correction. 10 V/step
(Lower limit) –1650 V (40)
–1630 V (30)
4* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the upper limit value for charge –1000 ~ –2000
⇒ Correction 4
(Upper limit)
roller voltage correction.
NOTE: Requires BICU version 8.12 or newer.
10 V/step
–1700 V
5* Charge Roller Bias Adjusts the correction voltage 0 ~ 100
Correction Step adjustment step size. 10 V/Step
30 V
SM 4-3 A283/A284
FIRMWARE HISTORY
FIRMWARE HISTORY
PUBLISHED DATE: 08/28/2003
BULLETIN NUMBER: A283/A284

APPLICABLE MODEL:
LANIER – 5435/5445
Flash
Memory
GENERAL: Card
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solutions Center FTP Site at
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.

FIRMWARE
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about
the FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM/Flash Card Exchange program.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
A283/A284 FIRMWARE HISTORY: .............................................2
A283/A284 BICU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY .........2
Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3

Firmware History for A283/A284
A283/A284 FIRMWARE HISTORY:
FILE NAME VERSION CHECKSUM PRODUCTION

A2845113 B 8.9 A308 1st Mass Prod.
C 8.10 8953 May ’00 Prod.
D 8.12 05A6 Not effect to production
(Production has been discontinued).
A283/A284 BICU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
FIRMWARE FIRMWARE
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION SERIAL NUMBER
LEVEL VERSION
Initial Production A2845113 B First Mass Production 8.9
Corrects the Following: A2845113 C May ’00 Production 8.10
SC990/542 occur simultaneously
Symptom:
When the main power switch is turned ON or
the machine recovers from Energy Saver
Mode, an SC990 may occur before the
machine reaches standby-by temperature.
(This has a very low occurrence rate). If this
happens, an SC542 will be triggered.
SC542: Fusing Temperature Warm-Up Error
Correction:
Fusing temperature control turns off whenever
an SC990 occurs.
Corrects the Following: A2845113 D No longer in 8.12
production
SC101 occurs when SP2902 is performed.
The following functions have been added.
1) NVRAM check is performed at power ON. If
the machine cannot access the NVRAM,
SC900 is triggered.
2) All letters from A to Z can be used for the
serial number setting (SP5-811).
The procedure is as follows:
1. Access SP 5-811 (serial number input).
2. Press the asterisk key ("*"). The letter "A"
appears on the display.
3. Press "0", and the letter displayed will
then change from "A"Æ"B"Æ…“Z”
4. Press the asterisk key or any number
except 0 to input the letter being
continued…
displayed.
Page 2 of 3
Firmware History for A283/A284
FIRMWARE FIRMWARE
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION SERIAL NUMBER
LEVEL VERSION
The default values for the following SP modes
have been changed to minimize dirtying on the
charge roller.
New default:
1) SP2001-2 400
2) SP2005-4 1700
Page 3 of 3

A283/A284 Supplemental Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A283/A284 Supplemental Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A283/A284 Supplemental Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A283/A284

SUPPLEMENTAL SERVICE MANUAL

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

 2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

PRODUCT CODE COMPANY

4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ....................................................4-61

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

SCANNER KIT B359

1.2.1 SCANNER DRIVERS .......................................................................8-3

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 8-4

3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 8-7

4. SERVICE TABLE ....................................................................... 8-11

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...................................... 8-15

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................... 8-16

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 1-1

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS....................................... 2-1

5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 5-1

6. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 6-1

7. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 7-1

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS A283/A284

SERVICE TABLES A283/A284

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE A283/A284

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT A283/A284

SCANNER KIT B359

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

A283 (35 cpm) A284 (45 cpm) Note

A283 (35 cpm) A284 (45 cpm) Note

1.2 PAPER EXIT TRAY SELECTION

[A] A4, LT [B] A3, LT

[C] Longer than A3, DLT

Installed options Exit tray for paper longer than 330 mm

1.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products

1.3.2 INSTALLABLE OPTION TABLE

Relationship between main machine, mailbox, and finisher

1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.5 PAPER PATH

1.6 DRIVE LAYOUT

1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

1.8 BOARD STRUCTURE

Image data SIFB HDD

Exposure Lamp Polygon

Paper Feed Sensors

2. IOB (Input/Output Board)

3. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

4. SIB (Scanner Interface Board)

5. SIFB (Scanner Interface Board)

6. Mother Board (Option)

2.2 IMAGE PROCESSING

SBU SIFB BICU

A/D Driver Driver IPU

2.2.3 IMAGE PROCESSING

Image Processing Path

Scanning Image Processing Printing

Auto MTF γ Corre- Error